From e7d600494579ef319b20221769c3b2fe12962243 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: bnewbold Date: Tue, 30 Mar 2010 20:52:45 -0400 Subject: Major hierarchy reorganization; see README. copy-to-ide and Makefile updated to conform; .gitignore added; LICENSE added --- stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_adc.c | 1402 +++++++++++++++++ stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_bkp.c | 272 ++++ stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_can.c | 907 +++++++++++ stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_crc.c | 114 ++ stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_dac.c | 389 +++++ stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_dbgmcu.c | 97 ++ stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_dma.c | 678 ++++++++ stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_exti.c | 219 +++ stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_flash.c | 916 +++++++++++ stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_fsmc.c | 861 ++++++++++ stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_gpio.c | 583 +++++++ stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_i2c.c | 1216 ++++++++++++++ stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_iwdg.c | 148 ++ stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_lib.c | 303 ++++ stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_nvic.c | 751 +++++++++ stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_pwr.c | 280 ++++ stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_rcc.c | 1104 +++++++++++++ stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_rtc.c | 320 ++++ stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_sdio.c | 832 ++++++++++ stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_spi.c | 863 ++++++++++ stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_systick.c | 181 +++ stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_tim.c | 3219 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_usart.c | 1001 ++++++++++++ stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_wwdg.c | 185 +++ 24 files changed, 16841 insertions(+) create mode 100644 stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_adc.c create mode 100644 stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_bkp.c create mode 100644 stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_can.c create mode 100644 stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_crc.c create mode 100644 stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_dac.c create mode 100644 stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_dbgmcu.c create mode 100644 stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_dma.c create mode 100644 stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_exti.c create mode 100644 stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_flash.c create mode 100644 stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_fsmc.c create mode 100644 stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_gpio.c create mode 100644 stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_i2c.c create mode 100644 stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_iwdg.c create mode 100644 stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_lib.c create mode 100644 stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_nvic.c create mode 100644 stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_pwr.c create mode 100644 stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_rcc.c create mode 100644 stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_rtc.c create mode 100644 stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_sdio.c create mode 100644 stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_spi.c create mode 100644 stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_systick.c create mode 100644 stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_tim.c create mode 100644 stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_usart.c create mode 100644 stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_wwdg.c (limited to 'stm32lib/src') diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_adc.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_adc.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..413c920 --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_adc.c @@ -0,0 +1,1402 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ******************** +* File Name : stm32f10x_adc.c +* Author : MCD Application Team +* Version : V2.0.2 +* Date : 07/11/2008 +* Description : This file provides all the ADC firmware functions. +******************************************************************************** +* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS +* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME. +* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, +* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE +* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING +* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS. +*******************************************************************************/ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32f10x_adc.h" +#include "stm32f10x_rcc.h" + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* ADC DISCNUM mask */ +#define CR1_DISCNUM_Reset ((u32)0xFFFF1FFF) + +/* ADC DISCEN mask */ +#define CR1_DISCEN_Set ((u32)0x00000800) +#define CR1_DISCEN_Reset ((u32)0xFFFFF7FF) + +/* ADC JAUTO mask */ +#define CR1_JAUTO_Set ((u32)0x00000400) +#define CR1_JAUTO_Reset ((u32)0xFFFFFBFF) + +/* ADC JDISCEN mask */ +#define CR1_JDISCEN_Set ((u32)0x00001000) +#define CR1_JDISCEN_Reset ((u32)0xFFFFEFFF) + +/* ADC AWDCH mask */ +#define CR1_AWDCH_Reset ((u32)0xFFFFFFE0) + +/* ADC Analog watchdog enable mode mask */ +#define CR1_AWDMode_Reset ((u32)0xFF3FFDFF) + +/* CR1 register Mask */ +#define CR1_CLEAR_Mask ((u32)0xFFF0FEFF) + +/* ADC ADON mask */ +#define CR2_ADON_Set ((u32)0x00000001) +#define CR2_ADON_Reset ((u32)0xFFFFFFFE) + +/* ADC DMA mask */ +#define CR2_DMA_Set ((u32)0x00000100) +#define CR2_DMA_Reset ((u32)0xFFFFFEFF) + +/* ADC RSTCAL mask */ +#define CR2_RSTCAL_Set ((u32)0x00000008) + +/* ADC CAL mask */ +#define CR2_CAL_Set ((u32)0x00000004) + +/* ADC SWSTART mask */ +#define CR2_SWSTART_Set ((u32)0x00400000) + +/* ADC EXTTRIG mask */ +#define CR2_EXTTRIG_Set ((u32)0x00100000) +#define CR2_EXTTRIG_Reset ((u32)0xFFEFFFFF) + +/* ADC Software start mask */ +#define CR2_EXTTRIG_SWSTART_Set ((u32)0x00500000) +#define CR2_EXTTRIG_SWSTART_Reset ((u32)0xFFAFFFFF) + +/* ADC JEXTSEL mask */ +#define CR2_JEXTSEL_Reset ((u32)0xFFFF8FFF) + +/* ADC JEXTTRIG mask */ +#define CR2_JEXTTRIG_Set ((u32)0x00008000) +#define CR2_JEXTTRIG_Reset ((u32)0xFFFF7FFF) + +/* ADC JSWSTART mask */ +#define CR2_JSWSTART_Set ((u32)0x00200000) + +/* ADC injected software start mask */ +#define CR2_JEXTTRIG_JSWSTART_Set ((u32)0x00208000) +#define CR2_JEXTTRIG_JSWSTART_Reset ((u32)0xFFDF7FFF) + +/* ADC TSPD mask */ +#define CR2_TSVREFE_Set ((u32)0x00800000) +#define CR2_TSVREFE_Reset ((u32)0xFF7FFFFF) + +/* CR2 register Mask */ +#define CR2_CLEAR_Mask ((u32)0xFFF1F7FD) + +/* ADC SQx mask */ +#define SQR3_SQ_Set ((u32)0x0000001F) +#define SQR2_SQ_Set ((u32)0x0000001F) +#define SQR1_SQ_Set ((u32)0x0000001F) + +/* SQR1 register Mask */ +#define SQR1_CLEAR_Mask ((u32)0xFF0FFFFF) + +/* ADC JSQx mask */ +#define JSQR_JSQ_Set ((u32)0x0000001F) + +/* ADC JL mask */ +#define JSQR_JL_Set ((u32)0x00300000) +#define JSQR_JL_Reset ((u32)0xFFCFFFFF) + +/* ADC SMPx mask */ +#define SMPR1_SMP_Set ((u32)0x00000007) +#define SMPR2_SMP_Set ((u32)0x00000007) + +/* ADC JDRx registers offset */ +#define JDR_Offset ((u8)0x28) + +/* ADC1 DR register base address */ +#define DR_ADDRESS ((u32)0x4001244C) + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : ADC_DeInit +* Description : Deinitializes the ADCx peripheral registers to their default +* reset values. +* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void ADC_DeInit(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + + switch (*(u32*)&ADCx) + { + case ADC1_BASE: + /* Enable ADC1 reset state */ + RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_ADC1, ENABLE); + /* Release ADC1 from reset state */ + RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_ADC1, DISABLE); + break; + + case ADC2_BASE: + /* Enable ADC2 reset state */ + RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_ADC2, ENABLE); + /* Release ADC2 from reset state */ + RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_ADC2, DISABLE); + break; + + case ADC3_BASE: + /* Enable ADC3 reset state */ + RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_ADC3, ENABLE); + /* Release ADC3 from reset state */ + RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_ADC3, DISABLE); + break; + + default: + break; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : ADC_Init +* Description : Initializes the ADCx peripheral according to the specified parameters +* in the ADC_InitStruct. +* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral. +* - ADC_InitStruct: pointer to an ADC_InitTypeDef structure that +* contains the configuration information for the specified +* ADC peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : None +******************************************************************************/ +void ADC_Init(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, ADC_InitTypeDef* ADC_InitStruct) +{ + u32 tmpreg1 = 0; + u8 tmpreg2 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_MODE(ADC_InitStruct->ADC_Mode)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(ADC_InitStruct->ADC_ScanConvMode)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(ADC_InitStruct->ADC_ContinuousConvMode)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_EXT_TRIG(ADC_InitStruct->ADC_ExternalTrigConv)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_DATA_ALIGN(ADC_InitStruct->ADC_DataAlign)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_REGULAR_LENGTH(ADC_InitStruct->ADC_NbrOfChannel)); + + /*---------------------------- ADCx CR1 Configuration -----------------*/ + /* Get the ADCx CR1 value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->CR1; + /* Clear DUALMOD and SCAN bits */ + tmpreg1 &= CR1_CLEAR_Mask; + /* Configure ADCx: Dual mode and scan conversion mode */ + /* Set DUALMOD bits according to ADC_Mode value */ + /* Set SCAN bit according to ADC_ScanConvMode value */ + tmpreg1 |= (u32)(ADC_InitStruct->ADC_Mode | ((u32)ADC_InitStruct->ADC_ScanConvMode << 8)); + /* Write to ADCx CR1 */ + ADCx->CR1 = tmpreg1; + + /*---------------------------- ADCx CR2 Configuration -----------------*/ + /* Get the ADCx CR2 value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->CR2; + /* Clear CONT, ALIGN and EXTSEL bits */ + tmpreg1 &= CR2_CLEAR_Mask; + /* Configure ADCx: external trigger event and continuous conversion mode */ + /* Set ALIGN bit according to ADC_DataAlign value */ + /* Set EXTSEL bits according to ADC_ExternalTrigConv value */ + /* Set CONT bit according to ADC_ContinuousConvMode value */ + tmpreg1 |= (u32)(ADC_InitStruct->ADC_DataAlign | ADC_InitStruct->ADC_ExternalTrigConv | + ((u32)ADC_InitStruct->ADC_ContinuousConvMode << 1)); + /* Write to ADCx CR2 */ + ADCx->CR2 = tmpreg1; + + /*---------------------------- ADCx SQR1 Configuration -----------------*/ + /* Get the ADCx SQR1 value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->SQR1; + /* Clear L bits */ + tmpreg1 &= SQR1_CLEAR_Mask; + /* Configure ADCx: regular channel sequence length */ + /* Set L bits according to ADC_NbrOfChannel value */ + tmpreg2 |= (ADC_InitStruct->ADC_NbrOfChannel - 1); + tmpreg1 |= ((u32)tmpreg2 << 20); + /* Write to ADCx SQR1 */ + ADCx->SQR1 = tmpreg1; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : ADC_StructInit +* Description : Fills each ADC_InitStruct member with its default value. +* Input : ADC_InitStruct : pointer to an ADC_InitTypeDef structure +* which will be initialized. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void ADC_StructInit(ADC_InitTypeDef* ADC_InitStruct) +{ + /* Reset ADC init structure parameters values */ + /* Initialize the ADC_Mode member */ + ADC_InitStruct->ADC_Mode = ADC_Mode_Independent; + + /* initialize the ADC_ScanConvMode member */ + ADC_InitStruct->ADC_ScanConvMode = DISABLE; + + /* Initialize the ADC_ContinuousConvMode member */ + ADC_InitStruct->ADC_ContinuousConvMode = DISABLE; + + /* Initialize the ADC_ExternalTrigConv member */ + ADC_InitStruct->ADC_ExternalTrigConv = ADC_ExternalTrigConv_T1_CC1; + + /* Initialize the ADC_DataAlign member */ + ADC_InitStruct->ADC_DataAlign = ADC_DataAlign_Right; + + /* Initialize the ADC_NbrOfChannel member */ + ADC_InitStruct->ADC_NbrOfChannel = 1; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : ADC_Cmd +* Description : Enables or disables the specified ADC peripheral. +* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral. +* - NewState: new state of the ADCx peripheral. This parameter +* can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void ADC_Cmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Set the ADON bit to wake up the ADC from power down mode */ + ADCx->CR2 |= CR2_ADON_Set; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected ADC peripheral */ + ADCx->CR2 &= CR2_ADON_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : ADC_DMACmd +* Description : Enables or disables the specified ADC DMA request. +* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral. +* Note: ADC2 hasn't a DMA capability. +* - NewState: new state of the selected ADC DMA transfer. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void ADC_DMACmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_DMA_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected ADC DMA request */ + ADCx->CR2 |= CR2_DMA_Set; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected ADC DMA request */ + ADCx->CR2 &= CR2_DMA_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : ADC_ITConfig +* Description : Enables or disables the specified ADC interrupts. +* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral. +* - ADC_IT: specifies the ADC interrupt sources to be enabled +* or disabled. +* This parameter can be any combination of the following values: +* - ADC_IT_EOC: End of conversion interrupt mask +* - ADC_IT_AWD: Analog watchdog interrupt mask +* - ADC_IT_JEOC: End of injected conversion interrupt mask +* - NewState: new state of the specified ADC interrupts. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void ADC_ITConfig(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, u16 ADC_IT, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + u8 itmask = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_IT(ADC_IT)); + + /* Get the ADC IT index */ + itmask = (u8)ADC_IT; + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected ADC interrupts */ + ADCx->CR1 |= itmask; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected ADC interrupts */ + ADCx->CR1 &= (~(u32)itmask); + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : ADC_ResetCalibration +* Description : Resets the selected ADC calibration registers. +* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void ADC_ResetCalibration(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + + /* Resets the selected ADC calibartion registers */ + ADCx->CR2 |= CR2_RSTCAL_Set; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : ADC_GetResetCalibrationStatus +* Description : Gets the selected ADC reset calibration registers status. +* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : The new state of ADC reset calibration registers (SET or RESET). +*******************************************************************************/ +FlagStatus ADC_GetResetCalibrationStatus(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + + /* Check the status of RSTCAL bit */ + if ((ADCx->CR2 & CR2_RSTCAL_Set) != (u32)RESET) + { + /* RSTCAL bit is set */ + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* RSTCAL bit is reset */ + bitstatus = RESET; + } + + /* Return the RSTCAL bit status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : ADC_StartCalibration +* Description : Starts the selected ADC calibration process. +* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void ADC_StartCalibration(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + + /* Enable the selected ADC calibration process */ + ADCx->CR2 |= CR2_CAL_Set; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : ADC_GetCalibrationStatus +* Description : Gets the selected ADC calibration status. +* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : The new state of ADC calibration (SET or RESET). +*******************************************************************************/ +FlagStatus ADC_GetCalibrationStatus(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + + /* Check the status of CAL bit */ + if ((ADCx->CR2 & CR2_CAL_Set) != (u32)RESET) + { + /* CAL bit is set: calibration on going */ + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* CAL bit is reset: end of calibration */ + bitstatus = RESET; + } + + /* Return the CAL bit status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : ADC_SoftwareStartConvCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the selected ADC software start conversion . +* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral. +* - NewState: new state of the selected ADC software start conversion. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void ADC_SoftwareStartConvCmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected ADC conversion on external event and start the selected + ADC conversion */ + ADCx->CR2 |= CR2_EXTTRIG_SWSTART_Set; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected ADC conversion on external event and stop the selected + ADC conversion */ + ADCx->CR2 &= CR2_EXTTRIG_SWSTART_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : ADC_GetSoftwareStartConvStatus +* Description : Gets the selected ADC Software start conversion Status. +* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : The new state of ADC software start conversion (SET or RESET). +*******************************************************************************/ +FlagStatus ADC_GetSoftwareStartConvStatus(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + + /* Check the status of SWSTART bit */ + if ((ADCx->CR2 & CR2_SWSTART_Set) != (u32)RESET) + { + /* SWSTART bit is set */ + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* SWSTART bit is reset */ + bitstatus = RESET; + } + + /* Return the SWSTART bit status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : ADC_DiscModeChannelCountConfig +* Description : Configures the discontinuous mode for the selected ADC regular +* group channel. +* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral. +* - Number: specifies the discontinuous mode regular channel +* count value. This number must be between 1 and 8. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void ADC_DiscModeChannelCountConfig(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, u8 Number) +{ + u32 tmpreg1 = 0; + u32 tmpreg2 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_REGULAR_DISC_NUMBER(Number)); + + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->CR1; + /* Clear the old discontinuous mode channel count */ + tmpreg1 &= CR1_DISCNUM_Reset; + /* Set the discontinuous mode channel count */ + tmpreg2 = Number - 1; + tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2 << 13; + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->CR1 = tmpreg1; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : ADC_DiscModeCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the discontinuous mode on regular group +* channel for the specified ADC +* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral. +* - NewState: new state of the selected ADC discontinuous mode +* on regular group channel. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void ADC_DiscModeCmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected ADC regular discontinuous mode */ + ADCx->CR1 |= CR1_DISCEN_Set; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected ADC regular discontinuous mode */ + ADCx->CR1 &= CR1_DISCEN_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : ADC_RegularChannelConfig +* Description : Configures for the selected ADC regular channel its corresponding +* rank in the sequencer and its sample time. +* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral. +* - ADC_Channel: the ADC channel to configure. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - ADC_Channel_0: ADC Channel0 selected +* - ADC_Channel_1: ADC Channel1 selected +* - ADC_Channel_2: ADC Channel2 selected +* - ADC_Channel_3: ADC Channel3 selected +* - ADC_Channel_4: ADC Channel4 selected +* - ADC_Channel_5: ADC Channel5 selected +* - ADC_Channel_6: ADC Channel6 selected +* - ADC_Channel_7: ADC Channel7 selected +* - ADC_Channel_8: ADC Channel8 selected +* - ADC_Channel_9: ADC Channel9 selected +* - ADC_Channel_10: ADC Channel10 selected +* - ADC_Channel_11: ADC Channel11 selected +* - ADC_Channel_12: ADC Channel12 selected +* - ADC_Channel_13: ADC Channel13 selected +* - ADC_Channel_14: ADC Channel14 selected +* - ADC_Channel_15: ADC Channel15 selected +* - ADC_Channel_16: ADC Channel16 selected +* - ADC_Channel_17: ADC Channel17 selected +* - Rank: The rank in the regular group sequencer. This parameter +* must be between 1 to 16. +* - ADC_SampleTime: The sample time value to be set for the +* selected channel. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - ADC_SampleTime_1Cycles5: Sample time equal to 1.5 cycles +* - ADC_SampleTime_7Cycles5: Sample time equal to 7.5 cycles +* - ADC_SampleTime_13Cycles5: Sample time equal to 13.5 cycles +* - ADC_SampleTime_28Cycles5: Sample time equal to 28.5 cycles +* - ADC_SampleTime_41Cycles5: Sample time equal to 41.5 cycles +* - ADC_SampleTime_55Cycles5: Sample time equal to 55.5 cycles +* - ADC_SampleTime_71Cycles5: Sample time equal to 71.5 cycles +* - ADC_SampleTime_239Cycles5: Sample time equal to 239.5 cycles +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void ADC_RegularChannelConfig(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, u8 ADC_Channel, u8 Rank, u8 ADC_SampleTime) +{ + u32 tmpreg1 = 0, tmpreg2 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_CHANNEL(ADC_Channel)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_REGULAR_RANK(Rank)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_SAMPLE_TIME(ADC_SampleTime)); + + /* if ADC_Channel_10 ... ADC_Channel_17 is selected */ + if (ADC_Channel > ADC_Channel_9) + { + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->SMPR1; + /* Calculate the mask to clear */ + tmpreg2 = SMPR1_SMP_Set << (3 * (ADC_Channel - 10)); + /* Clear the old discontinuous mode channel count */ + tmpreg1 &= ~tmpreg2; + /* Calculate the mask to set */ + tmpreg2 = (u32)ADC_SampleTime << (3 * (ADC_Channel - 10)); + /* Set the discontinuous mode channel count */ + tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2; + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->SMPR1 = tmpreg1; + } + else /* ADC_Channel include in ADC_Channel_[0..9] */ + { + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->SMPR2; + /* Calculate the mask to clear */ + tmpreg2 = SMPR2_SMP_Set << (3 * ADC_Channel); + /* Clear the old discontinuous mode channel count */ + tmpreg1 &= ~tmpreg2; + /* Calculate the mask to set */ + tmpreg2 = (u32)ADC_SampleTime << (3 * ADC_Channel); + /* Set the discontinuous mode channel count */ + tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2; + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->SMPR2 = tmpreg1; + } + /* For Rank 1 to 6 */ + if (Rank < 7) + { + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->SQR3; + /* Calculate the mask to clear */ + tmpreg2 = SQR3_SQ_Set << (5 * (Rank - 1)); + /* Clear the old SQx bits for the selected rank */ + tmpreg1 &= ~tmpreg2; + /* Calculate the mask to set */ + tmpreg2 = (u32)ADC_Channel << (5 * (Rank - 1)); + /* Set the SQx bits for the selected rank */ + tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2; + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->SQR3 = tmpreg1; + } + /* For Rank 7 to 12 */ + else if (Rank < 13) + { + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->SQR2; + /* Calculate the mask to clear */ + tmpreg2 = SQR2_SQ_Set << (5 * (Rank - 7)); + /* Clear the old SQx bits for the selected rank */ + tmpreg1 &= ~tmpreg2; + /* Calculate the mask to set */ + tmpreg2 = (u32)ADC_Channel << (5 * (Rank - 7)); + /* Set the SQx bits for the selected rank */ + tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2; + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->SQR2 = tmpreg1; + } + /* For Rank 13 to 16 */ + else + { + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->SQR1; + /* Calculate the mask to clear */ + tmpreg2 = SQR1_SQ_Set << (5 * (Rank - 13)); + /* Clear the old SQx bits for the selected rank */ + tmpreg1 &= ~tmpreg2; + /* Calculate the mask to set */ + tmpreg2 = (u32)ADC_Channel << (5 * (Rank - 13)); + /* Set the SQx bits for the selected rank */ + tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2; + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->SQR1 = tmpreg1; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : ADC_ExternalTrigConvCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the ADCx conversion through external trigger. +* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral. +* - NewState: new state of the selected ADC external trigger +* start of conversion. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void ADC_ExternalTrigConvCmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected ADC conversion on external event */ + ADCx->CR2 |= CR2_EXTTRIG_Set; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected ADC conversion on external event */ + ADCx->CR2 &= CR2_EXTTRIG_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : ADC_GetConversionValue +* Description : Returns the last ADCx conversion result data for regular channel. +* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : The Data conversion value. +*******************************************************************************/ +u16 ADC_GetConversionValue(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + + /* Return the selected ADC conversion value */ + return (u16) ADCx->DR; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : ADC_GetDualModeConversionValue +* Description : Returns the last ADC1 and ADC2 conversion result data in dual mode. +* Output : None +* Return : The Data conversion value. +*******************************************************************************/ +u32 ADC_GetDualModeConversionValue(void) +{ + /* Return the dual mode conversion value */ + return (*(vu32 *) DR_ADDRESS); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : ADC_AutoInjectedConvCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the selected ADC automatic injected group +* conversion after regular one. +* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral. +* - NewState: new state of the selected ADC auto injected +* conversion +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void ADC_AutoInjectedConvCmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected ADC automatic injected group conversion */ + ADCx->CR1 |= CR1_JAUTO_Set; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected ADC automatic injected group conversion */ + ADCx->CR1 &= CR1_JAUTO_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : ADC_InjectedDiscModeCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the discontinuous mode for injected group +* channel for the specified ADC +* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral. +* - NewState: new state of the selected ADC discontinuous mode +* on injected group channel. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void ADC_InjectedDiscModeCmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected ADC injected discontinuous mode */ + ADCx->CR1 |= CR1_JDISCEN_Set; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected ADC injected discontinuous mode */ + ADCx->CR1 &= CR1_JDISCEN_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : ADC_ExternalTrigInjectedConvConfig +* Description : Configures the ADCx external trigger for injected channels conversion. +* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral. +* - ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConv: specifies the ADC trigger to +* start injected conversion. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConv_T1_TRGO: Timer1 TRGO event +* selected (for ADC1, ADC2 and ADC3) +* - ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConv_T1_CC4: Timer1 capture +* compare4 selected (for ADC1, ADC2 and ADC3) +* - ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConv_T2_TRGO: Timer2 TRGO event +* selected (for ADC1 and ADC2) +* - ADC_External TrigInjecConv_T2_CC1: Timer2 capture +* compare1 selected (for ADC1 and ADC2) +* - ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConv_T3_CC4: Timer3 capture +* compare4 selected (for ADC1 and ADC2) +* - ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConv_T4_TRGO: Timer4 TRGO event +* selected (for ADC1 and ADC2) +* - ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConv_Ext_IT15_TIM8_CC4: External +* interrupt line 15 or Timer8 capture compare4 event selected +* (for ADC1 and ADC2) +* - ADC_External TrigInjecConv_T4_CC3: Timer4 capture +* compare3 selected (for ADC3 only) +* - ADC_External TrigInjecConv_T8_CC2: Timer8 capture +* compare2 selected (for ADC3 only) +* - ADC_External TrigInjecConv_T8_CC4: Timer8 capture +* compare4 selected (for ADC3 only) +* - ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConv_T5_TRGO: Timer5 TRGO event +* selected (for ADC3 only) +* - ADC_External TrigInjecConv_T5_CC4: Timer5 capture +* compare4 selected (for ADC3 only) +* - ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConv_None: Injected conversion +* started by software and not by external trigger (for +* ADC1, ADC2 and ADC3) +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void ADC_ExternalTrigInjectedConvConfig(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, u32 ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConv) +{ + u32 tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_EXT_INJEC_TRIG(ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConv)); + + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg = ADCx->CR2; + /* Clear the old external event selection for injected group */ + tmpreg &= CR2_JEXTSEL_Reset; + /* Set the external event selection for injected group */ + tmpreg |= ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConv; + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->CR2 = tmpreg; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : ADC_ExternalTrigInjectedConvCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the ADCx injected channels conversion +* through external trigger +* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral. +* - NewState: new state of the selected ADC external trigger +* start of injected conversion. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void ADC_ExternalTrigInjectedConvCmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected ADC external event selection for injected group */ + ADCx->CR2 |= CR2_JEXTTRIG_Set; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected ADC external event selection for injected group */ + ADCx->CR2 &= CR2_JEXTTRIG_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : ADC_SoftwareStartInjectedConvCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the selected ADC start of the injected +* channels conversion. +* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral. +* - NewState: new state of the selected ADC software start +* injected conversion. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void ADC_SoftwareStartInjectedConvCmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected ADC conversion for injected group on external event and start the selected + ADC injected conversion */ + ADCx->CR2 |= CR2_JEXTTRIG_JSWSTART_Set; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected ADC conversion on external event for injected group and stop the selected + ADC injected conversion */ + ADCx->CR2 &= CR2_JEXTTRIG_JSWSTART_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : ADC_GetSoftwareStartInjectedConvCmdStatus +* Description : Gets the selected ADC Software start injected conversion Status. +* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : The new state of ADC software start injected conversion (SET or RESET). +*******************************************************************************/ +FlagStatus ADC_GetSoftwareStartInjectedConvCmdStatus(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + + /* Check the status of JSWSTART bit */ + if ((ADCx->CR2 & CR2_JSWSTART_Set) != (u32)RESET) + { + /* JSWSTART bit is set */ + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* JSWSTART bit is reset */ + bitstatus = RESET; + } + + /* Return the JSWSTART bit status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : ADC_InjectedChannelConfig +* Description : Configures for the selected ADC injected channel its corresponding +* rank in the sequencer and its sample time. +* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral. +* - ADC_Channel: the ADC channel to configure. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - ADC_Channel_0: ADC Channel0 selected +* - ADC_Channel_1: ADC Channel1 selected +* - ADC_Channel_2: ADC Channel2 selected +* - ADC_Channel_3: ADC Channel3 selected +* - ADC_Channel_4: ADC Channel4 selected +* - ADC_Channel_5: ADC Channel5 selected +* - ADC_Channel_6: ADC Channel6 selected +* - ADC_Channel_7: ADC Channel7 selected +* - ADC_Channel_8: ADC Channel8 selected +* - ADC_Channel_9: ADC Channel9 selected +* - ADC_Channel_10: ADC Channel10 selected +* - ADC_Channel_11: ADC Channel11 selected +* - ADC_Channel_12: ADC Channel12 selected +* - ADC_Channel_13: ADC Channel13 selected +* - ADC_Channel_14: ADC Channel14 selected +* - ADC_Channel_15: ADC Channel15 selected +* - ADC_Channel_16: ADC Channel16 selected +* - ADC_Channel_17: ADC Channel17 selected +* - Rank: The rank in the injected group sequencer. This parameter +* must be between 1 to 4. +* - ADC_SampleTime: The sample time value to be set for the +* selected channel. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - ADC_SampleTime_1Cycles5: Sample time equal to 1.5 cycles +* - ADC_SampleTime_7Cycles5: Sample time equal to 7.5 cycles +* - ADC_SampleTime_13Cycles5: Sample time equal to 13.5 cycles +* - ADC_SampleTime_28Cycles5: Sample time equal to 28.5 cycles +* - ADC_SampleTime_41Cycles5: Sample time equal to 41.5 cycles +* - ADC_SampleTime_55Cycles5: Sample time equal to 55.5 cycles +* - ADC_SampleTime_71Cycles5: Sample time equal to 71.5 cycles +* - ADC_SampleTime_239Cycles5: Sample time equal to 239.5 cycles +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void ADC_InjectedChannelConfig(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, u8 ADC_Channel, u8 Rank, u8 ADC_SampleTime) +{ + u32 tmpreg1 = 0, tmpreg2 = 0, tmpreg3 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_CHANNEL(ADC_Channel)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_INJECTED_RANK(Rank)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_SAMPLE_TIME(ADC_SampleTime)); + + /* if ADC_Channel_10 ... ADC_Channel_17 is selected */ + if (ADC_Channel > ADC_Channel_9) + { + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->SMPR1; + /* Calculate the mask to clear */ + tmpreg2 = SMPR1_SMP_Set << (3*(ADC_Channel - 10)); + /* Clear the old discontinuous mode channel count */ + tmpreg1 &= ~tmpreg2; + /* Calculate the mask to set */ + tmpreg2 = (u32)ADC_SampleTime << (3*(ADC_Channel - 10)); + /* Set the discontinuous mode channel count */ + tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2; + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->SMPR1 = tmpreg1; + } + else /* ADC_Channel include in ADC_Channel_[0..9] */ + { + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->SMPR2; + /* Calculate the mask to clear */ + tmpreg2 = SMPR2_SMP_Set << (3 * ADC_Channel); + /* Clear the old discontinuous mode channel count */ + tmpreg1 &= ~tmpreg2; + /* Calculate the mask to set */ + tmpreg2 = (u32)ADC_SampleTime << (3 * ADC_Channel); + /* Set the discontinuous mode channel count */ + tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2; + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->SMPR2 = tmpreg1; + } + + /* Rank configuration */ + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->JSQR; + /* Get JL value: Number = JL+1 */ + tmpreg3 = (tmpreg1 & JSQR_JL_Set)>> 20; + /* Calculate the mask to clear: ((Rank-1)+(4-JL-1)) */ + tmpreg2 = JSQR_JSQ_Set << (5 * (u8)((Rank + 3) - (tmpreg3 + 1))); + /* Clear the old JSQx bits for the selected rank */ + tmpreg1 &= ~tmpreg2; + /* Calculate the mask to set: ((Rank-1)+(4-JL-1)) */ + tmpreg2 = (u32)ADC_Channel << (5 * (u8)((Rank + 3) - (tmpreg3 + 1))); + /* Set the JSQx bits for the selected rank */ + tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2; + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->JSQR = tmpreg1; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : ADC_InjectedSequencerLengthConfig +* Description : Configures the sequencer length for injected channels +* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral. +* - Length: The sequencer length. +* This parameter must be a number between 1 to 4. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void ADC_InjectedSequencerLengthConfig(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, u8 Length) +{ + u32 tmpreg1 = 0; + u32 tmpreg2 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_INJECTED_LENGTH(Length)); + + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->JSQR; + /* Clear the old injected sequnence lenght JL bits */ + tmpreg1 &= JSQR_JL_Reset; + /* Set the injected sequnence lenght JL bits */ + tmpreg2 = Length - 1; + tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2 << 20; + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->JSQR = tmpreg1; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : ADC_SetInjectedOffset +* Description : Set the injected channels conversion value offset +* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral. +* - ADC_InjectedChannel: the ADC injected channel to set its +* offset. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - ADC_InjectedChannel_1: Injected Channel1 selected +* - ADC_InjectedChannel_2: Injected Channel2 selected +* - ADC_InjectedChannel_3: Injected Channel3 selected +* - ADC_InjectedChannel_4: Injected Channel4 selected +* - Offset: the offset value for the selected ADC injected channel +* This parameter must be a 12bit value. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void ADC_SetInjectedOffset(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, u8 ADC_InjectedChannel, u16 Offset) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_INJECTED_CHANNEL(ADC_InjectedChannel)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_OFFSET(Offset)); + + /* Set the selected injected channel data offset */ + *((vu32 *)((*(u32*)&ADCx) + ADC_InjectedChannel)) = (u32)Offset; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : ADC_GetInjectedConversionValue +* Description : Returns the ADC injected channel conversion result +* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral. +* - ADC_InjectedChannel: the converted ADC injected channel. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - ADC_InjectedChannel_1: Injected Channel1 selected +* - ADC_InjectedChannel_2: Injected Channel2 selected +* - ADC_InjectedChannel_3: Injected Channel3 selected +* - ADC_InjectedChannel_4: Injected Channel4 selected +* Output : None +* Return : The Data conversion value. +*******************************************************************************/ +u16 ADC_GetInjectedConversionValue(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, u8 ADC_InjectedChannel) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_INJECTED_CHANNEL(ADC_InjectedChannel)); + + /* Returns the selected injected channel conversion data value */ + return (u16) (*(vu32*) (((*(u32*)&ADCx) + ADC_InjectedChannel + JDR_Offset))); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : ADC_AnalogWatchdogCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the analog watchdog on single/all regular +* or injected channels +* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral. +* - ADC_AnalogWatchdog: the ADC analog watchdog configuration. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - ADC_AnalogWatchdog_SingleRegEnable: Analog watchdog on +* a single regular channel +* - ADC_AnalogWatchdog_SingleInjecEnable: Analog watchdog on +* a single injected channel +* - ADC_AnalogWatchdog_SingleRegOrInjecEnable: Analog +* watchdog on a single regular or injected channel +* - ADC_AnalogWatchdog_AllRegEnable: Analog watchdog on +* all regular channel +* - ADC_AnalogWatchdog_AllInjecEnable: Analog watchdog on +* all injected channel +* - ADC_AnalogWatchdog_AllRegAllInjecEnable: Analog watchdog +* on all regular and injected channels +* - ADC_AnalogWatchdog_None: No channel guarded by the +* analog watchdog +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void ADC_AnalogWatchdogCmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, u32 ADC_AnalogWatchdog) +{ + u32 tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_ANALOG_WATCHDOG(ADC_AnalogWatchdog)); + + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg = ADCx->CR1; + /* Clear AWDEN, AWDENJ and AWDSGL bits */ + tmpreg &= CR1_AWDMode_Reset; + /* Set the analog watchdog enable mode */ + tmpreg |= ADC_AnalogWatchdog; + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->CR1 = tmpreg; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : ADC_AnalogWatchdogThresholdsConfig +* Description : Configures the high and low thresholds of the analog watchdog. +* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral. +* - HighThreshold: the ADC analog watchdog High threshold value. +* This parameter must be a 12bit value. +* - LowThreshold: the ADC analog watchdog Low threshold value. +* This parameter must be a 12bit value. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void ADC_AnalogWatchdogThresholdsConfig(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, u16 HighThreshold, + u16 LowThreshold) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_THRESHOLD(HighThreshold)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_THRESHOLD(LowThreshold)); + + /* Set the ADCx high threshold */ + ADCx->HTR = HighThreshold; + /* Set the ADCx low threshold */ + ADCx->LTR = LowThreshold; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : ADC_AnalogWatchdogSingleChannelConfig +* Description : Configures the analog watchdog guarded single channel +* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral. +* - ADC_Channel: the ADC channel to configure for the analog +* watchdog. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - ADC_Channel_0: ADC Channel0 selected +* - ADC_Channel_1: ADC Channel1 selected +* - ADC_Channel_2: ADC Channel2 selected +* - ADC_Channel_3: ADC Channel3 selected +* - ADC_Channel_4: ADC Channel4 selected +* - ADC_Channel_5: ADC Channel5 selected +* - ADC_Channel_6: ADC Channel6 selected +* - ADC_Channel_7: ADC Channel7 selected +* - ADC_Channel_8: ADC Channel8 selected +* - ADC_Channel_9: ADC Channel9 selected +* - ADC_Channel_10: ADC Channel10 selected +* - ADC_Channel_11: ADC Channel11 selected +* - ADC_Channel_12: ADC Channel12 selected +* - ADC_Channel_13: ADC Channel13 selected +* - ADC_Channel_14: ADC Channel14 selected +* - ADC_Channel_15: ADC Channel15 selected +* - ADC_Channel_16: ADC Channel16 selected +* - ADC_Channel_17: ADC Channel17 selected +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void ADC_AnalogWatchdogSingleChannelConfig(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, u8 ADC_Channel) +{ + u32 tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_CHANNEL(ADC_Channel)); + + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg = ADCx->CR1; + /* Clear the Analog watchdog channel select bits */ + tmpreg &= CR1_AWDCH_Reset; + /* Set the Analog watchdog channel */ + tmpreg |= ADC_Channel; + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->CR1 = tmpreg; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : ADC_TempSensorVrefintCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the temperature sensor and Vrefint channel. +* Input : - NewState: new state of the temperature sensor. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void ADC_TempSensorVrefintCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the temperature sensor and Vrefint channel*/ + ADC1->CR2 |= CR2_TSVREFE_Set; + } + else + { + /* Disable the temperature sensor and Vrefint channel*/ + ADC1->CR2 &= CR2_TSVREFE_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : ADC_GetFlagStatus +* Description : Checks whether the specified ADC flag is set or not. +* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral. +* - ADC_FLAG: specifies the flag to check. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - ADC_FLAG_AWD: Analog watchdog flag +* - ADC_FLAG_EOC: End of conversion flag +* - ADC_FLAG_JEOC: End of injected group conversion flag +* - ADC_FLAG_JSTRT: Start of injected group conversion flag +* - ADC_FLAG_STRT: Start of regular group conversion flag +* Output : None +* Return : The new state of ADC_FLAG (SET or RESET). +*******************************************************************************/ +FlagStatus ADC_GetFlagStatus(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, u8 ADC_FLAG) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_GET_FLAG(ADC_FLAG)); + + /* Check the status of the specified ADC flag */ + if ((ADCx->SR & ADC_FLAG) != (u8)RESET) + { + /* ADC_FLAG is set */ + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* ADC_FLAG is reset */ + bitstatus = RESET; + } + + /* Return the ADC_FLAG status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : ADC_ClearFlag +* Description : Clears the ADCx's pending flags. +* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral. +* - ADC_FLAG: specifies the flag to clear. +* This parameter can be any combination of the following values: +* - ADC_FLAG_AWD: Analog watchdog flag +* - ADC_FLAG_EOC: End of conversion flag +* - ADC_FLAG_JEOC: End of injected group conversion flag +* - ADC_FLAG_JSTRT: Start of injected group conversion flag +* - ADC_FLAG_STRT: Start of regular group conversion flag +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void ADC_ClearFlag(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, u8 ADC_FLAG) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_CLEAR_FLAG(ADC_FLAG)); + + /* Clear the selected ADC flags */ + ADCx->SR = ~(u32)ADC_FLAG; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : ADC_GetITStatus +* Description : Checks whether the specified ADC interrupt has occurred or not. +* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral. +* - ADC_IT: specifies the ADC interrupt source to check. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - ADC_IT_EOC: End of conversion interrupt mask +* - ADC_IT_AWD: Analog watchdog interrupt mask +* - ADC_IT_JEOC: End of injected conversion interrupt mask +* Output : None +* Return : The new state of ADC_IT (SET or RESET). +*******************************************************************************/ +ITStatus ADC_GetITStatus(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, u16 ADC_IT) +{ + ITStatus bitstatus = RESET; + u32 itmask = 0, enablestatus = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_GET_IT(ADC_IT)); + + /* Get the ADC IT index */ + itmask = ADC_IT >> 8; + + /* Get the ADC_IT enable bit status */ + enablestatus = (ADCx->CR1 & (u8)ADC_IT) ; + + /* Check the status of the specified ADC interrupt */ + if (((ADCx->SR & itmask) != (u32)RESET) && enablestatus) + { + /* ADC_IT is set */ + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* ADC_IT is reset */ + bitstatus = RESET; + } + + /* Return the ADC_IT status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : ADC_ClearITPendingBit +* Description : Clears the ADCx’s interrupt pending bits. +* Input : - ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral. +* - ADC_IT: specifies the ADC interrupt pending bit to clear. +* This parameter can be any combination of the following values: +* - ADC_IT_EOC: End of conversion interrupt mask +* - ADC_IT_AWD: Analog watchdog interrupt mask +* - ADC_IT_JEOC: End of injected conversion interrupt mask +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void ADC_ClearITPendingBit(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, u16 ADC_IT) +{ + u8 itmask = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_IT(ADC_IT)); + + /* Get the ADC IT index */ + itmask = (u8)(ADC_IT >> 8); + + /* Clear the selected ADC interrupt pending bits */ + ADCx->SR = ~(u32)itmask; +} + +/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_bkp.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_bkp.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a6d3825 --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_bkp.c @@ -0,0 +1,272 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ******************** +* File Name : stm32f10x_bkp.c +* Author : MCD Application Team +* Version : V2.0.2 +* Date : 07/11/2008 +* Description : This file provides all the BKP firmware functions. +******************************************************************************** +* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS +* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME. +* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, +* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE +* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING +* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS. +*******************************************************************************/ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32f10x_bkp.h" +#include "stm32f10x_rcc.h" + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* ------------ BKP registers bit address in the alias region ----------- */ +#define BKP_OFFSET (BKP_BASE - PERIPH_BASE) + +/* --- CR Register ---*/ +/* Alias word address of TPAL bit */ +#define CR_OFFSET (BKP_OFFSET + 0x30) +#define TPAL_BitNumber 0x01 +#define CR_TPAL_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CR_OFFSET * 32) + (TPAL_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* Alias word address of TPE bit */ +#define TPE_BitNumber 0x00 +#define CR_TPE_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CR_OFFSET * 32) + (TPE_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* --- CSR Register ---*/ +/* Alias word address of TPIE bit */ +#define CSR_OFFSET (BKP_OFFSET + 0x34) +#define TPIE_BitNumber 0x02 +#define CSR_TPIE_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CSR_OFFSET * 32) + (TPIE_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* Alias word address of TIF bit */ +#define TIF_BitNumber 0x09 +#define CSR_TIF_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CSR_OFFSET * 32) + (TIF_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* Alias word address of TEF bit */ +#define TEF_BitNumber 0x08 +#define CSR_TEF_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CSR_OFFSET * 32) + (TEF_BitNumber * 4)) + + +/* ---------------------- BKP registers bit mask ------------------------ */ +/* RTCCR register bit mask */ +#define RTCCR_CAL_Mask ((u16)0xFF80) +#define RTCCR_Mask ((u16)0xFC7F) + +/* CSR register bit mask */ +#define CSR_CTE_Set ((u16)0x0001) +#define CSR_CTI_Set ((u16)0x0002) + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : BKP_DeInit +* Description : Deinitializes the BKP peripheral registers to their default +* reset values. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void BKP_DeInit(void) +{ + RCC_BackupResetCmd(ENABLE); + RCC_BackupResetCmd(DISABLE); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : BKP_TamperPinLevelConfig +* Description : Configures the Tamper Pin active level. +* Input : - BKP_TamperPinLevel: specifies the Tamper Pin active level. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - BKP_TamperPinLevel_High: Tamper pin active on high level +* - BKP_TamperPinLevel_Low: Tamper pin active on low level +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void BKP_TamperPinLevelConfig(u16 BKP_TamperPinLevel) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_BKP_TAMPER_PIN_LEVEL(BKP_TamperPinLevel)); + + *(vu32 *) CR_TPAL_BB = BKP_TamperPinLevel; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : BKP_TamperPinCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the Tamper Pin activation. +* Input : - NewState: new state of the Tamper Pin activation. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void BKP_TamperPinCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + *(vu32 *) CR_TPE_BB = (u32)NewState; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : BKP_ITConfig +* Description : Enables or disables the Tamper Pin Interrupt. +* Input : - NewState: new state of the Tamper Pin Interrupt. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void BKP_ITConfig(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + *(vu32 *) CSR_TPIE_BB = (u32)NewState; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : BKP_RTCOutputConfig +* Description : Select the RTC output source to output on the Tamper pin. +* Input : - BKP_RTCOutputSource: specifies the RTC output source. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - BKP_RTCOutputSource_None: no RTC output on the Tamper pin. +* - BKP_RTCOutputSource_CalibClock: output the RTC clock +* with frequency divided by 64 on the Tamper pin. +* - BKP_RTCOutputSource_Alarm: output the RTC Alarm pulse +* signal on the Tamper pin. +* - BKP_RTCOutputSource_Second: output the RTC Second pulse +* signal on the Tamper pin. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void BKP_RTCOutputConfig(u16 BKP_RTCOutputSource) +{ + u16 tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_BKP_RTC_OUTPUT_SOURCE(BKP_RTCOutputSource)); + + tmpreg = BKP->RTCCR; + + /* Clear CCO, ASOE and ASOS bits */ + tmpreg &= RTCCR_Mask; + + /* Set CCO, ASOE and ASOS bits according to BKP_RTCOutputSource value */ + tmpreg |= BKP_RTCOutputSource; + + /* Store the new value */ + BKP->RTCCR = tmpreg; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : BKP_SetRTCCalibrationValue +* Description : Sets RTC Clock Calibration value. +* Input : - CalibrationValue: specifies the RTC Clock Calibration value. +* This parameter must be a number between 0 and 0x7F. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void BKP_SetRTCCalibrationValue(u8 CalibrationValue) +{ + u16 tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_BKP_CALIBRATION_VALUE(CalibrationValue)); + + tmpreg = BKP->RTCCR; + + /* Clear CAL[6:0] bits */ + tmpreg &= RTCCR_CAL_Mask; + + /* Set CAL[6:0] bits according to CalibrationValue value */ + tmpreg |= CalibrationValue; + + /* Store the new value */ + BKP->RTCCR = tmpreg; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : BKP_WriteBackupRegister +* Description : Writes user data to the specified Data Backup Register. +* Input : - BKP_DR: specifies the Data Backup Register. +* This parameter can be BKP_DRx where x:[1, 42] +* - Data: data to write +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void BKP_WriteBackupRegister(u16 BKP_DR, u16 Data) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_BKP_DR(BKP_DR)); + + *(vu16 *) (BKP_BASE + BKP_DR) = Data; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : BKP_ReadBackupRegister +* Description : Reads data from the specified Data Backup Register. +* Input : - BKP_DR: specifies the Data Backup Register. +* This parameter can be BKP_DRx where x:[1, 42] +* Output : None +* Return : The content of the specified Data Backup Register +*******************************************************************************/ +u16 BKP_ReadBackupRegister(u16 BKP_DR) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_BKP_DR(BKP_DR)); + + return (*(vu16 *) (BKP_BASE + BKP_DR)); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : BKP_GetFlagStatus +* Description : Checks whether the Tamper Pin Event flag is set or not. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : The new state of the Tamper Pin Event flag (SET or RESET). +*******************************************************************************/ +FlagStatus BKP_GetFlagStatus(void) +{ + return (FlagStatus)(*(vu32 *) CSR_TEF_BB); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : BKP_ClearFlag +* Description : Clears Tamper Pin Event pending flag. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void BKP_ClearFlag(void) +{ + /* Set CTE bit to clear Tamper Pin Event flag */ + BKP->CSR |= CSR_CTE_Set; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : BKP_GetITStatus +* Description : Checks whether the Tamper Pin Interrupt has occurred or not. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : The new state of the Tamper Pin Interrupt (SET or RESET). +*******************************************************************************/ +ITStatus BKP_GetITStatus(void) +{ + return (ITStatus)(*(vu32 *) CSR_TIF_BB); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : BKP_ClearITPendingBit +* Description : Clears Tamper Pin Interrupt pending bit. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void BKP_ClearITPendingBit(void) +{ + /* Set CTI bit to clear Tamper Pin Interrupt pending bit */ + BKP->CSR |= CSR_CTI_Set; +} + +/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_can.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_can.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..afb472d --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_can.c @@ -0,0 +1,907 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ******************** +* File Name : stm32f10x_can.c +* Author : MCD Application Team +* Version : V2.0.2 +* Date : 07/11/2008 +* Description : This file provides all the CAN firmware functions. +******************************************************************************** +* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS +* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME. +* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, +* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE +* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING +* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS. +*******************************************************************************/ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32f10x_can.h" +#include "stm32f10x_rcc.h" + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* CAN Master Control Register bits */ +#define CAN_MCR_INRQ ((u32)0x00000001) /* Initialization request */ +#define CAN_MCR_SLEEP ((u32)0x00000002) /* Sleep mode request */ +#define CAN_MCR_TXFP ((u32)0x00000004) /* Transmit FIFO priority */ +#define CAN_MCR_RFLM ((u32)0x00000008) /* Receive FIFO locked mode */ +#define CAN_MCR_NART ((u32)0x00000010) /* No automatic retransmission */ +#define CAN_MCR_AWUM ((u32)0x00000020) /* Automatic wake up mode */ +#define CAN_MCR_ABOM ((u32)0x00000040) /* Automatic bus-off management */ +#define CAN_MCR_TTCM ((u32)0x00000080) /* time triggered communication */ + +/* CAN Master Status Register bits */ +#define CAN_MSR_INAK ((u32)0x00000001) /* Initialization acknowledge */ +#define CAN_MSR_WKUI ((u32)0x00000008) /* Wake-up interrupt */ +#define CAN_MSR_SLAKI ((u32)0x00000010) /* Sleep acknowledge interrupt */ + +/* CAN Transmit Status Register bits */ +#define CAN_TSR_RQCP0 ((u32)0x00000001) /* Request completed mailbox0 */ +#define CAN_TSR_TXOK0 ((u32)0x00000002) /* Transmission OK of mailbox0 */ +#define CAN_TSR_ABRQ0 ((u32)0x00000080) /* Abort request for mailbox0 */ +#define CAN_TSR_RQCP1 ((u32)0x00000100) /* Request completed mailbox1 */ +#define CAN_TSR_TXOK1 ((u32)0x00000200) /* Transmission OK of mailbox1 */ +#define CAN_TSR_ABRQ1 ((u32)0x00008000) /* Abort request for mailbox1 */ +#define CAN_TSR_RQCP2 ((u32)0x00010000) /* Request completed mailbox2 */ +#define CAN_TSR_TXOK2 ((u32)0x00020000) /* Transmission OK of mailbox2 */ +#define CAN_TSR_ABRQ2 ((u32)0x00800000) /* Abort request for mailbox2 */ +#define CAN_TSR_TME0 ((u32)0x04000000) /* Transmit mailbox 0 empty */ +#define CAN_TSR_TME1 ((u32)0x08000000) /* Transmit mailbox 1 empty */ +#define CAN_TSR_TME2 ((u32)0x10000000) /* Transmit mailbox 2 empty */ + +/* CAN Receive FIFO 0 Register bits */ +#define CAN_RF0R_FULL0 ((u32)0x00000008) /* FIFO 0 full */ +#define CAN_RF0R_FOVR0 ((u32)0x00000010) /* FIFO 0 overrun */ +#define CAN_RF0R_RFOM0 ((u32)0x00000020) /* Release FIFO 0 output mailbox */ + +/* CAN Receive FIFO 1 Register bits */ +#define CAN_RF1R_FULL1 ((u32)0x00000008) /* FIFO 1 full */ +#define CAN_RF1R_FOVR1 ((u32)0x00000010) /* FIFO 1 overrun */ +#define CAN_RF1R_RFOM1 ((u32)0x00000020) /* Release FIFO 1 output mailbox */ + +/* CAN Error Status Register bits */ +#define CAN_ESR_EWGF ((u32)0x00000001) /* Error warning flag */ +#define CAN_ESR_EPVF ((u32)0x00000002) /* Error passive flag */ +#define CAN_ESR_BOFF ((u32)0x00000004) /* Bus-off flag */ + +/* CAN Mailbox Transmit Request */ +#define CAN_TMIDxR_TXRQ ((u32)0x00000001) /* Transmit mailbox request */ + +/* CAN Filter Master Register bits */ +#define CAN_FMR_FINIT ((u32)0x00000001) /* Filter init mode */ + + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +static ITStatus CheckITStatus(u32 CAN_Reg, u32 It_Bit); + +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : CAN_DeInit +* Description : Deinitializes the CAN peripheral registers to their default +* reset values. +* Input : None. +* Output : None. +* Return : None. +*******************************************************************************/ +void CAN_DeInit(void) +{ + /* Enable CAN reset state */ + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_CAN, ENABLE); + /* Release CAN from reset state */ + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_CAN, DISABLE); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : CAN_Init +* Description : Initializes the CAN peripheral according to the specified +* parameters in the CAN_InitStruct. +* Input : CAN_InitStruct: pointer to a CAN_InitTypeDef structure that + contains the configuration information for the CAN peripheral. +* Output : None. +* Return : Constant indicates initialization succeed which will be +* CANINITFAILED or CANINITOK. +*******************************************************************************/ +u8 CAN_Init(CAN_InitTypeDef* CAN_InitStruct) +{ + u8 InitStatus = 0; + u16 WaitAck = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(CAN_InitStruct->CAN_TTCM)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(CAN_InitStruct->CAN_ABOM)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(CAN_InitStruct->CAN_AWUM)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(CAN_InitStruct->CAN_NART)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(CAN_InitStruct->CAN_RFLM)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(CAN_InitStruct->CAN_TXFP)); + assert_param(IS_CAN_MODE(CAN_InitStruct->CAN_Mode)); + assert_param(IS_CAN_SJW(CAN_InitStruct->CAN_SJW)); + assert_param(IS_CAN_BS1(CAN_InitStruct->CAN_BS1)); + assert_param(IS_CAN_BS2(CAN_InitStruct->CAN_BS2)); + assert_param(IS_CAN_PRESCALER(CAN_InitStruct->CAN_Prescaler)); + + /* Request initialisation */ + CAN->MCR = CAN_MCR_INRQ; + + /* ...and check acknowledged */ + if ((CAN->MSR & CAN_MSR_INAK) == 0) + { + InitStatus = CANINITFAILED; + } + else + { + /* Set the time triggered communication mode */ + if (CAN_InitStruct->CAN_TTCM == ENABLE) + { + CAN->MCR |= CAN_MCR_TTCM; + } + else + { + CAN->MCR &= ~CAN_MCR_TTCM; + } + + /* Set the automatic bus-off management */ + if (CAN_InitStruct->CAN_ABOM == ENABLE) + { + CAN->MCR |= CAN_MCR_ABOM; + } + else + { + CAN->MCR &= ~CAN_MCR_ABOM; + } + + /* Set the automatic wake-up mode */ + if (CAN_InitStruct->CAN_AWUM == ENABLE) + { + CAN->MCR |= CAN_MCR_AWUM; + } + else + { + CAN->MCR &= ~CAN_MCR_AWUM; + } + + /* Set the no automatic retransmission */ + if (CAN_InitStruct->CAN_NART == ENABLE) + { + CAN->MCR |= CAN_MCR_NART; + } + else + { + CAN->MCR &= ~CAN_MCR_NART; + } + + /* Set the receive FIFO locked mode */ + if (CAN_InitStruct->CAN_RFLM == ENABLE) + { + CAN->MCR |= CAN_MCR_RFLM; + } + else + { + CAN->MCR &= ~CAN_MCR_RFLM; + } + + /* Set the transmit FIFO priority */ + if (CAN_InitStruct->CAN_TXFP == ENABLE) + { + CAN->MCR |= CAN_MCR_TXFP; + } + else + { + CAN->MCR &= ~CAN_MCR_TXFP; + } + + /* Set the bit timing register */ + CAN->BTR = (u32)((u32)CAN_InitStruct->CAN_Mode << 30) | ((u32)CAN_InitStruct->CAN_SJW << 24) | + ((u32)CAN_InitStruct->CAN_BS1 << 16) | ((u32)CAN_InitStruct->CAN_BS2 << 20) | + ((u32)CAN_InitStruct->CAN_Prescaler - 1); + + InitStatus = CANINITOK; + + /* Request leave initialisation */ + CAN->MCR &= ~CAN_MCR_INRQ; + + /* Wait the acknowledge */ + for(WaitAck = 0x400; WaitAck > 0x0; WaitAck--) + { + } + + /* ...and check acknowledged */ + if ((CAN->MSR & CAN_MSR_INAK) == CAN_MSR_INAK) + { + InitStatus = CANINITFAILED; + } + } + + /* At this step, return the status of initialization */ + return InitStatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : CAN_FilterInit +* Description : Initializes the CAN peripheral according to the specified +* parameters in the CAN_FilterInitStruct. +* Input : CAN_FilterInitStruct: pointer to a CAN_FilterInitTypeDef +* structure that contains the configuration information. +* Output : None. +* Return : None. +*******************************************************************************/ +void CAN_FilterInit(CAN_FilterInitTypeDef* CAN_FilterInitStruct) +{ + u16 FilterNumber_BitPos = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_CAN_FILTER_NUMBER(CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterNumber)); + assert_param(IS_CAN_FILTER_MODE(CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterMode)); + assert_param(IS_CAN_FILTER_SCALE(CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterScale)); + assert_param(IS_CAN_FILTER_FIFO(CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterFIFOAssignment)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterActivation)); + + FilterNumber_BitPos = + (u16)((u16)0x0001 << ((u16)CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterNumber)); + + /* Initialisation mode for the filter */ + CAN->FMR |= CAN_FMR_FINIT; + + /* Filter Deactivation */ + CAN->FA1R &= ~(u32)FilterNumber_BitPos; + + /* Filter Scale */ + if (CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterScale == CAN_FilterScale_16bit) + { + /* 16-bit scale for the filter */ + CAN->FS1R &= ~(u32)FilterNumber_BitPos; + + /* First 16-bit identifier and First 16-bit mask */ + /* Or First 16-bit identifier and Second 16-bit identifier */ + CAN->sFilterRegister[CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterNumber].FR1 = + ((u32)((u32)0x0000FFFF & CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterMaskIdLow) << 16) | + ((u32)0x0000FFFF & CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterIdLow); + + /* Second 16-bit identifier and Second 16-bit mask */ + /* Or Third 16-bit identifier and Fourth 16-bit identifier */ + CAN->sFilterRegister[CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterNumber].FR2 = + ((u32)((u32)0x0000FFFF & CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterMaskIdHigh) << 16) | + ((u32)0x0000FFFF & CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterIdHigh); + } + if (CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterScale == CAN_FilterScale_32bit) + { + /* 32-bit scale for the filter */ + CAN->FS1R |= FilterNumber_BitPos; + + /* 32-bit identifier or First 32-bit identifier */ + CAN->sFilterRegister[CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterNumber].FR1 = + ((u32)((u32)0x0000FFFF & CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterIdHigh) << 16) | + ((u32)0x0000FFFF & CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterIdLow); + + /* 32-bit mask or Second 32-bit identifier */ + CAN->sFilterRegister[CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterNumber].FR2 = + ((u32)((u32)0x0000FFFF & CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterMaskIdHigh) << 16) | + ((u32)0x0000FFFF & CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterMaskIdLow); + + } + + /* Filter Mode */ + if (CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterMode == CAN_FilterMode_IdMask) + { + /*Id/Mask mode for the filter*/ + CAN->FM1R &= ~(u32)FilterNumber_BitPos; + } + else /* CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterMode == CAN_FilterMode_IdList */ + { + /*Identifier list mode for the filter*/ + CAN->FM1R |= (u32)FilterNumber_BitPos; + } + + /* Filter FIFO assignment */ + if (CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterFIFOAssignment == CAN_FilterFIFO0) + { + /* FIFO 0 assignation for the filter */ + CAN->FFA1R &= ~(u32)FilterNumber_BitPos; + } + if (CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterFIFOAssignment == CAN_FilterFIFO1) + { + /* FIFO 1 assignation for the filter */ + CAN->FFA1R |= (u32)FilterNumber_BitPos; + } + + /* Filter activation */ + if (CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterActivation == ENABLE) + { + CAN->FA1R |= FilterNumber_BitPos; + } + + /* Leave the initialisation mode for the filter */ + CAN->FMR &= ~CAN_FMR_FINIT; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : CAN_StructInit +* Description : Fills each CAN_InitStruct member with its default value. +* Input : CAN_InitStruct: pointer to a CAN_InitTypeDef structure which +* will be initialized. +* Output : None. +* Return : None. +*******************************************************************************/ +void CAN_StructInit(CAN_InitTypeDef* CAN_InitStruct) +{ + /* Reset CAN init structure parameters values */ + + /* Initialize the time triggered communication mode */ + CAN_InitStruct->CAN_TTCM = DISABLE; + + /* Initialize the automatic bus-off management */ + CAN_InitStruct->CAN_ABOM = DISABLE; + + /* Initialize the automatic wake-up mode */ + CAN_InitStruct->CAN_AWUM = DISABLE; + + /* Initialize the no automatic retransmission */ + CAN_InitStruct->CAN_NART = DISABLE; + + /* Initialize the receive FIFO locked mode */ + CAN_InitStruct->CAN_RFLM = DISABLE; + + /* Initialize the transmit FIFO priority */ + CAN_InitStruct->CAN_TXFP = DISABLE; + + /* Initialize the CAN_Mode member */ + CAN_InitStruct->CAN_Mode = CAN_Mode_Normal; + + /* Initialize the CAN_SJW member */ + CAN_InitStruct->CAN_SJW = CAN_SJW_1tq; + + /* Initialize the CAN_BS1 member */ + CAN_InitStruct->CAN_BS1 = CAN_BS1_4tq; + + /* Initialize the CAN_BS2 member */ + CAN_InitStruct->CAN_BS2 = CAN_BS2_3tq; + + /* Initialize the CAN_Prescaler member */ + CAN_InitStruct->CAN_Prescaler = 1; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : CAN_ITConfig +* Description : Enables or disables the specified CAN interrupts. +* Input : - CAN_IT: specifies the CAN interrupt sources to be enabled or +* disabled. +* This parameter can be: CAN_IT_TME, CAN_IT_FMP0, CAN_IT_FF0, +* CAN_IT_FOV0, CAN_IT_FMP1, CAN_IT_FF1, +* CAN_IT_FOV1, CAN_IT_EWG, CAN_IT_EPV, +* CAN_IT_LEC, CAN_IT_ERR, CAN_IT_WKU or +* CAN_IT_SLK. +* - NewState: new state of the CAN interrupts. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None. +* Return : None. +*******************************************************************************/ +void CAN_ITConfig(u32 CAN_IT, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_CAN_ITConfig(CAN_IT)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected CAN interrupt */ + CAN->IER |= CAN_IT; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected CAN interrupt */ + CAN->IER &= ~CAN_IT; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : CAN_Transmit +* Description : Initiates the transmission of a message. +* Input : TxMessage: pointer to a structure which contains CAN Id, CAN +* DLC and CAN datas. +* Output : None. +* Return : The number of the mailbox that is used for transmission +* or CAN_NO_MB if there is no empty mailbox. +*******************************************************************************/ +u8 CAN_Transmit(CanTxMsg* TxMessage) +{ + u8 TransmitMailbox = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_CAN_STDID(TxMessage->StdId)); + assert_param(IS_CAN_EXTID(TxMessage->StdId)); + assert_param(IS_CAN_IDTYPE(TxMessage->IDE)); + assert_param(IS_CAN_RTR(TxMessage->RTR)); + assert_param(IS_CAN_DLC(TxMessage->DLC)); + + /* Select one empty transmit mailbox */ + if ((CAN->TSR&CAN_TSR_TME0) == CAN_TSR_TME0) + { + TransmitMailbox = 0; + } + else if ((CAN->TSR&CAN_TSR_TME1) == CAN_TSR_TME1) + { + TransmitMailbox = 1; + } + else if ((CAN->TSR&CAN_TSR_TME2) == CAN_TSR_TME2) + { + TransmitMailbox = 2; + } + else + { + TransmitMailbox = CAN_NO_MB; + } + + if (TransmitMailbox != CAN_NO_MB) + { + /* Set up the Id */ + CAN->sTxMailBox[TransmitMailbox].TIR &= CAN_TMIDxR_TXRQ; + if (TxMessage->IDE == CAN_ID_STD) + { + TxMessage->StdId &= (u32)0x000007FF; + TxMessage->StdId = TxMessage->StdId << 21; + + CAN->sTxMailBox[TransmitMailbox].TIR |= (TxMessage->StdId | TxMessage->IDE | + TxMessage->RTR); + } + else + { + TxMessage->ExtId &= (u32)0x1FFFFFFF; + TxMessage->ExtId <<= 3; + + CAN->sTxMailBox[TransmitMailbox].TIR |= (TxMessage->ExtId | TxMessage->IDE | + TxMessage->RTR); + } + + /* Set up the DLC */ + TxMessage->DLC &= (u8)0x0000000F; + CAN->sTxMailBox[TransmitMailbox].TDTR &= (u32)0xFFFFFFF0; + CAN->sTxMailBox[TransmitMailbox].TDTR |= TxMessage->DLC; + + /* Set up the data field */ + CAN->sTxMailBox[TransmitMailbox].TDLR = (((u32)TxMessage->Data[3] << 24) | + ((u32)TxMessage->Data[2] << 16) | + ((u32)TxMessage->Data[1] << 8) | + ((u32)TxMessage->Data[0])); + CAN->sTxMailBox[TransmitMailbox].TDHR = (((u32)TxMessage->Data[7] << 24) | + ((u32)TxMessage->Data[6] << 16) | + ((u32)TxMessage->Data[5] << 8) | + ((u32)TxMessage->Data[4])); + + /* Request transmission */ + CAN->sTxMailBox[TransmitMailbox].TIR |= CAN_TMIDxR_TXRQ; + } + + return TransmitMailbox; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : CAN_TransmitStatus +* Description : Checks the transmission of a message. +* Input : TransmitMailbox: the number of the mailbox that is used for +* transmission. +* Output : None. +* Return : CANTXOK if the CAN driver transmits the message, CANTXFAILED +* in an other case. +*******************************************************************************/ +u8 CAN_TransmitStatus(u8 TransmitMailbox) +{ + /* RQCP, TXOK and TME bits */ + u8 State = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_CAN_TRANSMITMAILBOX(TransmitMailbox)); + + switch (TransmitMailbox) + { + case (0): State |= (u8)((CAN->TSR & CAN_TSR_RQCP0) << 2); + State |= (u8)((CAN->TSR & CAN_TSR_TXOK0) >> 0); + State |= (u8)((CAN->TSR & CAN_TSR_TME0) >> 26); + break; + case (1): State |= (u8)((CAN->TSR & CAN_TSR_RQCP1) >> 6); + State |= (u8)((CAN->TSR & CAN_TSR_TXOK1) >> 8); + State |= (u8)((CAN->TSR & CAN_TSR_TME1) >> 27); + break; + case (2): State |= (u8)((CAN->TSR & CAN_TSR_RQCP2) >> 14); + State |= (u8)((CAN->TSR & CAN_TSR_TXOK2) >> 16); + State |= (u8)((CAN->TSR & CAN_TSR_TME2) >> 28); + break; + default: + State = CANTXFAILED; + break; + } + + switch (State) + { + /* transmit pending */ + case (0x0): State = CANTXPENDING; + break; + /* transmit failed */ + case (0x5): State = CANTXFAILED; + break; + /* transmit succedeed */ + case (0x7): State = CANTXOK; + break; + default: + State = CANTXFAILED; + break; + } + + return State; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : CAN_CancelTransmit +* Description : Cancels a transmit request. +* Input : Mailbox number. +* Output : None. +* Return : None. +*******************************************************************************/ +void CAN_CancelTransmit(u8 Mailbox) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_CAN_TRANSMITMAILBOX(Mailbox)); + + /* abort transmission */ + switch (Mailbox) + { + case (0): CAN->TSR |= CAN_TSR_ABRQ0; + break; + case (1): CAN->TSR |= CAN_TSR_ABRQ1; + break; + case (2): CAN->TSR |= CAN_TSR_ABRQ2; + break; + default: + break; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : CAN_FIFORelease +* Description : Releases a FIFO. +* Input : FIFONumber: FIFO to release, CAN_FIFO0 or CAN_FIFO1. +* Output : None. +* Return : None. +*******************************************************************************/ +void CAN_FIFORelease(u8 FIFONumber) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_CAN_FIFO(FIFONumber)); + + /* Release FIFO0 */ + if (FIFONumber == CAN_FIFO0) + { + CAN->RF0R = CAN_RF0R_RFOM0; + } + /* Release FIFO1 */ + else /* FIFONumber == CAN_FIFO1 */ + { + CAN->RF1R = CAN_RF1R_RFOM1; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : CAN_MessagePending +* Description : Returns the number of pending messages. +* Input : FIFONumber: Receive FIFO number, CAN_FIFO0 or CAN_FIFO1. +* Output : None. +* Return : NbMessage which is the number of pending message. +*******************************************************************************/ +u8 CAN_MessagePending(u8 FIFONumber) +{ + u8 MessagePending=0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_CAN_FIFO(FIFONumber)); + + if (FIFONumber == CAN_FIFO0) + { + MessagePending = (u8)(CAN->RF0R&(u32)0x03); + } + else if (FIFONumber == CAN_FIFO1) + { + MessagePending = (u8)(CAN->RF1R&(u32)0x03); + } + else + { + MessagePending = 0; + } + return MessagePending; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : CAN_Receive +* Description : Receives a message. +* Input : FIFONumber: Receive FIFO number, CAN_FIFO0 or CAN_FIFO1. +* Output : RxMessage: pointer to a structure which contains CAN Id, +* CAN DLC, CAN datas and FMI number. +* Return : None. +*******************************************************************************/ +void CAN_Receive(u8 FIFONumber, CanRxMsg* RxMessage) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_CAN_FIFO(FIFONumber)); + + /* Get the Id */ + RxMessage->IDE = (u8)0x04 & CAN->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RIR; + if (RxMessage->IDE == CAN_ID_STD) + { + RxMessage->StdId = (u32)0x000007FF & (CAN->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RIR >> 21); + } + else + { + RxMessage->ExtId = (u32)0x1FFFFFFF & (CAN->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RIR >> 3); + } + + RxMessage->RTR = (u8)0x02 & CAN->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RIR; + + /* Get the DLC */ + RxMessage->DLC = (u8)0x0F & CAN->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RDTR; + + /* Get the FMI */ + RxMessage->FMI = (u8)0xFF & (CAN->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RDTR >> 8); + + /* Get the data field */ + RxMessage->Data[0] = (u8)0xFF & CAN->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RDLR; + RxMessage->Data[1] = (u8)0xFF & (CAN->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RDLR >> 8); + RxMessage->Data[2] = (u8)0xFF & (CAN->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RDLR >> 16); + RxMessage->Data[3] = (u8)0xFF & (CAN->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RDLR >> 24); + + RxMessage->Data[4] = (u8)0xFF & CAN->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RDHR; + RxMessage->Data[5] = (u8)0xFF & (CAN->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RDHR >> 8); + RxMessage->Data[6] = (u8)0xFF & (CAN->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RDHR >> 16); + RxMessage->Data[7] = (u8)0xFF & (CAN->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RDHR >> 24); + + /* Release the FIFO */ + CAN_FIFORelease(FIFONumber); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : CAN_Sleep +* Description : Enters the low power mode. +* Input : None. +* Output : None. +* Return : CANSLEEPOK if sleep entered, CANSLEEPFAILED in an other case. +*******************************************************************************/ +u8 CAN_Sleep(void) +{ + u8 SleepStatus = 0; + + /* Sleep mode entering request */ + CAN->MCR |= CAN_MCR_SLEEP; + SleepStatus = CANSLEEPOK; + + /* Sleep mode status */ + if ((CAN->MCR&CAN_MCR_SLEEP) == 0) + { + /* Sleep mode not entered */ + SleepStatus = CANSLEEPFAILED; + } + + /* At this step, sleep mode status */ + return SleepStatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : CAN_WakeUp +* Description : Wakes the CAN up. +* Input : None. +* Output : None. +* Return : CANWAKEUPOK if sleep mode left, CANWAKEUPFAILED in an other +* case. +*******************************************************************************/ +u8 CAN_WakeUp(void) +{ + u8 WakeUpStatus = 0; + + /* Wake up request */ + CAN->MCR &= ~CAN_MCR_SLEEP; + WakeUpStatus = CANWAKEUPFAILED; + + /* Sleep mode status */ + if ((CAN->MCR&CAN_MCR_SLEEP) == 0) + { + /* Sleep mode exited */ + WakeUpStatus = CANWAKEUPOK; + } + + /* At this step, sleep mode status */ + return WakeUpStatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : CAN_GetFlagStatus +* Description : Checks whether the specified CAN flag is set or not. +* Input : CAN_FLAG: specifies the flag to check. +* This parameter can be: CAN_FLAG_EWG, CAN_FLAG_EPV or +* CAN_FLAG_BOF. +* Output : None. +* Return : The new state of CAN_FLAG (SET or RESET). +*******************************************************************************/ +FlagStatus CAN_GetFlagStatus(u32 CAN_FLAG) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_CAN_FLAG(CAN_FLAG)); + + /* Check the status of the specified CAN flag */ + if ((CAN->ESR & CAN_FLAG) != (u32)RESET) + { + /* CAN_FLAG is set */ + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* CAN_FLAG is reset */ + bitstatus = RESET; + } + /* Return the CAN_FLAG status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : CAN_ClearFlag +* Description : Clears the CAN's pending flags. +* Input : CAN_FLAG: specifies the flag to clear. +* Output : None. +* Return : None. +*******************************************************************************/ +void CAN_ClearFlag(u32 CAN_FLAG) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_CAN_FLAG(CAN_FLAG)); + + /* Clear the selected CAN flags */ + CAN->ESR &= ~CAN_FLAG; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : CAN_GetITStatus +* Description : Checks whether the specified CAN interrupt has occurred or +* not. +* Input : CAN_IT: specifies the CAN interrupt source to check. +* This parameter can be: CAN_IT_RQCP0, CAN_IT_RQCP1, CAN_IT_RQCP2, +* CAN_IT_FF0, CAN_IT_FOV0, CAN_IT_FF1, +* CAN_IT_FOV1, CAN_IT_EWG, CAN_IT_EPV, +* CAN_IT_BOF, CAN_IT_WKU or CAN_IT_SLK. +* Output : None. +* Return : The new state of CAN_IT (SET or RESET). +*******************************************************************************/ +ITStatus CAN_GetITStatus(u32 CAN_IT) +{ + ITStatus pendingbitstatus = RESET; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_CAN_ITStatus(CAN_IT)); + + switch (CAN_IT) + { + case CAN_IT_RQCP0: + pendingbitstatus = CheckITStatus(CAN->TSR, CAN_TSR_RQCP0); + break; + case CAN_IT_RQCP1: + pendingbitstatus = CheckITStatus(CAN->TSR, CAN_TSR_RQCP1); + break; + case CAN_IT_RQCP2: + pendingbitstatus = CheckITStatus(CAN->TSR, CAN_TSR_RQCP2); + break; + case CAN_IT_FF0: + pendingbitstatus = CheckITStatus(CAN->RF0R, CAN_RF0R_FULL0); + break; + case CAN_IT_FOV0: + pendingbitstatus = CheckITStatus(CAN->RF0R, CAN_RF0R_FOVR0); + break; + case CAN_IT_FF1: + pendingbitstatus = CheckITStatus(CAN->RF1R, CAN_RF1R_FULL1); + break; + case CAN_IT_FOV1: + pendingbitstatus = CheckITStatus(CAN->RF1R, CAN_RF1R_FOVR1); + break; + case CAN_IT_EWG: + pendingbitstatus = CheckITStatus(CAN->ESR, CAN_ESR_EWGF); + break; + case CAN_IT_EPV: + pendingbitstatus = CheckITStatus(CAN->ESR, CAN_ESR_EPVF); + break; + case CAN_IT_BOF: + pendingbitstatus = CheckITStatus(CAN->ESR, CAN_ESR_BOFF); + break; + case CAN_IT_SLK: + pendingbitstatus = CheckITStatus(CAN->MSR, CAN_MSR_SLAKI); + break; + case CAN_IT_WKU: + pendingbitstatus = CheckITStatus(CAN->MSR, CAN_MSR_WKUI); + break; + + default : + pendingbitstatus = RESET; + break; + } + + /* Return the CAN_IT status */ + return pendingbitstatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : CAN_ClearITPendingBit +* Description : Clears the CAN’s interrupt pending bits. +* Input : CAN_IT: specifies the interrupt pending bit to clear. +* Output : None. +* Return : None. +*******************************************************************************/ +void CAN_ClearITPendingBit(u32 CAN_IT) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_CAN_ITStatus(CAN_IT)); + + switch (CAN_IT) + { + case CAN_IT_RQCP0: + CAN->TSR = CAN_TSR_RQCP0; /* rc_w1*/ + break; + case CAN_IT_RQCP1: + CAN->TSR = CAN_TSR_RQCP1; /* rc_w1*/ + break; + case CAN_IT_RQCP2: + CAN->TSR = CAN_TSR_RQCP2; /* rc_w1*/ + break; + case CAN_IT_FF0: + CAN->RF0R = CAN_RF0R_FULL0; /* rc_w1*/ + break; + case CAN_IT_FOV0: + CAN->RF0R = CAN_RF0R_FOVR0; /* rc_w1*/ + break; + case CAN_IT_FF1: + CAN->RF1R = CAN_RF1R_FULL1; /* rc_w1*/ + break; + case CAN_IT_FOV1: + CAN->RF1R = CAN_RF1R_FOVR1; /* rc_w1*/ + break; + case CAN_IT_EWG: + CAN->ESR &= ~ CAN_ESR_EWGF; /* rw */ + break; + case CAN_IT_EPV: + CAN->ESR &= ~ CAN_ESR_EPVF; /* rw */ + break; + case CAN_IT_BOF: + CAN->ESR &= ~ CAN_ESR_BOFF; /* rw */ + break; + case CAN_IT_WKU: + CAN->MSR = CAN_MSR_WKUI; /* rc_w1*/ + break; + case CAN_IT_SLK: + CAN->MSR = CAN_MSR_SLAKI; /* rc_w1*/ + break; + default : + break; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : CheckITStatus +* Description : Checks whether the CAN interrupt has occurred or not. +* Input : CAN_Reg: specifies the CAN interrupt register to check. +* It_Bit: specifies the interrupt source bit to check. +* Output : None. +* Return : The new state of the CAN Interrupt (SET or RESET). +*******************************************************************************/ +static ITStatus CheckITStatus(u32 CAN_Reg, u32 It_Bit) +{ + ITStatus pendingbitstatus = RESET; + + if ((CAN_Reg & It_Bit) != (u32)RESET) + { + /* CAN_IT is set */ + pendingbitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* CAN_IT is reset */ + pendingbitstatus = RESET; + } + + return pendingbitstatus; +} + +/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_crc.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_crc.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ac8c7c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_crc.c @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ******************** +* File Name : stm32f10x_crc.c +* Author : MCD Application Team +* Version : V2.0.2 +* Date : 07/11/2008 +* Description : This file provides all the CRC firmware functions. +******************************************************************************** +* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS +* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME. +* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, +* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE +* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING +* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS. +*******************************************************************************/ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32f10x_crc.h" + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/* CR register bit mask */ +#define CR_RESET_Set ((u32)0x00000001) + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : CRC_ResetDR +* Description : Resets the CRC Data register (DR). +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void CRC_ResetDR(void) +{ + /* Reset CRC generator */ + CRC->CR = CR_RESET_Set; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : CRC_CalcCRC +* Description : Computes the 32-bit CRC of a given data word(32-bit). +* Input : - Data: data word(32-bit) to compute its CRC +* Output : None +* Return : 32-bit CRC +*******************************************************************************/ +u32 CRC_CalcCRC(u32 Data) +{ + CRC->DR = Data; + + return (CRC->DR); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : CRC_CalcBlockCRC +* Description : Computes the 32-bit CRC of a given buffer of data word(32-bit). +* Input : - pBuffer: pointer to the buffer containing the data to be +* computed +* - BufferLength: length of the buffer to be computed +* Output : None +* Return : 32-bit CRC +*******************************************************************************/ +u32 CRC_CalcBlockCRC(u32 pBuffer[], u32 BufferLength) +{ + u32 index = 0; + + for(index = 0; index < BufferLength; index++) + { + CRC->DR = pBuffer[index]; + } + + return (CRC->DR); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : CRC_GetCRC +* Description : Returns the current CRC value. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : 32-bit CRC +*******************************************************************************/ +u32 CRC_GetCRC(void) +{ + return (CRC->DR); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : CRC_SetIDRegister +* Description : Stores a 8-bit data in the Independent Data(ID) register. +* Input : - IDValue: 8-bit value to be stored in the ID register +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void CRC_SetIDRegister(u8 IDValue) +{ + CRC->IDR = IDValue; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : CRC_GetIDRegister +* Description : Returns the 8-bit data stored in the Independent Data(ID) register +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : 8-bit value of the ID register +*******************************************************************************/ +u8 CRC_GetIDRegister(void) +{ + return (CRC->IDR); +} + +/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_dac.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_dac.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..80eec1a --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_dac.c @@ -0,0 +1,389 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ******************** +* File Name : stm32f10x_dac.c +* Author : MCD Application Team +* Version : V2.0.2 +* Date : 07/11/2008 +* Description : This file provides all the DAC firmware functions. +******************************************************************************** +* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS +* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME. +* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, +* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE +* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING +* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS. +*******************************************************************************/ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32f10x_dac.h" +#include "stm32f10x_rcc.h" + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* DAC EN mask */ +#define CR_EN_Set ((u32)0x00000001) + +/* DAC DMAEN mask */ +#define CR_DMAEN_Set ((u32)0x00001000) + +/* CR register Mask */ +#define CR_CLEAR_Mask ((u32)0x00000FFE) + +/* DAC SWTRIG mask */ +#define SWTRIGR_SWTRIG_Set ((u32)0x00000001) + +/* DAC Dual Channels SWTRIG masks */ +#define DUAL_SWTRIG_Set ((u32)0x00000003) +#define DUAL_SWTRIG_Reset ((u32)0xFFFFFFFC) + +/* DHR registers offsets */ +#define DHR12R1_Offset ((u32)0x00000008) +#define DHR12R2_Offset ((u32)0x00000014) +#define DHR12RD_Offset ((u32)0x00000020) + +/* DOR register offset */ +#define DOR_Offset ((u32)0x0000002C) + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : DAC_DeInit +* Description : Deinitializes the DAC peripheral registers to their default +* reset values. +* Input : None. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void DAC_DeInit(void) +{ + /* Enable DAC reset state */ + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_DAC, ENABLE); + /* Release DAC from reset state */ + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_DAC, DISABLE); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : DAC_Init +* Description : Initializes the DAC peripheral according to the specified +* parameters in the DAC_InitStruct. +* Input : - DAC_Channel: the selected DAC channel. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected +* - DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected +* - DAC_InitStruct: pointer to a DAC_InitTypeDef structure that +* contains the configuration information for the specified +* DAC channel. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void DAC_Init(u32 DAC_Channel, DAC_InitTypeDef* DAC_InitStruct) +{ + u32 tmpreg1 = 0, tmpreg2 = 0; + + /* Check the DAC parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DAC_TRIGGER(DAC_InitStruct->DAC_Trigger)); + assert_param(IS_DAC_GENERATE_WAVE(DAC_InitStruct->DAC_WaveGeneration)); + assert_param(IS_DAC_LFSR_UNMASK_TRIANGLE_AMPLITUDE(DAC_InitStruct->DAC_LFSRUnmask_TriangleAmplitude)); + assert_param(IS_DAC_OUTPUT_BUFFER_STATE(DAC_InitStruct->DAC_OutputBuffer)); + +/*---------------------------- DAC CR Configuration --------------------------*/ + /* Get the DAC CR value */ + tmpreg1 = DAC->CR; + /* Clear BOFFx, TENx, TSELx, WAVEx and MAMPx bits */ + tmpreg1 &= ~(CR_CLEAR_Mask << DAC_Channel); + /* Configure for the selected DAC channel: buffer output, trigger, wave genration, + mask/amplitude for wave genration */ + /* Set TSELx and TENx bits according to DAC_Trigger value */ + /* Set WAVEx bits according to DAC_WaveGeneration value */ + /* Set MAMPx bits according to DAC_LFSRUnmask_TriangleAmplitude value */ + /* Set BOFFx bit according to DAC_OutputBuffer value */ + tmpreg2 = (DAC_InitStruct->DAC_Trigger | DAC_InitStruct->DAC_WaveGeneration | + DAC_InitStruct->DAC_LFSRUnmask_TriangleAmplitude | DAC_InitStruct->DAC_OutputBuffer); + /* Calculate CR register value depending on DAC_Channel */ + tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2 << DAC_Channel; + /* Write to DAC CR */ + DAC->CR = tmpreg1; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : DAC_StructInit +* Description : Fills each DAC_InitStruct member with its default value. +* Input : - DAC_InitStruct : pointer to a DAC_InitTypeDef structure +* which will be initialized. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void DAC_StructInit(DAC_InitTypeDef* DAC_InitStruct) +{ +/*--------------- Reset DAC init structure parameters values -----------------*/ + /* Initialize the DAC_Trigger member */ + DAC_InitStruct->DAC_Trigger = DAC_Trigger_None; + + /* Initialize the DAC_WaveGeneration member */ + DAC_InitStruct->DAC_WaveGeneration = DAC_WaveGeneration_None; + + /* Initialize the DAC_LFSRUnmask_TriangleAmplitude member */ + DAC_InitStruct->DAC_LFSRUnmask_TriangleAmplitude = DAC_LFSRUnmask_Bit0; + + /* Initialize the DAC_OutputBuffer member */ + DAC_InitStruct->DAC_OutputBuffer = DAC_OutputBuffer_Enable; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : DAC_Cmd +* Description : Enables or disables the specified DAC channel. +* Input - DAC_Channel: the selected DAC channel. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected +* - DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected +* - NewState: new state of the DAC channel. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void DAC_Cmd(u32 DAC_Channel, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected DAC channel */ + DAC->CR |= CR_EN_Set << DAC_Channel; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected DAC channel */ + DAC->CR &= ~(CR_EN_Set << DAC_Channel); + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : DAC_DMACmd +* Description : Enables or disables the specified DAC channel DMA request. +* Input - DAC_Channel: the selected DAC channel. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected +* - DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected +* - NewState: new state of the selected DAC channel DMA request. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void DAC_DMACmd(u32 DAC_Channel, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected DAC channel DMA request */ + DAC->CR |= CR_DMAEN_Set << DAC_Channel; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected DAC channel DMA request */ + DAC->CR &= ~(CR_DMAEN_Set << DAC_Channel); + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : DAC_SoftwareTriggerCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the selected DAC channel software trigger. +* Input - DAC_Channel: the selected DAC channel. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected +* - DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected +* - NewState: new state of the selected DAC channel software trigger. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void DAC_SoftwareTriggerCmd(u32 DAC_Channel, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable software trigger for the selected DAC channel */ + DAC->SWTRIGR |= SWTRIGR_SWTRIG_Set << (DAC_Channel >> 4); + } + else + { + /* Disable software trigger for the selected DAC channel */ + DAC->SWTRIGR &= ~(SWTRIGR_SWTRIG_Set << (DAC_Channel >> 4)); + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : DAC_DualSoftwareTriggerCmd +* Description : Enables or disables simultaneously the two DAC channels software +* triggers. +* Input - NewState: new state of the DAC channels software triggers. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void DAC_DualSoftwareTriggerCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable software trigger for both DAC channels */ + DAC->SWTRIGR |= DUAL_SWTRIG_Set ; + } + else + { + /* Disable software trigger for both DAC channels */ + DAC->SWTRIGR &= DUAL_SWTRIG_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : DAC_WaveGenerationCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the selected DAC channel wave generation. +* Input - DAC_Channel: the selected DAC channel. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected +* - DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected +* - DAC_Wave: Specifies the wave type to enable or disable. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - DAC_Wave_Noise: noise wave generation +* - DAC_Wave_Triangle: triangle wave generation +* - NewState: new state of the selected DAC channel wave generation. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void DAC_WaveGenerationCmd(u32 DAC_Channel, u32 DAC_Wave, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel)); + assert_param(IS_DAC_WAVE(DAC_Wave)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected wave generation for the selected DAC channel */ + DAC->CR |= DAC_Wave << DAC_Channel; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected wave generation for the selected DAC channel */ + DAC->CR &= ~(DAC_Wave << DAC_Channel); + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : DAC_SetChannel1Data +* Description : Set the specified data holding register value for DAC channel1. +* Input : - DAC_Align: Specifies the data alignement for DAC channel1. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - DAC_Align_8b_R: 8bit right data alignement selected +* - DAC_Align_12b_L: 12bit left data alignement selected +* - DAC_Align_12b_R: 12bit right data alignement selected +* - Data : Data to be loaded in the selected data holding +* register. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void DAC_SetChannel1Data(u32 DAC_Align, u16 Data) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DAC_ALIGN(DAC_Align)); + assert_param(IS_DAC_DATA(Data)); + + /* Set the DAC channel1 selected data holding register */ + *((vu32 *)(DAC_BASE + DHR12R1_Offset + DAC_Align)) = (u32)Data; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : DAC_SetChannel2Data +* Description : Set the specified data holding register value for DAC channel2. +* Input : - DAC_Align: Specifies the data alignement for DAC channel2. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - DAC_Align_8b_R: 8bit right data alignement selected +* - DAC_Align_12b_L: 12bit left data alignement selected +* - DAC_Align_12b_R: 12bit right data alignement selected +* - Data : Data to be loaded in the selected data holding +* register. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void DAC_SetChannel2Data(u32 DAC_Align, u16 Data) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DAC_ALIGN(DAC_Align)); + assert_param(IS_DAC_DATA(Data)); + + /* Set the DAC channel2 selected data holding register */ + *((vu32 *)(DAC_BASE + DHR12R2_Offset + DAC_Align)) = (u32)Data; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : DAC_SetDualChannelData +* Description : Set the specified data holding register value for dual channel +* DAC. +* Input : - DAC_Align: Specifies the data alignement for dual channel DAC. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - DAC_Align_8b_R: 8bit right data alignement selected +* - DAC_Align_12b_L: 12bit left data alignement selected +* - DAC_Align_12b_R: 12bit right data alignement selected +* - Data2: Data for DAC Channel2 to be loaded in the selected data +* holding register. +* - Data1: Data for DAC Channel1 to be loaded in the selected data +* holding register. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void DAC_SetDualChannelData(u32 DAC_Align, u16 Data2, u16 Data1) +{ + u32 data = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DAC_ALIGN(DAC_Align)); + assert_param(IS_DAC_DATA(Data1)); + assert_param(IS_DAC_DATA(Data2)); + + /* Calculate and set dual DAC data holding register value */ + if (DAC_Align == DAC_Align_8b_R) + { + data = ((u32)Data2 << 8) | Data1; + } + else + { + data = ((u32)Data2 << 16) | Data1; + } + + /* Set the dual DAC selected data holding register */ + *((vu32 *)(DAC_BASE + DHR12RD_Offset + DAC_Align)) = data; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : DAC_GetDataOutputValue +* Description : Returns the last data output value of the selected DAC cahnnel. +* Input - DAC_Channel: the selected DAC channel. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected +* - DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected +* Output : None +* Return : The selected DAC channel data output value. +*******************************************************************************/ +u16 DAC_GetDataOutputValue(u32 DAC_Channel) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel)); + + /* Returns the DAC channel data output register value */ + return (u16) (*(vu32*)(DAC_BASE + DOR_Offset + ((u32)DAC_Channel >> 2))); +} + +/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_dbgmcu.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_dbgmcu.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..04103b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_dbgmcu.c @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ******************** +* File Name : stm32f10x_dbgmcu.c +* Author : MCD Application Team +* Version : V2.0.2 +* Date : 07/11/2008 +* Description : This file provides all the DBGMCU firmware functions. +******************************************************************************** +* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS +* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME. +* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, +* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE +* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING +* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS. +*******************************************************************************/ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32f10x_dbgmcu.h" + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#define IDCODE_DEVID_Mask ((u32)0x00000FFF) + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : DBGMCU_GetREVID +* Description : Returns the device revision identifier. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : Device revision identifier +*******************************************************************************/ +u32 DBGMCU_GetREVID(void) +{ + return(DBGMCU->IDCODE >> 16); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : DBGMCU_GetDEVID +* Description : Returns the device identifier. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : Device identifier +*******************************************************************************/ +u32 DBGMCU_GetDEVID(void) +{ + return(DBGMCU->IDCODE & IDCODE_DEVID_Mask); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : DBGMCU_Config +* Description : Configures the specified peripheral and low power mode behavior +* when the MCU under Debug mode. +* Input : - DBGMCU_Periph: specifies the peripheral and low power mode. +* This parameter can be any combination of the following values: +* - DBGMCU_SLEEP: Keep debugger connection during SLEEP mode +* - DBGMCU_STOP: Keep debugger connection during STOP mode +* - DBGMCU_STANDBY: Keep debugger connection during STANDBY mode +* - DBGMCU_IWDG_STOP: Debug IWDG stopped when Core is halted +* - DBGMCU_WWDG_STOP: Debug WWDG stopped when Core is halted +* - DBGMCU_TIM1_STOP: TIM1 counter stopped when Core is halted +* - DBGMCU_TIM2_STOP: TIM2 counter stopped when Core is halted +* - DBGMCU_TIM3_STOP: TIM3 counter stopped when Core is halted +* - DBGMCU_TIM4_STOP: TIM4 counter stopped when Core is halted +* - DBGMCU_CAN_STOP: Debug CAN stopped when Core is halted +* - DBGMCU_I2C1_SMBUS_TIMEOUT: I2C1 SMBUS timeout mode stopped +* when Core is halted +* - DBGMCU_I2C2_SMBUS_TIMEOUT: I2C2 SMBUS timeout mode stopped +* when Core is halted +* - DBGMCU_TIM5_STOP: TIM5 counter stopped when Core is halted +* - DBGMCU_TIM6_STOP: TIM6 counter stopped when Core is halted +* - DBGMCU_TIM7_STOP: TIM7 counter stopped when Core is halted +* - DBGMCU_TIM8_STOP: TIM8 counter stopped when Core is halted +* - NewState: new state of the specified peripheral in Debug mode. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void DBGMCU_Config(u32 DBGMCU_Periph, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DBGMCU_PERIPH(DBGMCU_Periph)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + DBGMCU->CR |= DBGMCU_Periph; + } + else + { + DBGMCU->CR &= ~DBGMCU_Periph; + } +} + +/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_dma.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_dma.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..eaefcb9 --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_dma.c @@ -0,0 +1,678 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ******************** +* File Name : stm32f10x_dma.c +* Author : MCD Application Team +* Version : V2.0.2 +* Date : 07/11/2008 +* Description : This file provides all the DMA firmware functions. +******************************************************************************** +* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS +* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME. +* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, +* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE +* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING +* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS. +*******************************************************************************/ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32f10x_dma.h" +#include "stm32f10x_rcc.h" + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* DMA ENABLE mask */ +#define CCR_ENABLE_Set ((u32)0x00000001) +#define CCR_ENABLE_Reset ((u32)0xFFFFFFFE) + +/* DMA1 Channelx interrupt pending bit masks */ +#define DMA1_Channel1_IT_Mask ((u32)0x0000000F) +#define DMA1_Channel2_IT_Mask ((u32)0x000000F0) +#define DMA1_Channel3_IT_Mask ((u32)0x00000F00) +#define DMA1_Channel4_IT_Mask ((u32)0x0000F000) +#define DMA1_Channel5_IT_Mask ((u32)0x000F0000) +#define DMA1_Channel6_IT_Mask ((u32)0x00F00000) +#define DMA1_Channel7_IT_Mask ((u32)0x0F000000) + +/* DMA2 Channelx interrupt pending bit masks */ +#define DMA2_Channel1_IT_Mask ((u32)0x0000000F) +#define DMA2_Channel2_IT_Mask ((u32)0x000000F0) +#define DMA2_Channel3_IT_Mask ((u32)0x00000F00) +#define DMA2_Channel4_IT_Mask ((u32)0x0000F000) +#define DMA2_Channel5_IT_Mask ((u32)0x000F0000) + +/* DMA2 FLAG mask */ +#define FLAG_Mask ((u32)0x10000000) + +/* DMA registers Masks */ +#define CCR_CLEAR_Mask ((u32)0xFFFF800F) + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : DMA_DeInit +* Description : Deinitializes the DMAy Channelx registers to their default reset +* values. +* Input : - DMAy_Channelx: where y can be 1 or 2 to select the DMA and +* x can be 1 to 7 for DMA1 and 1 to 5 for DMA2 to select the +* DMA Channel. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void DMA_DeInit(DMA_Channel_TypeDef* DMAy_Channelx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DMA_ALL_PERIPH(DMAy_Channelx)); + + /* Disable the selected DMAy Channelx */ + DMAy_Channelx->CCR &= CCR_ENABLE_Reset; + + /* Reset DMAy Channelx control register */ + DMAy_Channelx->CCR = 0; + + /* Reset DMAy Channelx remaining bytes register */ + DMAy_Channelx->CNDTR = 0; + + /* Reset DMAy Channelx peripheral address register */ + DMAy_Channelx->CPAR = 0; + + /* Reset DMAy Channelx memory address register */ + DMAy_Channelx->CMAR = 0; + + switch (*(u32*)&DMAy_Channelx) + { + case DMA1_Channel1_BASE: + /* Reset interrupt pending bits for DMA1 Channel1 */ + DMA1->IFCR |= DMA1_Channel1_IT_Mask; + break; + + case DMA1_Channel2_BASE: + /* Reset interrupt pending bits for DMA1 Channel2 */ + DMA1->IFCR |= DMA1_Channel2_IT_Mask; + break; + + case DMA1_Channel3_BASE: + /* Reset interrupt pending bits for DMA1 Channel3 */ + DMA1->IFCR |= DMA1_Channel3_IT_Mask; + break; + + case DMA1_Channel4_BASE: + /* Reset interrupt pending bits for DMA1 Channel4 */ + DMA1->IFCR |= DMA1_Channel4_IT_Mask; + break; + + case DMA1_Channel5_BASE: + /* Reset interrupt pending bits for DMA1 Channel5 */ + DMA1->IFCR |= DMA1_Channel5_IT_Mask; + break; + + case DMA1_Channel6_BASE: + /* Reset interrupt pending bits for DMA1 Channel6 */ + DMA1->IFCR |= DMA1_Channel6_IT_Mask; + break; + + case DMA1_Channel7_BASE: + /* Reset interrupt pending bits for DMA1 Channel7 */ + DMA1->IFCR |= DMA1_Channel7_IT_Mask; + break; + + case DMA2_Channel1_BASE: + /* Reset interrupt pending bits for DMA2 Channel1 */ + DMA2->IFCR |= DMA2_Channel1_IT_Mask; + break; + + case DMA2_Channel2_BASE: + /* Reset interrupt pending bits for DMA2 Channel2 */ + DMA2->IFCR |= DMA2_Channel2_IT_Mask; + break; + + case DMA2_Channel3_BASE: + /* Reset interrupt pending bits for DMA2 Channel3 */ + DMA2->IFCR |= DMA2_Channel3_IT_Mask; + break; + + case DMA2_Channel4_BASE: + /* Reset interrupt pending bits for DMA2 Channel4 */ + DMA2->IFCR |= DMA2_Channel4_IT_Mask; + break; + + case DMA2_Channel5_BASE: + /* Reset interrupt pending bits for DMA2 Channel5 */ + DMA2->IFCR |= DMA2_Channel5_IT_Mask; + break; + + default: + break; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : DMA_Init +* Description : Initializes the DMAy Channelx according to the specified +* parameters in the DMA_InitStruct. +* Input : - DMAy_Channelx: where y can be 1 or 2 to select the DMA and +* x can be 1 to 7 for DMA1 and 1 to 5 for DMA2 to select the +* DMA Channel. +* - DMA_InitStruct: pointer to a DMA_InitTypeDef structure that +* contains the configuration information for the specified +* DMA Channel. +* Output : None +* Return : None +******************************************************************************/ +void DMA_Init(DMA_Channel_TypeDef* DMAy_Channelx, DMA_InitTypeDef* DMA_InitStruct) +{ + u32 tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DMA_ALL_PERIPH(DMAy_Channelx)); + assert_param(IS_DMA_DIR(DMA_InitStruct->DMA_DIR)); + assert_param(IS_DMA_BUFFER_SIZE(DMA_InitStruct->DMA_BufferSize)); + assert_param(IS_DMA_PERIPHERAL_INC_STATE(DMA_InitStruct->DMA_PeripheralInc)); + assert_param(IS_DMA_MEMORY_INC_STATE(DMA_InitStruct->DMA_MemoryInc)); + assert_param(IS_DMA_PERIPHERAL_DATA_SIZE(DMA_InitStruct->DMA_PeripheralDataSize)); + assert_param(IS_DMA_MEMORY_DATA_SIZE(DMA_InitStruct->DMA_MemoryDataSize)); + assert_param(IS_DMA_MODE(DMA_InitStruct->DMA_Mode)); + assert_param(IS_DMA_PRIORITY(DMA_InitStruct->DMA_Priority)); + assert_param(IS_DMA_M2M_STATE(DMA_InitStruct->DMA_M2M)); + +/*--------------------------- DMAy Channelx CCR Configuration -----------------*/ + /* Get the DMAy_Channelx CCR value */ + tmpreg = DMAy_Channelx->CCR; + /* Clear MEM2MEM, PL, MSIZE, PSIZE, MINC, PINC, CIRC and DIR bits */ + tmpreg &= CCR_CLEAR_Mask; + /* Configure DMAy Channelx: data transfer, data size, priority level and mode */ + /* Set DIR bit according to DMA_DIR value */ + /* Set CIRC bit according to DMA_Mode value */ + /* Set PINC bit according to DMA_PeripheralInc value */ + /* Set MINC bit according to DMA_MemoryInc value */ + /* Set PSIZE bits according to DMA_PeripheralDataSize value */ + /* Set MSIZE bits according to DMA_MemoryDataSize value */ + /* Set PL bits according to DMA_Priority value */ + /* Set the MEM2MEM bit according to DMA_M2M value */ + tmpreg |= DMA_InitStruct->DMA_DIR | DMA_InitStruct->DMA_Mode | + DMA_InitStruct->DMA_PeripheralInc | DMA_InitStruct->DMA_MemoryInc | + DMA_InitStruct->DMA_PeripheralDataSize | DMA_InitStruct->DMA_MemoryDataSize | + DMA_InitStruct->DMA_Priority | DMA_InitStruct->DMA_M2M; + /* Write to DMAy Channelx CCR */ + DMAy_Channelx->CCR = tmpreg; + +/*--------------------------- DMAy Channelx CNDTR Configuration ---------------*/ + /* Write to DMAy Channelx CNDTR */ + DMAy_Channelx->CNDTR = DMA_InitStruct->DMA_BufferSize; + +/*--------------------------- DMAy Channelx CPAR Configuration ----------------*/ + /* Write to DMAy Channelx CPAR */ + DMAy_Channelx->CPAR = DMA_InitStruct->DMA_PeripheralBaseAddr; + +/*--------------------------- DMAy Channelx CMAR Configuration ----------------*/ + /* Write to DMAy Channelx CMAR */ + DMAy_Channelx->CMAR = DMA_InitStruct->DMA_MemoryBaseAddr; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : DMA_StructInit +* Description : Fills each DMA_InitStruct member with its default value. +* Input : - DMA_InitStruct : pointer to a DMA_InitTypeDef structure +* which will be initialized. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void DMA_StructInit(DMA_InitTypeDef* DMA_InitStruct) +{ +/*-------------- Reset DMA init structure parameters values ------------------*/ + /* Initialize the DMA_PeripheralBaseAddr member */ + DMA_InitStruct->DMA_PeripheralBaseAddr = 0; + + /* Initialize the DMA_MemoryBaseAddr member */ + DMA_InitStruct->DMA_MemoryBaseAddr = 0; + + /* Initialize the DMA_DIR member */ + DMA_InitStruct->DMA_DIR = DMA_DIR_PeripheralSRC; + + /* Initialize the DMA_BufferSize member */ + DMA_InitStruct->DMA_BufferSize = 0; + + /* Initialize the DMA_PeripheralInc member */ + DMA_InitStruct->DMA_PeripheralInc = DMA_PeripheralInc_Disable; + + /* Initialize the DMA_MemoryInc member */ + DMA_InitStruct->DMA_MemoryInc = DMA_MemoryInc_Disable; + + /* Initialize the DMA_PeripheralDataSize member */ + DMA_InitStruct->DMA_PeripheralDataSize = DMA_PeripheralDataSize_Byte; + + /* Initialize the DMA_MemoryDataSize member */ + DMA_InitStruct->DMA_MemoryDataSize = DMA_MemoryDataSize_Byte; + + /* Initialize the DMA_Mode member */ + DMA_InitStruct->DMA_Mode = DMA_Mode_Normal; + + /* Initialize the DMA_Priority member */ + DMA_InitStruct->DMA_Priority = DMA_Priority_Low; + + /* Initialize the DMA_M2M member */ + DMA_InitStruct->DMA_M2M = DMA_M2M_Disable; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : DMA_Cmd +* Description : Enables or disables the specified DMAy Channelx. +* Input : - DMAy_Channelx: where y can be 1 or 2 to select the DMA and +* x can be 1 to 7 for DMA1 and 1 to 5 for DMA2 to select the +* DMA Channel. +* - NewState: new state of the DMAy Channelx. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void DMA_Cmd(DMA_Channel_TypeDef* DMAy_Channelx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DMA_ALL_PERIPH(DMAy_Channelx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected DMAy Channelx */ + DMAy_Channelx->CCR |= CCR_ENABLE_Set; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected DMAy Channelx */ + DMAy_Channelx->CCR &= CCR_ENABLE_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : DMA_ITConfig +* Description : Enables or disables the specified DMAy Channelx interrupts. +* Input : - DMAy_Channelx: where y can be 1 or 2 to select the DMA and +* x can be 1 to 7 for DMA1 and 1 to 5 for DMA2 to select the +* DMA Channel. +* - DMA_IT: specifies the DMA interrupts sources to be enabled +* or disabled. +* This parameter can be any combination of the following values: +* - DMA_IT_TC: Transfer complete interrupt mask +* - DMA_IT_HT: Half transfer interrupt mask +* - DMA_IT_TE: Transfer error interrupt mask +* - NewState: new state of the specified DMA interrupts. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void DMA_ITConfig(DMA_Channel_TypeDef* DMAy_Channelx, u32 DMA_IT, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DMA_ALL_PERIPH(DMAy_Channelx)); + assert_param(IS_DMA_CONFIG_IT(DMA_IT)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected DMA interrupts */ + DMAy_Channelx->CCR |= DMA_IT; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected DMA interrupts */ + DMAy_Channelx->CCR &= ~DMA_IT; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : DMA_GetCurrDataCounter +* Description : Returns the number of remaining data units in the current +* DMAy Channelx transfer. +* Input : - DMAy_Channelx: where y can be 1 or 2 to select the DMA and +* x can be 1 to 7 for DMA1 and 1 to 5 for DMA2 to select the +* DMA Channel. +* Output : None +* Return : The number of remaining data units in the current DMAy Channelx +* transfer. +*******************************************************************************/ +u16 DMA_GetCurrDataCounter(DMA_Channel_TypeDef* DMAy_Channelx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DMA_ALL_PERIPH(DMAy_Channelx)); + + /* Return the number of remaining data units for DMAy Channelx */ + return ((u16)(DMAy_Channelx->CNDTR)); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : DMA_GetFlagStatus +* Description : Checks whether the specified DMAy Channelx flag is set or not. +* Input : - DMA_FLAG: specifies the flag to check. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - DMA1_FLAG_GL1: DMA1 Channel1 global flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_TC1: DMA1 Channel1 transfer complete flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_HT1: DMA1 Channel1 half transfer flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_TE1: DMA1 Channel1 transfer error flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_GL2: DMA1 Channel2 global flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_TC2: DMA1 Channel2 transfer complete flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_HT2: DMA1 Channel2 half transfer flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_TE2: DMA1 Channel2 transfer error flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_GL3: DMA1 Channel3 global flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_TC3: DMA1 Channel3 transfer complete flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_HT3: DMA1 Channel3 half transfer flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_TE3: DMA1 Channel3 transfer error flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_GL4: DMA1 Channel4 global flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_TC4: DMA1 Channel4 transfer complete flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_HT4: DMA1 Channel4 half transfer flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_TE4: DMA1 Channel4 transfer error flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_GL5: DMA1 Channel5 global flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_TC5: DMA1 Channel5 transfer complete flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_HT5: DMA1 Channel5 half transfer flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_TE5: DMA1 Channel5 transfer error flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_GL6: DMA1 Channel6 global flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_TC6: DMA1 Channel6 transfer complete flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_HT6: DMA1 Channel6 half transfer flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_TE6: DMA1 Channel6 transfer error flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_GL7: DMA1 Channel7 global flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_TC7: DMA1 Channel7 transfer complete flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_HT7: DMA1 Channel7 half transfer flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_TE7: DMA1 Channel7 transfer error flag. +* - DMA2_FLAG_GL1: DMA2 Channel1 global flag. +* - DMA2_FLAG_TC1: DMA2 Channel1 transfer complete flag. +* - DMA2_FLAG_HT1: DMA2 Channel1 half transfer flag. +* - DMA2_FLAG_TE1: DMA2 Channel1 transfer error flag. +* - DMA2_FLAG_GL2: DMA2 Channel2 global flag. +* - DMA2_FLAG_TC2: DMA2 Channel2 transfer complete flag. +* - DMA2_FLAG_HT2: DMA2 Channel2 half transfer flag. +* - DMA2_FLAG_TE2: DMA2 Channel2 transfer error flag. +* - DMA2_FLAG_GL3: DMA2 Channel3 global flag. +* - DMA2_FLAG_TC3: DMA2 Channel3 transfer complete flag. +* - DMA2_FLAG_HT3: DMA2 Channel3 half transfer flag. +* - DMA2_FLAG_TE3: DMA2 Channel3 transfer error flag. +* - DMA2_FLAG_GL4: DMA2 Channel4 global flag. +* - DMA2_FLAG_TC4: DMA2 Channel4 transfer complete flag. +* - DMA2_FLAG_HT4: DMA2 Channel4 half transfer flag. +* - DMA2_FLAG_TE4: DMA2 Channel4 transfer error flag. +* - DMA2_FLAG_GL5: DMA2 Channel5 global flag. +* - DMA2_FLAG_TC5: DMA2 Channel5 transfer complete flag. +* - DMA2_FLAG_HT5: DMA2 Channel5 half transfer flag. +* - DMA2_FLAG_TE5: DMA2 Channel5 transfer error flag. +* Output : None +* Return : The new state of DMA_FLAG (SET or RESET). +*******************************************************************************/ +FlagStatus DMA_GetFlagStatus(u32 DMA_FLAG) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + u32 tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DMA_GET_FLAG(DMA_FLAG)); + + /* Calculate the used DMA */ + if ((DMA_FLAG & FLAG_Mask) != (u32)RESET) + { + /* Get DMA2 ISR register value */ + tmpreg = DMA2->ISR ; + } + else + { + /* Get DMA1 ISR register value */ + tmpreg = DMA1->ISR ; + } + + /* Check the status of the specified DMA flag */ + if ((tmpreg & DMA_FLAG) != (u32)RESET) + { + /* DMA_FLAG is set */ + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* DMA_FLAG is reset */ + bitstatus = RESET; + } + + /* Return the DMA_FLAG status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : DMA_ClearFlag +* Description : Clears the DMAy Channelx's pending flags. +* Input : - DMA_FLAG: specifies the flag to clear. +* This parameter can be any combination (for the same DMA) of +* the following values: +* - DMA1_FLAG_GL1: DMA1 Channel1 global flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_TC1: DMA1 Channel1 transfer complete flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_HT1: DMA1 Channel1 half transfer flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_TE1: DMA1 Channel1 transfer error flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_GL2: DMA1 Channel2 global flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_TC2: DMA1 Channel2 transfer complete flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_HT2: DMA1 Channel2 half transfer flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_TE2: DMA1 Channel2 transfer error flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_GL3: DMA1 Channel3 global flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_TC3: DMA1 Channel3 transfer complete flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_HT3: DMA1 Channel3 half transfer flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_TE3: DMA1 Channel3 transfer error flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_GL4: DMA1 Channel4 global flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_TC4: DMA1 Channel4 transfer complete flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_HT4: DMA1 Channel4 half transfer flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_TE4: DMA1 Channel4 transfer error flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_GL5: DMA1 Channel5 global flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_TC5: DMA1 Channel5 transfer complete flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_HT5: DMA1 Channel5 half transfer flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_TE5: DMA1 Channel5 transfer error flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_GL6: DMA1 Channel6 global flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_TC6: DMA1 Channel6 transfer complete flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_HT6: DMA1 Channel6 half transfer flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_TE6: DMA1 Channel6 transfer error flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_GL7: DMA1 Channel7 global flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_TC7: DMA1 Channel7 transfer complete flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_HT7: DMA1 Channel7 half transfer flag. +* - DMA1_FLAG_TE7: DMA1 Channel7 transfer error flag. +* - DMA2_FLAG_GL1: DMA2 Channel1 global flag. +* - DMA2_FLAG_TC1: DMA2 Channel1 transfer complete flag. +* - DMA2_FLAG_HT1: DMA2 Channel1 half transfer flag. +* - DMA2_FLAG_TE1: DMA2 Channel1 transfer error flag. +* - DMA2_FLAG_GL2: DMA2 Channel2 global flag. +* - DMA2_FLAG_TC2: DMA2 Channel2 transfer complete flag. +* - DMA2_FLAG_HT2: DMA2 Channel2 half transfer flag. +* - DMA2_FLAG_TE2: DMA2 Channel2 transfer error flag. +* - DMA2_FLAG_GL3: DMA2 Channel3 global flag. +* - DMA2_FLAG_TC3: DMA2 Channel3 transfer complete flag. +* - DMA2_FLAG_HT3: DMA2 Channel3 half transfer flag. +* - DMA2_FLAG_TE3: DMA2 Channel3 transfer error flag. +* - DMA2_FLAG_GL4: DMA2 Channel4 global flag. +* - DMA2_FLAG_TC4: DMA2 Channel4 transfer complete flag. +* - DMA2_FLAG_HT4: DMA2 Channel4 half transfer flag. +* - DMA2_FLAG_TE4: DMA2 Channel4 transfer error flag. +* - DMA2_FLAG_GL5: DMA2 Channel5 global flag. +* - DMA2_FLAG_TC5: DMA2 Channel5 transfer complete flag. +* - DMA2_FLAG_HT5: DMA2 Channel5 half transfer flag. +* - DMA2_FLAG_TE5: DMA2 Channel5 transfer error flag. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void DMA_ClearFlag(u32 DMA_FLAG) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DMA_CLEAR_FLAG(DMA_FLAG)); + + /* Calculate the used DMA */ + if ((DMA_FLAG & FLAG_Mask) != (u32)RESET) + { + /* Clear the selected DMA flags */ + DMA2->IFCR = DMA_FLAG; + } + else + { + /* Clear the selected DMA flags */ + DMA1->IFCR = DMA_FLAG; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : DMA_GetITStatus +* Description : Checks whether the specified DMAy Channelx interrupt has +* occurred or not. +* Input : - DMA_IT: specifies the DMA interrupt source to check. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - DMA1_IT_GL1: DMA1 Channel1 global interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_TC1: DMA1 Channel1 transfer complete interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_HT1: DMA1 Channel1 half transfer interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_TE1: DMA1 Channel1 transfer error interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_GL2: DMA1 Channel2 global interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_TC2: DMA1 Channel2 transfer complete interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_HT2: DMA1 Channel2 half transfer interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_TE2: DMA1 Channel2 transfer error interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_GL3: DMA1 Channel3 global interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_TC3: DMA1 Channel3 transfer complete interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_HT3: DMA1 Channel3 half transfer interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_TE3: DMA1 Channel3 transfer error interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_GL4: DMA1 Channel4 global interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_TC4: DMA1 Channel4 transfer complete interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_HT4: DMA1 Channel4 half transfer interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_TE4: DMA1 Channel4 transfer error interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_GL5: DMA1 Channel5 global interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_TC5: DMA1 Channel5 transfer complete interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_HT5: DMA1 Channel5 half transfer interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_TE5: DMA1 Channel5 transfer error interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_GL6: DMA1 Channel6 global interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_TC6: DMA1 Channel6 transfer complete interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_HT6: DMA1 Channel6 half transfer interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_TE6: DMA1 Channel6 transfer error interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_GL7: DMA1 Channel7 global interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_TC7: DMA1 Channel7 transfer complete interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_HT7: DMA1 Channel7 half transfer interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_TE7: DMA1 Channel7 transfer error interrupt. +* - DMA2_IT_GL1: DMA2 Channel1 global interrupt. +* - DMA2_IT_TC1: DMA2 Channel1 transfer complete interrupt. +* - DMA2_IT_HT1: DMA2 Channel1 half transfer interrupt. +* - DMA2_IT_TE1: DMA2 Channel1 transfer error interrupt. +* - DMA2_IT_GL2: DMA2 Channel2 global interrupt. +* - DMA2_IT_TC2: DMA2 Channel2 transfer complete interrupt. +* - DMA2_IT_HT2: DMA2 Channel2 half transfer interrupt. +* - DMA2_IT_TE2: DMA2 Channel2 transfer error interrupt. +* - DMA2_IT_GL3: DMA2 Channel3 global interrupt. +* - DMA2_IT_TC3: DMA2 Channel3 transfer complete interrupt. +* - DMA2_IT_HT3: DMA2 Channel3 half transfer interrupt. +* - DMA2_IT_TE3: DMA2 Channel3 transfer error interrupt. +* - DMA2_IT_GL4: DMA2 Channel4 global interrupt. +* - DMA2_IT_TC4: DMA2 Channel4 transfer complete interrupt. +* - DMA2_IT_HT4: DMA2 Channel4 half transfer interrupt. +* - DMA2_IT_TE4: DMA2 Channel4 transfer error interrupt. +* - DMA2_IT_GL5: DMA2 Channel5 global interrupt. +* - DMA2_IT_TC5: DMA2 Channel5 transfer complete interrupt. +* - DMA2_IT_HT5: DMA2 Channel5 half transfer interrupt. +* - DMA2_IT_TE5: DMA2 Channel5 transfer error interrupt. +* Output : None +* Return : The new state of DMA_IT (SET or RESET). +*******************************************************************************/ +ITStatus DMA_GetITStatus(u32 DMA_IT) +{ + ITStatus bitstatus = RESET; + u32 tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DMA_GET_IT(DMA_IT)); + + /* Calculate the used DMA */ + if ((DMA_IT & FLAG_Mask) != (u32)RESET) + { + /* Get DMA2 ISR register value */ + tmpreg = DMA2->ISR ; + } + else + { + /* Get DMA1 ISR register value */ + tmpreg = DMA1->ISR ; + } + + /* Check the status of the specified DMA interrupt */ + if ((tmpreg & DMA_IT) != (u32)RESET) + { + /* DMA_IT is set */ + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* DMA_IT is reset */ + bitstatus = RESET; + } + /* Return the DMA_IT status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : DMA_ClearITPendingBit +* Description : Clears the DMAy Channelx’s interrupt pending bits. +* Input : - DMA_IT: specifies the DMA interrupt pending bit to clear. +* This parameter can be any combination (for the same DMA) of +* the following values: +* - DMA1_IT_GL1: DMA1 Channel1 global interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_TC1: DMA1 Channel1 transfer complete interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_HT1: DMA1 Channel1 half transfer interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_TE1: DMA1 Channel1 transfer error interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_GL2: DMA1 Channel2 global interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_TC2: DMA1 Channel2 transfer complete interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_HT2: DMA1 Channel2 half transfer interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_TE2: DMA1 Channel2 transfer error interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_GL3: DMA1 Channel3 global interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_TC3: DMA1 Channel3 transfer complete interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_HT3: DMA1 Channel3 half transfer interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_TE3: DMA1 Channel3 transfer error interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_GL4: DMA1 Channel4 global interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_TC4: DMA1 Channel4 transfer complete interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_HT4: DMA1 Channel4 half transfer interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_TE4: DMA1 Channel4 transfer error interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_GL5: DMA1 Channel5 global interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_TC5: DMA1 Channel5 transfer complete interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_HT5: DMA1 Channel5 half transfer interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_TE5: DMA1 Channel5 transfer error interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_GL6: DMA1 Channel6 global interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_TC6: DMA1 Channel6 transfer complete interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_HT6: DMA1 Channel6 half transfer interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_TE6: DMA1 Channel6 transfer error interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_GL7: DMA1 Channel7 global interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_TC7: DMA1 Channel7 transfer complete interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_HT7: DMA1 Channel7 half transfer interrupt. +* - DMA1_IT_TE7: DMA1 Channel7 transfer error interrupt. +* - DMA2_IT_GL1: DMA2 Channel1 global interrupt. +* - DMA2_IT_TC1: DMA2 Channel1 transfer complete interrupt. +* - DMA2_IT_HT1: DMA2 Channel1 half transfer interrupt. +* - DMA2_IT_TE1: DMA2 Channel1 transfer error interrupt. +* - DMA2_IT_GL2: DMA2 Channel2 global interrupt. +* - DMA2_IT_TC2: DMA2 Channel2 transfer complete interrupt. +* - DMA2_IT_HT2: DMA2 Channel2 half transfer interrupt. +* - DMA2_IT_TE2: DMA2 Channel2 transfer error interrupt. +* - DMA2_IT_GL3: DMA2 Channel3 global interrupt. +* - DMA2_IT_TC3: DMA2 Channel3 transfer complete interrupt. +* - DMA2_IT_HT3: DMA2 Channel3 half transfer interrupt. +* - DMA2_IT_TE3: DMA2 Channel3 transfer error interrupt. +* - DMA2_IT_GL4: DMA2 Channel4 global interrupt. +* - DMA2_IT_TC4: DMA2 Channel4 transfer complete interrupt. +* - DMA2_IT_HT4: DMA2 Channel4 half transfer interrupt. +* - DMA2_IT_TE4: DMA2 Channel4 transfer error interrupt. +* - DMA2_IT_GL5: DMA2 Channel5 global interrupt. +* - DMA2_IT_TC5: DMA2 Channel5 transfer complete interrupt. +* - DMA2_IT_HT5: DMA2 Channel5 half transfer interrupt. +* - DMA2_IT_TE5: DMA2 Channel5 transfer error interrupt. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void DMA_ClearITPendingBit(u32 DMA_IT) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DMA_CLEAR_IT(DMA_IT)); + + /* Calculate the used DMA */ + if ((DMA_IT & FLAG_Mask) != (u32)RESET) + { + /* Clear the selected DMA interrupt pending bits */ + DMA2->IFCR = DMA_IT; + } + else + { + /* Clear the selected DMA interrupt pending bits */ + DMA1->IFCR = DMA_IT; + } +} + +/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ + diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_exti.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_exti.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..021a051 --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_exti.c @@ -0,0 +1,219 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ******************** +* File Name : stm32f10x_exti.c +* Author : MCD Application Team +* Version : V2.0.2 +* Date : 07/11/2008 +* Description : This file provides all the EXTI firmware functions. +******************************************************************************** +* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS +* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME. +* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, +* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE +* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING +* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS. +*******************************************************************************/ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32f10x_exti.h" + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#define EXTI_LineNone ((u32)0x00000) /* No interrupt selected */ + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : EXTI_DeInit +* Description : Deinitializes the EXTI peripheral registers to their default +* reset values. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void EXTI_DeInit(void) +{ + EXTI->IMR = 0x00000000; + EXTI->EMR = 0x00000000; + EXTI->RTSR = 0x00000000; + EXTI->FTSR = 0x00000000; + EXTI->PR = 0x0007FFFF; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : EXTI_Init +* Description : Initializes the EXTI peripheral according to the specified +* parameters in the EXTI_InitStruct. +* Input : - EXTI_InitStruct: pointer to a EXTI_InitTypeDef structure +* that contains the configuration information for the EXTI +* peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void EXTI_Init(EXTI_InitTypeDef* EXTI_InitStruct) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_EXTI_MODE(EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Mode)); + assert_param(IS_EXTI_TRIGGER(EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Trigger)); + assert_param(IS_EXTI_LINE(EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_LineCmd)); + + if (EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_LineCmd != DISABLE) + { + /* Clear EXTI line configuration */ + EXTI->IMR &= ~EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line; + EXTI->EMR &= ~EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line; + + *(vu32 *)(EXTI_BASE + (u32)EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Mode)|= EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line; + + /* Clear Rising Falling edge configuration */ + EXTI->RTSR &= ~EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line; + EXTI->FTSR &= ~EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line; + + /* Select the trigger for the selected external interrupts */ + if (EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Trigger == EXTI_Trigger_Rising_Falling) + { + /* Rising Falling edge */ + EXTI->RTSR |= EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line; + EXTI->FTSR |= EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line; + } + else + { + *(vu32 *)(EXTI_BASE + (u32)EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Trigger)|= EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line; + } + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected external lines */ + *(vu32 *)(EXTI_BASE + (u32)EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Mode)&= ~EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : EXTI_StructInit +* Description : Fills each EXTI_InitStruct member with its reset value. +* Input : - EXTI_InitStruct: pointer to a EXTI_InitTypeDef structure +* which will be initialized. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void EXTI_StructInit(EXTI_InitTypeDef* EXTI_InitStruct) +{ + EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line = EXTI_LineNone; + EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Mode = EXTI_Mode_Interrupt; + EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Trigger = EXTI_Trigger_Falling; + EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_LineCmd = DISABLE; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : EXTI_GenerateSWInterrupt +* Description : Generates a Software interrupt. +* Input : - EXTI_Line: specifies the EXTI lines to be enabled or +* disabled. +* This parameter can be any combination of EXTI_Linex where +* x can be (0..18). +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void EXTI_GenerateSWInterrupt(u32 EXTI_Line) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_EXTI_LINE(EXTI_Line)); + + EXTI->SWIER |= EXTI_Line; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : EXTI_GetFlagStatus +* Description : Checks whether the specified EXTI line flag is set or not. +* Input : - EXTI_Line: specifies the EXTI line flag to check. +* This parameter can be: +* - EXTI_Linex: External interrupt line x where x(0..18) +* Output : None +* Return : The new state of EXTI_Line (SET or RESET). +*******************************************************************************/ +FlagStatus EXTI_GetFlagStatus(u32 EXTI_Line) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GET_EXTI_LINE(EXTI_Line)); + + if ((EXTI->PR & EXTI_Line) != (u32)RESET) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + return bitstatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : EXTI_ClearFlag +* Description : Clears the EXTI’s line pending flags. +* Input : - EXTI_Line: specifies the EXTI lines flags to clear. +* This parameter can be any combination of EXTI_Linex where +* x can be (0..18). +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void EXTI_ClearFlag(u32 EXTI_Line) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_EXTI_LINE(EXTI_Line)); + + EXTI->PR = EXTI_Line; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : EXTI_GetITStatus +* Description : Checks whether the specified EXTI line is asserted or not. +* Input : - EXTI_Line: specifies the EXTI line to check. +* This parameter can be: +* - EXTI_Linex: External interrupt line x where x(0..18) +* Output : None +* Return : The new state of EXTI_Line (SET or RESET). +*******************************************************************************/ +ITStatus EXTI_GetITStatus(u32 EXTI_Line) +{ + ITStatus bitstatus = RESET; + u32 enablestatus = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GET_EXTI_LINE(EXTI_Line)); + + enablestatus = EXTI->IMR & EXTI_Line; + + if (((EXTI->PR & EXTI_Line) != (u32)RESET) && (enablestatus != (u32)RESET)) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + return bitstatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : EXTI_ClearITPendingBit +* Description : Clears the EXTI’s line pending bits. +* Input : - EXTI_Line: specifies the EXTI lines to clear. +* This parameter can be any combination of EXTI_Linex where +* x can be (0..18). +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void EXTI_ClearITPendingBit(u32 EXTI_Line) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_EXTI_LINE(EXTI_Line)); + + EXTI->PR = EXTI_Line; +} + +/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_flash.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_flash.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..66952f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_flash.c @@ -0,0 +1,916 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ******************** +* File Name : stm32f10x_flash.c +* Author : MCD Application Team +* Version : V2.0.2 +* Date : 07/11/2008 +* Description : This file provides all the FLASH firmware functions. +******************************************************************************** +* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS +* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME. +* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, +* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE +* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING +* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS. +*******************************************************************************/ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32f10x_flash.h" +void test(u32 x) { + int y; + x = 1; + y = x; +} +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Flash Access Control Register bits */ +#define ACR_LATENCY_Mask ((u32)0x00000038) +#define ACR_HLFCYA_Mask ((u32)0xFFFFFFF7) +#define ACR_PRFTBE_Mask ((u32)0xFFFFFFEF) + +#ifdef _FLASH_PROG +/* Flash Access Control Register bits */ +#define ACR_PRFTBS_Mask ((u32)0x00000020) + +/* Flash Control Register bits */ +#define CR_PG_Set ((u32)0x00000001) +#define CR_PG_Reset ((u32)0x00001FFE) + +#define CR_PER_Set ((u32)0x00000002) +#define CR_PER_Reset ((u32)0x00001FFD) + +#define CR_MER_Set ((u32)0x00000004) +#define CR_MER_Reset ((u32)0x00001FFB) + +#define CR_OPTPG_Set ((u32)0x00000010) +#define CR_OPTPG_Reset ((u32)0x00001FEF) + +#define CR_OPTER_Set ((u32)0x00000020) +#define CR_OPTER_Reset ((u32)0x00001FDF) + +#define CR_STRT_Set ((u32)0x00000040) + +#define CR_LOCK_Set ((u32)0x00000080) + +/* FLASH Mask */ +#define RDPRT_Mask ((u32)0x00000002) +#define WRP0_Mask ((u32)0x000000FF) +#define WRP1_Mask ((u32)0x0000FF00) +#define WRP2_Mask ((u32)0x00FF0000) +#define WRP3_Mask ((u32)0xFF000000) + +/* FLASH Keys */ +#define RDP_Key ((u16)0x00A5) +#define FLASH_KEY1 ((u32)0x45670123) +#define FLASH_KEY2 ((u32)0xCDEF89AB) + +/* Delay definition */ +#define EraseTimeout ((u32)0x00000FFF) +#define ProgramTimeout ((u32)0x0000000F) +#endif + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +#ifdef _FLASH_PROG +static void delay(void); +#endif + +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FLASH_SetLatency +* Description : Sets the code latency value. +* Input : - FLASH_Latency: specifies the FLASH Latency value. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - FLASH_Latency_0: FLASH Zero Latency cycle +* - FLASH_Latency_1: FLASH One Latency cycle +* - FLASH_Latency_2: FLASH Two Latency cycles +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void FLASH_SetLatency(u32 FLASH_Latency) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FLASH_LATENCY(FLASH_Latency)); + + /* Sets the Latency value */ + FLASH->ACR &= ACR_LATENCY_Mask; + FLASH->ACR |= FLASH_Latency; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FLASH_HalfCycleAccessCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the Half cycle flash access. +* Input : - FLASH_HalfCycle: specifies the FLASH Half cycle Access mode. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - FLASH_HalfCycleAccess_Enable: FLASH Half Cycle Enable +* - FLASH_HalfCycleAccess_Disable: FLASH Half Cycle Disable +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void FLASH_HalfCycleAccessCmd(u32 FLASH_HalfCycleAccess) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FLASH_HALFCYCLEACCESS_STATE(FLASH_HalfCycleAccess)); + + /* Enable or disable the Half cycle access */ + FLASH->ACR &= ACR_HLFCYA_Mask; + FLASH->ACR |= FLASH_HalfCycleAccess; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FLASH_PrefetchBufferCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the Prefetch Buffer. +* Input : - FLASH_PrefetchBuffer: specifies the Prefetch buffer status. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - FLASH_PrefetchBuffer_Enable: FLASH Prefetch Buffer Enable +* - FLASH_PrefetchBuffer_Disable: FLASH Prefetch Buffer Disable +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ + +void FLASH_PrefetchBufferCmd(u32 FLASH_PrefetchBuffer) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FLASH_PREFETCHBUFFER_STATE(FLASH_PrefetchBuffer)); + + /* Enable or disable the Prefetch Buffer */ + FLASH->ACR &= ACR_PRFTBE_Mask; + FLASH->ACR |= FLASH_PrefetchBuffer; +} + +#ifdef _FLASH_PROG +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FLASH_Unlock +* Description : Unlocks the FLASH Program Erase Controller. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void FLASH_Unlock(void) +{ + /* Authorize the FPEC Access */ + FLASH->KEYR = FLASH_KEY1; + FLASH->KEYR = FLASH_KEY2; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FLASH_Lock +* Description : Locks the FLASH Program Erase Controller. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void FLASH_Lock(void) +{ + /* Set the Lock Bit to lock the FPEC and the FCR */ + FLASH->CR |= CR_LOCK_Set; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FLASH_ErasePage +* Description : Erases a specified FLASH page. +* Input : - Page_Address: The page address to be erased. +* Output : None +* Return : FLASH Status: The returned value can be: FLASH_BUSY, +* FLASH_ERROR_PG, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or +* FLASH_TIMEOUT. +*******************************************************************************/ +FLASH_Status FLASH_ErasePage(u32 Page_Address) +{ + FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FLASH_ADDRESS(Page_Address)); + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(EraseTimeout); + + if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE) + { + /* if the previous operation is completed, proceed to erase the page */ + FLASH->CR|= CR_PER_Set; + FLASH->AR = Page_Address; + FLASH->CR|= CR_STRT_Set; + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(EraseTimeout); + + if(status != FLASH_BUSY) + { + /* if the erase operation is completed, disable the PER Bit */ + FLASH->CR &= CR_PER_Reset; + } + } + /* Return the Erase Status */ + return status; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FLASH_EraseAllPages +* Description : Erases all FLASH pages. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : FLASH Status: The returned value can be: FLASH_BUSY, +* FLASH_ERROR_PG, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or +* FLASH_TIMEOUT. +*******************************************************************************/ +FLASH_Status FLASH_EraseAllPages(void) +{ + FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE; + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(EraseTimeout); + + if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE) + { + /* if the previous operation is completed, proceed to erase all pages */ + FLASH->CR |= CR_MER_Set; + FLASH->CR |= CR_STRT_Set; + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(EraseTimeout); + + if(status != FLASH_BUSY) + { + /* if the erase operation is completed, disable the MER Bit */ + FLASH->CR &= CR_MER_Reset; + } + } + /* Return the Erase Status */ + return status; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FLASH_EraseOptionBytes +* Description : Erases the FLASH option bytes. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : FLASH Status: The returned value can be: FLASH_BUSY, +* FLASH_ERROR_PG, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or +* FLASH_TIMEOUT. +*******************************************************************************/ +FLASH_Status FLASH_EraseOptionBytes(void) +{ + FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE; + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(EraseTimeout); + + if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE) + { + /* Authorize the small information block programming */ + FLASH->OPTKEYR = FLASH_KEY1; + FLASH->OPTKEYR = FLASH_KEY2; + + /* if the previous operation is completed, proceed to erase the option bytes */ + FLASH->CR |= CR_OPTER_Set; + FLASH->CR |= CR_STRT_Set; + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(EraseTimeout); + + if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE) + { + /* if the erase operation is completed, disable the OPTER Bit */ + FLASH->CR &= CR_OPTER_Reset; + + /* Enable the Option Bytes Programming operation */ + FLASH->CR |= CR_OPTPG_Set; + + /* Enable the readout access */ + OB->RDP= RDP_Key; + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(ProgramTimeout); + + if(status != FLASH_BUSY) + { + /* if the program operation is completed, disable the OPTPG Bit */ + FLASH->CR &= CR_OPTPG_Reset; + } + } + else + { + if (status != FLASH_BUSY) + { + /* Disable the OPTPG Bit */ + FLASH->CR &= CR_OPTPG_Reset; + } + } + } + /* Return the erase status */ + return status; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FLASH_ProgramWord +* Description : Programs a word at a specified address. +* Input : - Address: specifies the address to be programmed. +* - Data: specifies the data to be programmed. +* Output : None +* Return : FLASH Status: The returned value can be: FLASH_BUSY, +* FLASH_ERROR_PG, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or +* FLASH_TIMEOUT. +*******************************************************************************/ +FLASH_Status FLASH_ProgramWord(u32 Address, u32 Data) +{ + FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FLASH_ADDRESS(Address)); + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(ProgramTimeout); + + if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE) + { + /* if the previous operation is completed, proceed to program the new first + half word */ + FLASH->CR |= CR_PG_Set; + + *(vu16*)Address = (u16)Data; + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(ProgramTimeout); + + if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE) + { + /* if the previous operation is completed, proceed to program the new second + half word */ + *(vu16*)(Address + 2) = Data >> 16; + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(ProgramTimeout); + + if(status != FLASH_BUSY) + { + /* Disable the PG Bit */ + FLASH->CR &= CR_PG_Reset; + } + } + else + { + if (status != FLASH_BUSY) + { + /* Disable the PG Bit */ + FLASH->CR &= CR_PG_Reset; + } + } + } + /* Return the Program Status */ + return status; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FLASH_ProgramHalfWord +* Description : Programs a half word at a specified address. +* Input : - Address: specifies the address to be programmed. +* - Data: specifies the data to be programmed. +* Output : None +* Return : FLASH Status: The returned value can be: FLASH_BUSY, +* FLASH_ERROR_PG, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or +* FLASH_TIMEOUT. +*******************************************************************************/ +FLASH_Status FLASH_ProgramHalfWord(u32 Address, u16 Data) +{ + FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FLASH_ADDRESS(Address)); + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(ProgramTimeout); + + if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE) + { + /* if the previous operation is completed, proceed to program the new data */ + FLASH->CR |= CR_PG_Set; + + *(vu16*)Address = Data; + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(ProgramTimeout); + + if(status != FLASH_BUSY) + { + /* if the program operation is completed, disable the PG Bit */ + FLASH->CR &= CR_PG_Reset; + } + } + /* Return the Program Status */ + return status; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FLASH_ProgramOptionByteData +* Description : Programs a half word at a specified Option Byte Data address. +* Input : - Address: specifies the address to be programmed. +* This parameter can be 0x1FFFF804 or 0x1FFFF806. +* - Data: specifies the data to be programmed. +* Output : None +* Return : FLASH Status: The returned value can be: FLASH_BUSY, +* FLASH_ERROR_PG, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or +* FLASH_TIMEOUT. +*******************************************************************************/ +FLASH_Status FLASH_ProgramOptionByteData(u32 Address, u8 Data) +{ + FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_OB_DATA_ADDRESS(Address)); + + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(ProgramTimeout); + + if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE) + { + /* Authorize the small information block programming */ + FLASH->OPTKEYR = FLASH_KEY1; + FLASH->OPTKEYR = FLASH_KEY2; + + /* Enables the Option Bytes Programming operation */ + FLASH->CR |= CR_OPTPG_Set; + *(vu16*)Address = Data; + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(ProgramTimeout); + + if(status != FLASH_BUSY) + { + /* if the program operation is completed, disable the OPTPG Bit */ + FLASH->CR &= CR_OPTPG_Reset; + } + } + /* Return the Option Byte Data Program Status */ + return status; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FLASH_EnableWriteProtection +* Description : Write protects the desired pages +* Input : - FLASH_Pages: specifies the address of the pages to be +* write protected. This parameter can be: +* - For STM32F10Xxx Medium-density devices (FLASH page size equal to 1 KB) +* - A value between FLASH_WRProt_Pages0to3 and +* FLASH_WRProt_Pages124to127 +* - For STM32F10Xxx High-density devices (FLASH page size equal to 2 KB) +* - A value between FLASH_WRProt_Pages0to1 and +* FLASH_WRProt_Pages60to61 or FLASH_WRProt_Pages62to255 +* - FLASH_WRProt_AllPages +* Output : None +* Return : FLASH Status: The returned value can be: FLASH_BUSY, +* FLASH_ERROR_PG, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or +* FLASH_TIMEOUT. +*******************************************************************************/ +FLASH_Status FLASH_EnableWriteProtection(u32 FLASH_Pages) +{ + u16 WRP0_Data = 0xFFFF, WRP1_Data = 0xFFFF, WRP2_Data = 0xFFFF, WRP3_Data = 0xFFFF; + + FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FLASH_WRPROT_PAGE(FLASH_Pages)); + + FLASH_Pages = (u32)(~FLASH_Pages); + WRP0_Data = (vu16)(FLASH_Pages & WRP0_Mask); + WRP1_Data = (vu16)((FLASH_Pages & WRP1_Mask) >> 8); + WRP2_Data = (vu16)((FLASH_Pages & WRP2_Mask) >> 16); + WRP3_Data = (vu16)((FLASH_Pages & WRP3_Mask) >> 24); + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(ProgramTimeout); + + if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE) + { + /* Authorizes the small information block programming */ + FLASH->OPTKEYR = FLASH_KEY1; + FLASH->OPTKEYR = FLASH_KEY2; + FLASH->CR |= CR_OPTPG_Set; + + if(WRP0_Data != 0xFF) + { + OB->WRP0 = WRP0_Data; + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(ProgramTimeout); + } + if((status == FLASH_COMPLETE) && (WRP1_Data != 0xFF)) + { + OB->WRP1 = WRP1_Data; + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(ProgramTimeout); + } + + if((status == FLASH_COMPLETE) && (WRP2_Data != 0xFF)) + { + OB->WRP2 = WRP2_Data; + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(ProgramTimeout); + } + + if((status == FLASH_COMPLETE)&& (WRP3_Data != 0xFF)) + { + OB->WRP3 = WRP3_Data; + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(ProgramTimeout); + } + + if(status != FLASH_BUSY) + { + /* if the program operation is completed, disable the OPTPG Bit */ + FLASH->CR &= CR_OPTPG_Reset; + } + } + /* Return the write protection operation Status */ + return status; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FLASH_ReadOutProtection +* Description : Enables or disables the read out protection. +* If the user has already programmed the other option bytes before +* calling this function, he must re-program them since this +* function erases all option bytes. +* Input : - Newstate: new state of the ReadOut Protection. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : FLASH Status: The returned value can be: FLASH_BUSY, +* FLASH_ERROR_PG, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or +* FLASH_TIMEOUT. +*******************************************************************************/ +FLASH_Status FLASH_ReadOutProtection(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(EraseTimeout); + + if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE) + { + /* Authorizes the small information block programming */ + FLASH->OPTKEYR = FLASH_KEY1; + FLASH->OPTKEYR = FLASH_KEY2; + + FLASH->CR |= CR_OPTER_Set; + FLASH->CR |= CR_STRT_Set; + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(EraseTimeout); + + if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE) + { + /* if the erase operation is completed, disable the OPTER Bit */ + FLASH->CR &= CR_OPTER_Reset; + + /* Enable the Option Bytes Programming operation */ + FLASH->CR |= CR_OPTPG_Set; + + if(NewState != DISABLE) + { + OB->RDP = 0x00; + } + else + { + OB->RDP = RDP_Key; + } + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(EraseTimeout); + + if(status != FLASH_BUSY) + { + /* if the program operation is completed, disable the OPTPG Bit */ + FLASH->CR &= CR_OPTPG_Reset; + } + } + else + { + if(status != FLASH_BUSY) + { + /* Disable the OPTER Bit */ + FLASH->CR &= CR_OPTER_Reset; + } + } + } + /* Return the protection operation Status */ + return status; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FLASH_UserOptionByteConfig +* Description : Programs the FLASH User Option Byte: IWDG_SW / RST_STOP / +* RST_STDBY. +* Input : - OB_IWDG: Selects the IWDG mode +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - OB_IWDG_SW: Software IWDG selected +* - OB_IWDG_HW: Hardware IWDG selected +* - OB_STOP: Reset event when entering STOP mode. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - OB_STOP_NoRST: No reset generated when entering in STOP +* - OB_STOP_RST: Reset generated when entering in STOP +* - OB_STDBY: Reset event when entering Standby mode. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - OB_STDBY_NoRST: No reset generated when entering in STANDBY +* - OB_STDBY_RST: Reset generated when entering in STANDBY +* Output : None +* Return : FLASH Status: The returned value can be: FLASH_BUSY, +* FLASH_ERROR_PG, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or +* FLASH_TIMEOUT. +*******************************************************************************/ +FLASH_Status FLASH_UserOptionByteConfig(u16 OB_IWDG, u16 OB_STOP, u16 OB_STDBY) +{ + FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_OB_IWDG_SOURCE(OB_IWDG)); + assert_param(IS_OB_STOP_SOURCE(OB_STOP)); + assert_param(IS_OB_STDBY_SOURCE(OB_STDBY)); + + /* Authorize the small information block programming */ + FLASH->OPTKEYR = FLASH_KEY1; + FLASH->OPTKEYR = FLASH_KEY2; + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(ProgramTimeout); + + if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE) + { + /* Enable the Option Bytes Programming operation */ + FLASH->CR |= CR_OPTPG_Set; + + OB->USER = ( OB_IWDG | OB_STOP |OB_STDBY) | (u16)0xF8; + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(ProgramTimeout); + + if(status != FLASH_BUSY) + { + /* if the program operation is completed, disable the OPTPG Bit */ + FLASH->CR &= CR_OPTPG_Reset; + } + } + /* Return the Option Byte program Status */ + return status; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FLASH_GetUserOptionByte +* Description : Returns the FLASH User Option Bytes values. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : The FLASH User Option Bytes values:IWDG_SW(Bit0), RST_STOP(Bit1) +* and RST_STDBY(Bit2). +*******************************************************************************/ +u32 FLASH_GetUserOptionByte(void) +{ + /* Return the User Option Byte */ + return (u32)(FLASH->OBR >> 2); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FLASH_GetWriteProtectionOptionByte +* Description : Returns the FLASH Write Protection Option Bytes Register value. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : The FLASH Write Protection Option Bytes Register value +*******************************************************************************/ +u32 FLASH_GetWriteProtectionOptionByte(void) +{ + /* Return the Falsh write protection Register value */ + return (u32)(FLASH->WRPR); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FLASH_GetReadOutProtectionStatus +* Description : Checks whether the FLASH Read Out Protection Status is set +* or not. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : FLASH ReadOut Protection Status(SET or RESET) +*******************************************************************************/ +FlagStatus FLASH_GetReadOutProtectionStatus(void) +{ + FlagStatus readoutstatus = RESET; + + if ((FLASH->OBR & RDPRT_Mask) != (u32)RESET) + { + readoutstatus = SET; + } + else + { + readoutstatus = RESET; + } + return readoutstatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FLASH_GetPrefetchBufferStatus +* Description : Checks whether the FLASH Prefetch Buffer status is set or not. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : FLASH Prefetch Buffer Status (SET or RESET). +*******************************************************************************/ +FlagStatus FLASH_GetPrefetchBufferStatus(void) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + + if ((FLASH->ACR & ACR_PRFTBS_Mask) != (u32)RESET) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + /* Return the new state of FLASH Prefetch Buffer Status (SET or RESET) */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FLASH_ITConfig +* Description : Enables or disables the specified FLASH interrupts. +* Input : - FLASH_IT: specifies the FLASH interrupt sources to be +* enabled or disabled. +* This parameter can be any combination of the following values: +* - FLASH_IT_ERROR: FLASH Error Interrupt +* - FLASH_IT_EOP: FLASH end of operation Interrupt +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void FLASH_ITConfig(u16 FLASH_IT, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FLASH_IT(FLASH_IT)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if(NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the interrupt sources */ + FLASH->CR |= FLASH_IT; + } + else + { + /* Disable the interrupt sources */ + FLASH->CR &= ~(u32)FLASH_IT; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FLASH_GetFlagStatus +* Description : Checks whether the specified FLASH flag is set or not. +* Input : - FLASH_FLAG: specifies the FLASH flag to check. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - FLASH_FLAG_BSY: FLASH Busy flag +* - FLASH_FLAG_PGERR: FLASH Program error flag +* - FLASH_FLAG_WRPRTERR: FLASH Write protected error flag +* - FLASH_FLAG_EOP: FLASH End of Operation flag +* - FLASH_FLAG_OPTERR: FLASH Option Byte error flag +* Output : None +* Return : The new state of FLASH_FLAG (SET or RESET). +*******************************************************************************/ +FlagStatus FLASH_GetFlagStatus(u16 FLASH_FLAG) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG)) ; + + if(FLASH_FLAG == FLASH_FLAG_OPTERR) + { + if((FLASH->OBR & FLASH_FLAG_OPTERR) != (u32)RESET) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + } + else + { + if((FLASH->SR & FLASH_FLAG) != (u32)RESET) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + } + /* Return the new state of FLASH_FLAG (SET or RESET) */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FLASH_ClearFlag +* Description : Clears the FLASH’s pending flags. +* Input : - FLASH_FLAG: specifies the FLASH flags to clear. +* This parameter can be any combination of the following values: +* - FLASH_FLAG_BSY: FLASH Busy flag +* - FLASH_FLAG_PGERR: FLASH Program error flag +* - FLASH_FLAG_WRPRTERR: FLASH Write protected error flag +* - FLASH_FLAG_EOP: FLASH End of Operation flag +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void FLASH_ClearFlag(u16 FLASH_FLAG) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FLASH_CLEAR_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG)) ; + + /* Clear the flags */ + FLASH->SR = FLASH_FLAG; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FLASH_GetStatus +* Description : Returns the FLASH Status. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : FLASH Status: The returned value can be: FLASH_BUSY, +* FLASH_ERROR_PG, FLASH_ERROR_WRP or FLASH_COMPLETE +*******************************************************************************/ +FLASH_Status FLASH_GetStatus(void) +{ + FLASH_Status flashstatus = FLASH_COMPLETE; + + if((FLASH->SR & FLASH_FLAG_BSY) == FLASH_FLAG_BSY) + { + flashstatus = FLASH_BUSY; + } + else + { + if(FLASH->SR & FLASH_FLAG_PGERR) + { + flashstatus = FLASH_ERROR_PG; + } + else + { + if(FLASH->SR & FLASH_FLAG_WRPRTERR) + { + flashstatus = FLASH_ERROR_WRP; + } + else + { + flashstatus = FLASH_COMPLETE; + } + } + } + /* Return the Flash Status */ + return flashstatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FLASH_WaitForLastOperation +* Description : Waits for a Flash operation to complete or a TIMEOUT to occur. +* Input : - Timeout: FLASH progamming Timeout +* Output : None +* Return : FLASH Status: The returned value can be: FLASH_BUSY, +* FLASH_ERROR_PG, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or +* FLASH_TIMEOUT. +*******************************************************************************/ +FLASH_Status FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(u32 Timeout) +{ + FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE; + + /* Check for the Flash Status */ + status = FLASH_GetStatus(); + + /* Wait for a Flash operation to complete or a TIMEOUT to occur */ + while((status == FLASH_BUSY) && (Timeout != 0x00)) + { + delay(); + status = FLASH_GetStatus(); + Timeout--; + } + + if(Timeout == 0x00 ) + { + status = FLASH_TIMEOUT; + } + + /* Return the operation status */ + return status; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : delay +* Description : Inserts a time delay. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +static void delay(void) +{ + vu32 i = 0; + + for(i = 0xFF; i != 0; i--) + { + } +} +#endif + +/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_fsmc.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_fsmc.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4068a7f --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_fsmc.c @@ -0,0 +1,861 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ******************** +* File Name : stm32f10x_fsmc.c +* Author : MCD Application Team +* Version : V2.0.2 +* Date : 07/11/2008 +* Description : This file provides all the FSMC firmware functions. +******************************************************************************** +* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS +* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME. +* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, +* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE +* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING +* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS. +*******************************************************************************/ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32f10x_fsmc.h" +#include "stm32f10x_rcc.h" + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* --------------------- FSMC registers bit mask ---------------------------- */ +/* FSMC BCRx Mask */ +#define BCR_MBKEN_Set ((u32)0x00000001) +#define BCR_MBKEN_Reset ((u32)0x000FFFFE) +#define BCR_FACCEN_Set ((u32)0x00000040) + +/* FSMC PCRx Mask */ +#define PCR_PBKEN_Set ((u32)0x00000004) +#define PCR_PBKEN_Reset ((u32)0x000FFFFB) +#define PCR_ECCEN_Set ((u32)0x00000040) +#define PCR_ECCEN_Reset ((u32)0x000FFFBF) +#define PCR_MemoryType_NAND ((u32)0x00000008) + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FSMC_NORSRAMDeInit +* Description : Deinitializes the FSMC NOR/SRAM Banks registers to their default +* reset values. +* Input : - FSMC_Bank: specifies the FSMC Bank to be used +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM1: FSMC Bank1 NOR/SRAM1 +* - FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM2: FSMC Bank1 NOR/SRAM2 +* - FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM3: FSMC Bank1 NOR/SRAM3 +* - FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM4: FSMC Bank1 NOR/SRAM4 +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void FSMC_NORSRAMDeInit(u32 FSMC_Bank) +{ + /* Check the parameter */ + assert_param(IS_FSMC_NORSRAM_BANK(FSMC_Bank)); + + /* FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM1 */ + if(FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM1) + { + FSMC_Bank1->BTCR[FSMC_Bank] = 0x000030DB; + } + /* FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM2, FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM3 or FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM4 */ + else + { + FSMC_Bank1->BTCR[FSMC_Bank] = 0x000030D2; + } + + FSMC_Bank1->BTCR[FSMC_Bank + 1] = 0x0FFFFFFF; + FSMC_Bank1E->BWTR[FSMC_Bank] = 0x0FFFFFFF; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FSMC_NANDDeInit +* Description : Deinitializes the FSMC NAND Banks registers to their default +* reset values. +* Input : - FSMC_Bank: specifies the FSMC Bank to be used +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - FSMC_Bank2_NAND: FSMC Bank2 NAND +* - FSMC_Bank3_NAND: FSMC Bank3 NAND +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void FSMC_NANDDeInit(u32 FSMC_Bank) +{ + /* Check the parameter */ + assert_param(IS_FSMC_NAND_BANK(FSMC_Bank)); + + if(FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank2_NAND) + { + /* Set the FSMC_Bank2 registers to their reset values */ + FSMC_Bank2->PCR2 = 0x00000018; + FSMC_Bank2->SR2 = 0x00000040; + FSMC_Bank2->PMEM2 = 0xFCFCFCFC; + FSMC_Bank2->PATT2 = 0xFCFCFCFC; + } + /* FSMC_Bank3_NAND */ + else + { + /* Set the FSMC_Bank3 registers to their reset values */ + FSMC_Bank3->PCR3 = 0x00000018; + FSMC_Bank3->SR3 = 0x00000040; + FSMC_Bank3->PMEM3 = 0xFCFCFCFC; + FSMC_Bank3->PATT3 = 0xFCFCFCFC; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FSMC_PCCARDDeInit +* Description : Deinitializes the FSMC PCCARD Bank registers to their default +* reset values. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void FSMC_PCCARDDeInit(void) +{ + /* Set the FSMC_Bank4 registers to their reset values */ + FSMC_Bank4->PCR4 = 0x00000018; + FSMC_Bank4->SR4 = 0x00000000; + FSMC_Bank4->PMEM4 = 0xFCFCFCFC; + FSMC_Bank4->PATT4 = 0xFCFCFCFC; + FSMC_Bank4->PIO4 = 0xFCFCFCFC; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FSMC_NORSRAMInit +* Description : Initializes the FSMC NOR/SRAM Banks according to the +* specified parameters in the FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct. +* Input : - FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct : pointer to a FSMC_NORSRAMInitTypeDef +* structure that contains the configuration information for +* the FSMC NOR/SRAM specified Banks. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void FSMC_NORSRAMInit(FSMC_NORSRAMInitTypeDef* FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FSMC_NORSRAM_BANK(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_Bank)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_MUX(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_DataAddressMux)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_MEMORY(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_MemoryType)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_MEMORY_WIDTH(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_MemoryDataWidth)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_BURSTMODE(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_BurstAccessMode)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_WAIT_POLARITY(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WaitSignalPolarity)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_WRAP_MODE(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WrapMode)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_WAIT_SIGNAL_ACTIVE(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WaitSignalActive)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_WRITE_OPERATION(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteOperation)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_WAITE_SIGNAL(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WaitSignal)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_EXTENDED_MODE(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ExtendedMode)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_ASYNC_WAIT(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_AsyncWait)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_WRITE_BURST(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteBurst)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_ADDRESS_SETUP_TIME(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AddressSetupTime)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_ADDRESS_HOLD_TIME(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AddressHoldTime)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_DATASETUP_TIME(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_DataSetupTime)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_TURNAROUND_TIME(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_BusTurnAroundDuration)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_CLK_DIV(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_CLKDivision)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_DATA_LATENCY(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_DataLatency)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_ACCESS_MODE(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AccessMode)); + + /* Bank1 NOR/SRAM control register configuration */ + FSMC_Bank1->BTCR[FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_Bank] = + (u32)FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_DataAddressMux | + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_MemoryType | + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_MemoryDataWidth | + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_BurstAccessMode | + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WaitSignalPolarity | + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WrapMode | + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WaitSignalActive | + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteOperation | + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WaitSignal | + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ExtendedMode | + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_AsyncWait | + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteBurst; + + if(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_MemoryType == FSMC_MemoryType_NOR) + { + FSMC_Bank1->BTCR[FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_Bank] |= (u32)BCR_FACCEN_Set; + } + + /* Bank1 NOR/SRAM timing register configuration */ + FSMC_Bank1->BTCR[FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_Bank+1] = + (u32)FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AddressSetupTime | + (FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AddressHoldTime << 4) | + (FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_DataSetupTime << 8) | + (FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_BusTurnAroundDuration << 16) | + (FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_CLKDivision << 20) | + (FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_DataLatency << 24) | + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AccessMode; + + + + /* Bank1 NOR/SRAM timing register for write configuration, if extended mode is used */ + if(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ExtendedMode == FSMC_ExtendedMode_Enable) + { + assert_param(IS_FSMC_ADDRESS_SETUP_TIME(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AddressSetupTime)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_ADDRESS_HOLD_TIME(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AddressHoldTime)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_DATASETUP_TIME(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_DataSetupTime)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_TURNAROUND_TIME(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_BusTurnAroundDuration)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_CLK_DIV(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_CLKDivision)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_DATA_LATENCY(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_DataLatency)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_ACCESS_MODE(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AccessMode)); + + FSMC_Bank1E->BWTR[FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_Bank] = + (u32)FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AddressSetupTime | + (FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AddressHoldTime << 4 )| + (FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_DataSetupTime << 8) | + (FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_BusTurnAroundDuration << 16) | + (FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_CLKDivision << 20) | + (FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_DataLatency << 24) | + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AccessMode; + } + else + { + FSMC_Bank1E->BWTR[FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_Bank] = 0x0FFFFFFF; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FSMC_NANDInit +* Description : Initializes the FSMC NAND Banks according to the specified +* parameters in the FSMC_NANDInitStruct. +* Input : - FSMC_NANDInitStruct : pointer to a FSMC_NANDInitTypeDef +* structure that contains the configuration information for +* the FSMC NAND specified Banks. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void FSMC_NANDInit(FSMC_NANDInitTypeDef* FSMC_NANDInitStruct) +{ + u32 tmppcr = 0x00000000, tmppmem = 0x00000000, tmppatt = 0x00000000; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param( IS_FSMC_NAND_BANK(FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_Bank)); + assert_param( IS_FSMC_WAIT_FEATURE(FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_Waitfeature)); + assert_param( IS_FSMC_DATA_WIDTH(FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_MemoryDataWidth)); + assert_param( IS_FSMC_ECC_STATE(FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_ECC)); + assert_param( IS_FSMC_ECCPAGE_SIZE(FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_ECCPageSize)); + assert_param( IS_FSMC_ADDRESS_LOW_MAPPING(FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_AddressLowMapping)); + assert_param( IS_FSMC_TCLR_TIME(FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_TCLRSetupTime)); + assert_param( IS_FSMC_TAR_TIME(FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_TARSetupTime)); + + assert_param(IS_FSMC_SETUP_TIME(FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_SetupTime)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_WAIT_TIME(FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_WaitSetupTime)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_HOLD_TIME(FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HoldSetupTime)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_HIZ_TIME(FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HiZSetupTime)); + + assert_param(IS_FSMC_SETUP_TIME(FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_SetupTime)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_WAIT_TIME(FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_WaitSetupTime)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_HOLD_TIME(FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HoldSetupTime)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_HIZ_TIME(FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HiZSetupTime)); + + /* Set the tmppcr value according to FSMC_NANDInitStruct parameters */ + tmppcr = (u32)FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_Waitfeature | + PCR_MemoryType_NAND | + FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_MemoryDataWidth | + FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_ECC | + FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_ECCPageSize | + FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_AddressLowMapping | + (FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_TCLRSetupTime << 9 )| + (FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_TARSetupTime << 13); + + /* Set tmppmem value according to FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStructure parameters */ + tmppmem = (u32)FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_SetupTime | + (FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_WaitSetupTime << 8) | + (FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HoldSetupTime << 16)| + (FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HiZSetupTime << 24); + + /* Set tmppatt value according to FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStructure parameters */ + tmppatt = (u32)FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_SetupTime | + (FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_WaitSetupTime << 8) | + (FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HoldSetupTime << 16)| + (FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HiZSetupTime << 24); + + if(FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank2_NAND) + { + /* FSMC_Bank2_NAND registers configuration */ + FSMC_Bank2->PCR2 = tmppcr; + FSMC_Bank2->PMEM2 = tmppmem; + FSMC_Bank2->PATT2 = tmppatt; + } + else + { + /* FSMC_Bank3_NAND registers configuration */ + FSMC_Bank3->PCR3 = tmppcr; + FSMC_Bank3->PMEM3 = tmppmem; + FSMC_Bank3->PATT3 = tmppatt; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FSMC_PCCARDInit +* Description : Initializes the FSMC PCCARD Bank according to the specified +* parameters in the FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct. +* Input : - FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct : pointer to a FSMC_PCCARDInitTypeDef +* structure that contains the configuration information for +* the FSMC PCCARD Bank. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void FSMC_PCCARDInit(FSMC_PCCARDInitTypeDef* FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FSMC_WAIT_FEATURE(FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_Waitfeature)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_ADDRESS_LOW_MAPPING(FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_AddressLowMapping)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_TCLR_TIME(FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_TCLRSetupTime)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_TAR_TIME(FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_TARSetupTime)); + + + assert_param(IS_FSMC_SETUP_TIME(FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_SetupTime)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_WAIT_TIME(FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_WaitSetupTime)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_HOLD_TIME(FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HoldSetupTime)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_HIZ_TIME(FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HiZSetupTime)); + + assert_param(IS_FSMC_SETUP_TIME(FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_SetupTime)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_WAIT_TIME(FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_WaitSetupTime)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_HOLD_TIME(FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HoldSetupTime)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_HIZ_TIME(FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HiZSetupTime)); + + assert_param(IS_FSMC_SETUP_TIME(FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_IOSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_SetupTime)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_WAIT_TIME(FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_IOSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_WaitSetupTime)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_HOLD_TIME(FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_IOSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HoldSetupTime)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_HIZ_TIME(FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_IOSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HiZSetupTime)); + + /* Set the PCR4 register value according to FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct parameters */ + FSMC_Bank4->PCR4 = (u32)FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_Waitfeature | + FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_AddressLowMapping | + (FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_TCLRSetupTime << 9) | + (FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_TARSetupTime << 13); + + /* Set PMEM4 register value according to FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStructure parameters */ + FSMC_Bank4->PMEM4 = (u32)FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_SetupTime | + (FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_WaitSetupTime << 8) | + (FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HoldSetupTime << 16)| + (FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HiZSetupTime << 24); + + /* Set PATT4 register value according to FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStructure parameters */ + FSMC_Bank4->PATT4 = (u32)FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_SetupTime | + (FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_WaitSetupTime << 8) | + (FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HoldSetupTime << 16)| + (FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HiZSetupTime << 24); + + /* Set PIO4 register value according to FSMC_IOSpaceTimingStructure parameters */ + FSMC_Bank4->PIO4 = (u32)FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_IOSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_SetupTime | + (FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_IOSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_WaitSetupTime << 8) | + (FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_IOSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HoldSetupTime << 16)| + (FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_IOSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HiZSetupTime << 24); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FSMC_NORSRAMStructInit +* Description : Fills each FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct member with its default value. +* Input : - FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct: pointer to a FSMC_NORSRAMInitTypeDef +* structure which will be initialized. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void FSMC_NORSRAMStructInit(FSMC_NORSRAMInitTypeDef* FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct) +{ + /* Reset NOR/SRAM Init structure parameters values */ + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_Bank = FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM1; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_DataAddressMux = FSMC_DataAddressMux_Enable; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_MemoryType = FSMC_MemoryType_SRAM; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_MemoryDataWidth = FSMC_MemoryDataWidth_8b; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_BurstAccessMode = FSMC_BurstAccessMode_Disable; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WaitSignalPolarity = FSMC_WaitSignalPolarity_Low; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WrapMode = FSMC_WrapMode_Disable; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WaitSignalActive = FSMC_WaitSignalActive_BeforeWaitState; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteOperation = FSMC_WriteOperation_Enable; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WaitSignal = FSMC_WaitSignal_Enable; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ExtendedMode = FSMC_ExtendedMode_Disable; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_AsyncWait = FSMC_AsyncWait_Disable; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteBurst = FSMC_WriteBurst_Disable; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AddressSetupTime = 0xF; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AddressHoldTime = 0xF; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_DataSetupTime = 0xFF; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_BusTurnAroundDuration = 0xF; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_CLKDivision = 0xF; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_DataLatency = 0xF; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AccessMode = FSMC_AccessMode_A; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AddressSetupTime = 0xF; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AddressHoldTime = 0xF; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_DataSetupTime = 0xFF; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_BusTurnAroundDuration = 0xF; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_CLKDivision = 0xF; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_DataLatency = 0xF; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AccessMode = FSMC_AccessMode_A; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FSMC_NANDStructInit +* Description : Fills each FSMC_NANDInitStruct member with its default value. +* Input : - FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct: pointer to a FSMC_NANDInitTypeDef +* structure which will be initialized. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void FSMC_NANDStructInit(FSMC_NANDInitTypeDef* FSMC_NANDInitStruct) +{ + /* Reset NAND Init structure parameters values */ + FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_Bank = FSMC_Bank2_NAND; + FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_Waitfeature = FSMC_Waitfeature_Disable; + FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_MemoryDataWidth = FSMC_MemoryDataWidth_8b; + FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_ECC = FSMC_ECC_Disable; + FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_ECCPageSize = FSMC_ECCPageSize_256Bytes; + FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_AddressLowMapping = FSMC_AddressLowMapping_Direct; + FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_TCLRSetupTime = 0x0; + FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_TARSetupTime = 0x0; + FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_SetupTime = 0xFC; + FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_WaitSetupTime = 0xFC; + FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HoldSetupTime = 0xFC; + FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HiZSetupTime = 0xFC; + FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_SetupTime = 0xFC; + FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_WaitSetupTime = 0xFC; + FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HoldSetupTime = 0xFC; + FSMC_NANDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HiZSetupTime = 0xFC; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FSMC_PCCARDStructInit +* Description : Fills each FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct member with its default value. +* Input : - FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct: pointer to a FSMC_PCCARDInitTypeDef +* structure which will be initialized. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void FSMC_PCCARDStructInit(FSMC_PCCARDInitTypeDef* FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct) +{ + /* Reset PCCARD Init structure parameters values */ + FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_Waitfeature = FSMC_Waitfeature_Disable; + FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_AddressLowMapping = FSMC_AddressLowMapping_Direct; + FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_TCLRSetupTime = 0x0; + FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_TARSetupTime = 0x0; + FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_SetupTime = 0xFC; + FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_WaitSetupTime = 0xFC; + FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HoldSetupTime = 0xFC; + FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_CommonSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HiZSetupTime = 0xFC; + FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_SetupTime = 0xFC; + FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_WaitSetupTime = 0xFC; + FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HoldSetupTime = 0xFC; + FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_AttributeSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HiZSetupTime = 0xFC; + FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_IOSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_SetupTime = 0xFC; + FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_IOSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_WaitSetupTime = 0xFC; + FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_IOSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HoldSetupTime = 0xFC; + FSMC_PCCARDInitStruct->FSMC_IOSpaceTimingStruct->FSMC_HiZSetupTime = 0xFC; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FSMC_NORSRAMCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the specified NOR/SRAM Memory Bank. +* Input : - FSMC_Bank: specifies the FSMC Bank to be used +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM1: FSMC Bank1 NOR/SRAM1 +* - FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM2: FSMC Bank1 NOR/SRAM2 +* - FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM3: FSMC Bank1 NOR/SRAM3 +* - FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM4: FSMC Bank1 NOR/SRAM4 +* : - NewState: new state of the FSMC_Bank. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void FSMC_NORSRAMCmd(u32 FSMC_Bank, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + assert_param(IS_FSMC_NORSRAM_BANK(FSMC_Bank)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected NOR/SRAM Bank by setting the PBKEN bit in the BCRx register */ + FSMC_Bank1->BTCR[FSMC_Bank] |= BCR_MBKEN_Set; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected NOR/SRAM Bank by clearing the PBKEN bit in the BCRx register */ + FSMC_Bank1->BTCR[FSMC_Bank] &= BCR_MBKEN_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FSMC_NANDCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the specified NAND Memory Bank. +* Input : - FSMC_Bank: specifies the FSMC Bank to be used +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - FSMC_Bank2_NAND: FSMC Bank2 NAND +* - FSMC_Bank3_NAND: FSMC Bank3 NAND +* : - NewState: new state of the FSMC_Bank. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void FSMC_NANDCmd(u32 FSMC_Bank, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + assert_param(IS_FSMC_NAND_BANK(FSMC_Bank)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected NAND Bank by setting the PBKEN bit in the PCRx register */ + if(FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank2_NAND) + { + FSMC_Bank2->PCR2 |= PCR_PBKEN_Set; + } + else + { + FSMC_Bank3->PCR3 |= PCR_PBKEN_Set; + } + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected NAND Bank by clearing the PBKEN bit in the PCRx register */ + if(FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank2_NAND) + { + FSMC_Bank2->PCR2 &= PCR_PBKEN_Reset; + } + else + { + FSMC_Bank3->PCR3 &= PCR_PBKEN_Reset; + } + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FSMC_PCCARDCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the PCCARD Memory Bank. +* Input : - NewState: new state of the PCCARD Memory Bank. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void FSMC_PCCARDCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the PCCARD Bank by setting the PBKEN bit in the PCR4 register */ + FSMC_Bank4->PCR4 |= PCR_PBKEN_Set; + } + else + { + /* Disable the PCCARD Bank by clearing the PBKEN bit in the PCR4 register */ + FSMC_Bank4->PCR4 &= PCR_PBKEN_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FSMC_NANDECCCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the FSMC NAND ECC feature. +* Input : - FSMC_Bank: specifies the FSMC Bank to be used +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - FSMC_Bank2_NAND: FSMC Bank2 NAND +* - FSMC_Bank3_NAND: FSMC Bank3 NAND +* : - NewState: new state of the FSMC NAND ECC feature. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void FSMC_NANDECCCmd(u32 FSMC_Bank, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + assert_param(IS_FSMC_NAND_BANK(FSMC_Bank)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected NAND Bank ECC function by setting the ECCEN bit in the PCRx register */ + if(FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank2_NAND) + { + FSMC_Bank2->PCR2 |= PCR_ECCEN_Set; + } + else + { + FSMC_Bank3->PCR3 |= PCR_ECCEN_Set; + } + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected NAND Bank ECC function by clearing the ECCEN bit in the PCRx register */ + if(FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank2_NAND) + { + FSMC_Bank2->PCR2 &= PCR_ECCEN_Reset; + } + else + { + FSMC_Bank3->PCR3 &= PCR_ECCEN_Reset; + } + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FSMC_GetECC +* Description : Returns the error correction code register value. +* Input : - FSMC_Bank: specifies the FSMC Bank to be used +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - FSMC_Bank2_NAND: FSMC Bank2 NAND +* - FSMC_Bank3_NAND: FSMC Bank3 NAND +* Output : None +* Return : The Error Correction Code (ECC) value. +*******************************************************************************/ +u32 FSMC_GetECC(u32 FSMC_Bank) +{ + u32 eccval = 0x00000000; + + if(FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank2_NAND) + { + /* Get the ECCR2 register value */ + eccval = FSMC_Bank2->ECCR2; + } + else + { + /* Get the ECCR3 register value */ + eccval = FSMC_Bank3->ECCR3; + } + /* Return the error correction code value */ + return(eccval); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FSMC_ITConfig +* Description : Enables or disables the specified FSMC interrupts. +* Input : - FSMC_Bank: specifies the FSMC Bank to be used +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - FSMC_Bank2_NAND: FSMC Bank2 NAND +* - FSMC_Bank3_NAND: FSMC Bank3 NAND +* - FSMC_Bank4_PCCARD: FSMC Bank4 PCCARD +* - FSMC_IT: specifies the FSMC interrupt sources to be +* enabled or disabled. +* This parameter can be any combination of the following values: +* - FSMC_IT_RisingEdge: Rising edge detection interrupt. +* - FSMC_IT_Level: Level edge detection interrupt. +* - FSMC_IT_FallingEdge: Falling edge detection interrupt. +* - NewState: new state of the specified FSMC interrupts. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void FSMC_ITConfig(u32 FSMC_Bank, u32 FSMC_IT, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + assert_param(IS_FSMC_IT_BANK(FSMC_Bank)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_IT(FSMC_IT)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected FSMC_Bank2 interrupts */ + if(FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank2_NAND) + { + FSMC_Bank2->SR2 |= FSMC_IT; + } + /* Enable the selected FSMC_Bank3 interrupts */ + else if (FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank3_NAND) + { + FSMC_Bank3->SR3 |= FSMC_IT; + } + /* Enable the selected FSMC_Bank4 interrupts */ + else + { + FSMC_Bank4->SR4 |= FSMC_IT; + } + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected FSMC_Bank2 interrupts */ + if(FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank2_NAND) + { + + FSMC_Bank2->SR2 &= (u32)~FSMC_IT; + } + /* Disable the selected FSMC_Bank3 interrupts */ + else if (FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank3_NAND) + { + FSMC_Bank3->SR3 &= (u32)~FSMC_IT; + } + /* Disable the selected FSMC_Bank4 interrupts */ + else + { + FSMC_Bank4->SR4 &= (u32)~FSMC_IT; + } + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FSMC_GetFlagStatus +* Description : Checks whether the specified FSMC flag is set or not. +* Input : - FSMC_Bank: specifies the FSMC Bank to be used +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - FSMC_Bank2_NAND: FSMC Bank2 NAND +* - FSMC_Bank3_NAND: FSMC Bank3 NAND +* - FSMC_Bank4_PCCARD: FSMC Bank4 PCCARD +* - FSMC_FLAG: specifies the flag to check. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - FSMC_FLAG_RisingEdge: Rising egde detection Flag. +* - FSMC_FLAG_Level: Level detection Flag. +* - FSMC_FLAG_FallingEdge: Falling egde detection Flag. +* - FSMC_FLAG_FEMPT: Fifo empty Flag. +* Output : None +* Return : The new state of FSMC_FLAG (SET or RESET). +*******************************************************************************/ +FlagStatus FSMC_GetFlagStatus(u32 FSMC_Bank, u32 FSMC_FLAG) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + u32 tmpsr = 0x00000000; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FSMC_GETFLAG_BANK(FSMC_Bank)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_GET_FLAG(FSMC_FLAG)); + + if(FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank2_NAND) + { + tmpsr = FSMC_Bank2->SR2; + } + else if(FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank3_NAND) + { + tmpsr = FSMC_Bank3->SR3; + } + /* FSMC_Bank4_PCCARD*/ + else + { + tmpsr = FSMC_Bank4->SR4; + } + + /* Get the flag status */ + if ((tmpsr & FSMC_FLAG) != (u16)RESET ) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + /* Return the flag status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FSMC_ClearFlag +* Description : Clears the FSMC’s pending flags. +* Input : - FSMC_Bank: specifies the FSMC Bank to be used +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - FSMC_Bank2_NAND: FSMC Bank2 NAND +* - FSMC_Bank3_NAND: FSMC Bank3 NAND +* - FSMC_Bank4_PCCARD: FSMC Bank4 PCCARD +* - FSMC_FLAG: specifies the flag to clear. +* This parameter can be any combination of the following values: +* - FSMC_FLAG_RisingEdge: Rising egde detection Flag. +* - FSMC_FLAG_Level: Level detection Flag. +* - FSMC_FLAG_FallingEdge: Falling egde detection Flag. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void FSMC_ClearFlag(u32 FSMC_Bank, u32 FSMC_FLAG) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FSMC_GETFLAG_BANK(FSMC_Bank)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_CLEAR_FLAG(FSMC_FLAG)) ; + + if(FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank2_NAND) + { + FSMC_Bank2->SR2 &= ~FSMC_FLAG; + } + else if(FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank3_NAND) + { + FSMC_Bank3->SR3 &= ~FSMC_FLAG; + } + /* FSMC_Bank4_PCCARD*/ + else + { + FSMC_Bank4->SR4 &= ~FSMC_FLAG; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FSMC_GetITStatus +* Description : Checks whether the specified FSMC interrupt has occurred or not. +* Input : - FSMC_Bank: specifies the FSMC Bank to be used +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - FSMC_Bank2_NAND: FSMC Bank2 NAND +* - FSMC_Bank3_NAND: FSMC Bank3 NAND +* - FSMC_Bank4_PCCARD: FSMC Bank4 PCCARD +* - FSMC_IT: specifies the FSMC interrupt source to check. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - FSMC_IT_RisingEdge: Rising edge detection interrupt. +* - FSMC_IT_Level: Level edge detection interrupt. +* - FSMC_IT_FallingEdge: Falling edge detection interrupt. +* Output : None +* Return : The new state of FSMC_IT (SET or RESET). +*******************************************************************************/ +ITStatus FSMC_GetITStatus(u32 FSMC_Bank, u32 FSMC_IT) +{ + ITStatus bitstatus = RESET; + u32 tmpsr = 0x0, itstatus = 0x0, itenable = 0x0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FSMC_IT_BANK(FSMC_Bank)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_GET_IT(FSMC_IT)); + + if(FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank2_NAND) + { + tmpsr = FSMC_Bank2->SR2; + } + else if(FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank3_NAND) + { + tmpsr = FSMC_Bank3->SR3; + } + /* FSMC_Bank4_PCCARD*/ + else + { + tmpsr = FSMC_Bank4->SR4; + } + + itstatus = tmpsr & FSMC_IT; + + itenable = tmpsr & (FSMC_IT >> 3); + + if ((itstatus != (u32)RESET) && (itenable != (u32)RESET)) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + return bitstatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : FSMC_ClearITPendingBit +* Description : Clears the FSMC’s interrupt pending bits. +* Input : - FSMC_Bank: specifies the FSMC Bank to be used +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - FSMC_Bank2_NAND: FSMC Bank2 NAND +* - FSMC_Bank3_NAND: FSMC Bank3 NAND +* - FSMC_Bank4_PCCARD: FSMC Bank4 PCCARD +* - FSMC_IT: specifies the interrupt pending bit to clear. +* This parameter can be any combination of the following values: +* - FSMC_IT_RisingEdge: Rising edge detection interrupt. +* - FSMC_IT_Level: Level edge detection interrupt. +* - FSMC_IT_FallingEdge: Falling edge detection interrupt. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void FSMC_ClearITPendingBit(u32 FSMC_Bank, u32 FSMC_IT) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FSMC_IT_BANK(FSMC_Bank)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_IT(FSMC_IT)); + + if(FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank2_NAND) + { + FSMC_Bank2->SR2 &= ~(FSMC_IT >> 3); + } + else if(FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank3_NAND) + { + FSMC_Bank3->SR3 &= ~(FSMC_IT >> 3); + } + /* FSMC_Bank4_PCCARD*/ + else + { + FSMC_Bank4->SR4 &= ~(FSMC_IT >> 3); + } +} + +/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_gpio.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_gpio.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1979c05 --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_gpio.c @@ -0,0 +1,583 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ******************** +* File Name : stm32f10x_gpio.c +* Author : MCD Application Team +* Version : V2.0.2 +* Date : 07/11/2008 +* Description : This file provides all the GPIO firmware functions. +******************************************************************************** +* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS +* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME. +* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, +* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE +* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING +* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS. +*******************************************************************************/ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32f10x_gpio.h" +#include "stm32f10x_rcc.h" + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* ------------ RCC registers bit address in the alias region ----------- */ +#define AFIO_OFFSET (AFIO_BASE - PERIPH_BASE) + +/* --- EVENTCR Register ---*/ +/* Alias word address of EVOE bit */ +#define EVCR_OFFSET (AFIO_OFFSET + 0x00) +#define EVOE_BitNumber ((u8)0x07) +#define EVCR_EVOE_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (EVCR_OFFSET * 32) + (EVOE_BitNumber * 4)) + +#define EVCR_PORTPINCONFIG_MASK ((u16)0xFF80) +#define LSB_MASK ((u16)0xFFFF) +#define DBGAFR_POSITION_MASK ((u32)0x000F0000) +#define DBGAFR_SWJCFG_MASK ((u32)0xF0FFFFFF) +#define DBGAFR_LOCATION_MASK ((u32)0x00200000) +#define DBGAFR_NUMBITS_MASK ((u32)0x00100000) + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : GPIO_DeInit +* Description : Deinitializes the GPIOx peripheral registers to their default +* reset values. +* Input : - GPIOx: where x can be (A..G) to select the GPIO peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void GPIO_DeInit(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx)); + + switch (*(u32*)&GPIOx) + { + case GPIOA_BASE: + RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOA, ENABLE); + RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOA, DISABLE); + break; + + case GPIOB_BASE: + RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOB, ENABLE); + RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOB, DISABLE); + break; + + case GPIOC_BASE: + RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOC, ENABLE); + RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOC, DISABLE); + break; + + case GPIOD_BASE: + RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOD, ENABLE); + RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOD, DISABLE); + break; + + case GPIOE_BASE: + RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOE, ENABLE); + RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOE, DISABLE); + break; + + case GPIOF_BASE: + RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOF, ENABLE); + RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOF, DISABLE); + break; + + case GPIOG_BASE: + RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOG, ENABLE); + RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOG, DISABLE); + break; + + default: + break; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : GPIO_AFIODeInit +* Description : Deinitializes the Alternate Functions (remap, event control +* and EXTI configuration) registers to their default reset +* values. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void GPIO_AFIODeInit(void) +{ + RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_AFIO, ENABLE); + RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_AFIO, DISABLE); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : GPIO_Init +* Description : Initializes the GPIOx peripheral according to the specified +* parameters in the GPIO_InitStruct. +* Input : - GPIOx: where x can be (A..G) to select the GPIO peripheral. +* - GPIO_InitStruct: pointer to a GPIO_InitTypeDef structure that +* contains the configuration information for the specified GPIO +* peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void GPIO_Init(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, GPIO_InitTypeDef* GPIO_InitStruct) +{ + u32 currentmode = 0x00, currentpin = 0x00, pinpos = 0x00, pos = 0x00; + u32 tmpreg = 0x00, pinmask = 0x00; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx)); + assert_param(IS_GPIO_MODE(GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode)); + assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Pin)); + +/*---------------------------- GPIO Mode Configuration -----------------------*/ + currentmode = ((u32)GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode) & ((u32)0x0F); + + if ((((u32)GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode) & ((u32)0x10)) != 0x00) + { + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_SPEED(GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Speed)); + /* Output mode */ + currentmode |= (u32)GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Speed; + } + +/*---------------------------- GPIO CRL Configuration ------------------------*/ + /* Configure the eight low port pins */ + if (((u32)GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Pin & ((u32)0x00FF)) != 0x00) + { + tmpreg = GPIOx->CRL; + + for (pinpos = 0x00; pinpos < 0x08; pinpos++) + { + pos = ((u32)0x01) << pinpos; + /* Get the port pins position */ + currentpin = (GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Pin) & pos; + + if (currentpin == pos) + { + pos = pinpos << 2; + /* Clear the corresponding low control register bits */ + pinmask = ((u32)0x0F) << pos; + tmpreg &= ~pinmask; + + /* Write the mode configuration in the corresponding bits */ + tmpreg |= (currentmode << pos); + + /* Reset the corresponding ODR bit */ + if (GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode == GPIO_Mode_IPD) + { + GPIOx->BRR = (((u32)0x01) << pinpos); + } + else + { + /* Set the corresponding ODR bit */ + if (GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode == GPIO_Mode_IPU) + { + GPIOx->BSRR = (((u32)0x01) << pinpos); + } + } + } + } + GPIOx->CRL = tmpreg; + } + +/*---------------------------- GPIO CRH Configuration ------------------------*/ + /* Configure the eight high port pins */ + if (GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Pin > 0x00FF) + { + tmpreg = GPIOx->CRH; + for (pinpos = 0x00; pinpos < 0x08; pinpos++) + { + pos = (((u32)0x01) << (pinpos + 0x08)); + /* Get the port pins position */ + currentpin = ((GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Pin) & pos); + if (currentpin == pos) + { + pos = pinpos << 2; + /* Clear the corresponding high control register bits */ + pinmask = ((u32)0x0F) << pos; + tmpreg &= ~pinmask; + + /* Write the mode configuration in the corresponding bits */ + tmpreg |= (currentmode << pos); + + /* Reset the corresponding ODR bit */ + if (GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode == GPIO_Mode_IPD) + { + GPIOx->BRR = (((u32)0x01) << (pinpos + 0x08)); + } + /* Set the corresponding ODR bit */ + if (GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode == GPIO_Mode_IPU) + { + GPIOx->BSRR = (((u32)0x01) << (pinpos + 0x08)); + } + } + } + GPIOx->CRH = tmpreg; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : GPIO_StructInit +* Description : Fills each GPIO_InitStruct member with its default value. +* Input : - GPIO_InitStruct : pointer to a GPIO_InitTypeDef structure +* which will be initialized. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void GPIO_StructInit(GPIO_InitTypeDef* GPIO_InitStruct) +{ + /* Reset GPIO init structure parameters values */ + GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Pin = GPIO_Pin_All; + GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Speed = GPIO_Speed_2MHz; + GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode = GPIO_Mode_IN_FLOATING; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : GPIO_ReadInputDataBit +* Description : Reads the specified input port pin. +* Input : - GPIOx: where x can be (A..G) to select the GPIO peripheral. +* : - GPIO_Pin: specifies the port bit to read. +* This parameter can be GPIO_Pin_x where x can be (0..15). +* Output : None +* Return : The input port pin value. +*******************************************************************************/ +u8 GPIO_ReadInputDataBit(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, u16 GPIO_Pin) +{ + u8 bitstatus = 0x00; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx)); + assert_param(IS_GET_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin)); + + if ((GPIOx->IDR & GPIO_Pin) != (u32)Bit_RESET) + { + bitstatus = (u8)Bit_SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = (u8)Bit_RESET; + } + return bitstatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : GPIO_ReadInputData +* Description : Reads the specified GPIO input data port. +* Input : - GPIOx: where x can be (A..G) to select the GPIO peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : GPIO input data port value. +*******************************************************************************/ +u16 GPIO_ReadInputData(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx)); + + return ((u16)GPIOx->IDR); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : GPIO_ReadOutputDataBit +* Description : Reads the specified output data port bit. +* Input : - GPIOx: where x can be (A..G) to select the GPIO peripheral. +* : - GPIO_Pin: specifies the port bit to read. +* This parameter can be GPIO_Pin_x where x can be (0..15). +* Output : None +* Return : The output port pin value. +*******************************************************************************/ +u8 GPIO_ReadOutputDataBit(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, u16 GPIO_Pin) +{ + u8 bitstatus = 0x00; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx)); + assert_param(IS_GET_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin)); + + if ((GPIOx->ODR & GPIO_Pin) != (u32)Bit_RESET) + { + bitstatus = (u8)Bit_SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = (u8)Bit_RESET; + } + return bitstatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : GPIO_ReadOutputData +* Description : Reads the specified GPIO output data port. +* Input : - GPIOx: where x can be (A..G) to select the GPIO peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : GPIO output data port value. +*******************************************************************************/ +u16 GPIO_ReadOutputData(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx)); + + return ((u16)GPIOx->ODR); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : GPIO_SetBits +* Description : Sets the selected data port bits. +* Input : - GPIOx: where x can be (A..G) to select the GPIO peripheral. +* - GPIO_Pin: specifies the port bits to be written. +* This parameter can be any combination of GPIO_Pin_x where +* x can be (0..15). +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void GPIO_SetBits(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, u16 GPIO_Pin) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx)); + assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin)); + + GPIOx->BSRR = GPIO_Pin; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : GPIO_ResetBits +* Description : Clears the selected data port bits. +* Input : - GPIOx: where x can be (A..G) to select the GPIO peripheral. +* - GPIO_Pin: specifies the port bits to be written. +* This parameter can be any combination of GPIO_Pin_x where +* x can be (0..15). +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void GPIO_ResetBits(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, u16 GPIO_Pin) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx)); + assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin)); + + GPIOx->BRR = GPIO_Pin; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : GPIO_WriteBit +* Description : Sets or clears the selected data port bit. +* Input : - GPIOx: where x can be (A..G) to select the GPIO peripheral. +* - GPIO_Pin: specifies the port bit to be written. +* This parameter can be one of GPIO_Pin_x where x can be (0..15). +* - BitVal: specifies the value to be written to the selected bit. +* This parameter can be one of the BitAction enum values: +* - Bit_RESET: to clear the port pin +* - Bit_SET: to set the port pin +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void GPIO_WriteBit(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, u16 GPIO_Pin, BitAction BitVal) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx)); + assert_param(IS_GET_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin)); + assert_param(IS_GPIO_BIT_ACTION(BitVal)); + + if (BitVal != Bit_RESET) + { + GPIOx->BSRR = GPIO_Pin; + } + else + { + GPIOx->BRR = GPIO_Pin; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : GPIO_Write +* Description : Writes data to the specified GPIO data port. +* Input : - GPIOx: where x can be (A..G) to select the GPIO peripheral. +* - PortVal: specifies the value to be written to the port output +* data register. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void GPIO_Write(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, u16 PortVal) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx)); + + GPIOx->ODR = PortVal; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : GPIO_PinLockConfig +* Description : Locks GPIO Pins configuration registers. +* Input : - GPIOx: where x can be (A..G) to select the GPIO peripheral. +* - GPIO_Pin: specifies the port bit to be written. +* This parameter can be any combination of GPIO_Pin_x where +* x can be (0..15). +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void GPIO_PinLockConfig(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, u16 GPIO_Pin) +{ + u32 tmp = 0x00010000; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx)); + assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin)); + + tmp |= GPIO_Pin; + /* Set LCKK bit */ + GPIOx->LCKR = tmp; + /* Reset LCKK bit */ + GPIOx->LCKR = GPIO_Pin; + /* Set LCKK bit */ + GPIOx->LCKR = tmp; + /* Read LCKK bit*/ + tmp = GPIOx->LCKR; + /* Read LCKK bit*/ + tmp = GPIOx->LCKR; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : GPIO_EventOutputConfig +* Description : Selects the GPIO pin used as Event output. +* Input : - GPIO_PortSource: selects the GPIO port to be used as source +* for Event output. +* This parameter can be GPIO_PortSourceGPIOx where x can be +* (A..E). +* - GPIO_PinSource: specifies the pin for the Event output. +* This parameter can be GPIO_PinSourcex where x can be (0..15). +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void GPIO_EventOutputConfig(u8 GPIO_PortSource, u8 GPIO_PinSource) +{ + u32 tmpreg = 0x00; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_EVENTOUT_PORT_SOURCE(GPIO_PortSource)); + assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN_SOURCE(GPIO_PinSource)); + + tmpreg = AFIO->EVCR; + /* Clear the PORT[6:4] and PIN[3:0] bits */ + tmpreg &= EVCR_PORTPINCONFIG_MASK; + tmpreg |= (u32)GPIO_PortSource << 0x04; + tmpreg |= GPIO_PinSource; + + AFIO->EVCR = tmpreg; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : GPIO_EventOutputCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the Event Output. +* Input : - NewState: new state of the Event output. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void GPIO_EventOutputCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + *(vu32 *) EVCR_EVOE_BB = (u32)NewState; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : GPIO_PinRemapConfig +* Description : Changes the mapping of the specified pin. +* Input : - GPIO_Remap: selects the pin to remap. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - GPIO_Remap_SPI1 +* - GPIO_Remap_I2C1 +* - GPIO_Remap_USART1 +* - GPIO_Remap_USART2 +* - GPIO_PartialRemap_USART3 +* - GPIO_FullRemap_USART3 +* - GPIO_PartialRemap_TIM1 +* - GPIO_FullRemap_TIM1 +* - GPIO_PartialRemap1_TIM2 +* - GPIO_PartialRemap2_TIM2 +* - GPIO_FullRemap_TIM2 +* - GPIO_PartialRemap_TIM3 +* - GPIO_FullRemap_TIM3 +* - GPIO_Remap_TIM4 +* - GPIO_Remap1_CAN +* - GPIO_Remap2_CAN +* - GPIO_Remap_PD01 +* - GPIO_Remap_TIM5CH4_LSI +* - GPIO_Remap_ADC1_ETRGINJ +* - GPIO_Remap_ADC1_ETRGREG +* - GPIO_Remap_ADC2_ETRGINJ +* - GPIO_Remap_ADC2_ETRGREG +* - GPIO_Remap_SWJ_NoJTRST +* - GPIO_Remap_SWJ_JTAGDisable +* - GPIO_Remap_SWJ_Disable +* - NewState: new state of the port pin remapping. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void GPIO_PinRemapConfig(u32 GPIO_Remap, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + u32 tmp = 0x00, tmp1 = 0x00, tmpreg = 0x00, tmpmask = 0x00; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_REMAP(GPIO_Remap)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + tmpreg = AFIO->MAPR; + + tmpmask = (GPIO_Remap & DBGAFR_POSITION_MASK) >> 0x10; + tmp = GPIO_Remap & LSB_MASK; + + if ((GPIO_Remap & (DBGAFR_LOCATION_MASK | DBGAFR_NUMBITS_MASK)) == (DBGAFR_LOCATION_MASK | DBGAFR_NUMBITS_MASK)) + { + tmpreg &= DBGAFR_SWJCFG_MASK; + AFIO->MAPR &= DBGAFR_SWJCFG_MASK; + } + else if ((GPIO_Remap & DBGAFR_NUMBITS_MASK) == DBGAFR_NUMBITS_MASK) + { + tmp1 = ((u32)0x03) << tmpmask; + tmpreg &= ~tmp1; + tmpreg |= ~DBGAFR_SWJCFG_MASK; + } + else + { + tmpreg &= ~(tmp << ((GPIO_Remap >> 0x15)*0x10)); + tmpreg |= ~DBGAFR_SWJCFG_MASK; + } + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + tmpreg |= (tmp << ((GPIO_Remap >> 0x15)*0x10)); + } + + AFIO->MAPR = tmpreg; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : GPIO_EXTILineConfig +* Description : Selects the GPIO pin used as EXTI Line. +* Input : - GPIO_PortSource: selects the GPIO port to be used as +* source for EXTI lines. +* This parameter can be GPIO_PortSourceGPIOx where x can be +* (A..G). +* - GPIO_PinSource: specifies the EXTI line to be configured. +* This parameter can be GPIO_PinSourcex where x can be (0..15). +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void GPIO_EXTILineConfig(u8 GPIO_PortSource, u8 GPIO_PinSource) +{ + u32 tmp = 0x00; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_EXTI_PORT_SOURCE(GPIO_PortSource)); + assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN_SOURCE(GPIO_PinSource)); + + tmp = ((u32)0x0F) << (0x04 * (GPIO_PinSource & (u8)0x03)); + + AFIO->EXTICR[GPIO_PinSource >> 0x02] &= ~tmp; + AFIO->EXTICR[GPIO_PinSource >> 0x02] |= (((u32)GPIO_PortSource) << (0x04 * (GPIO_PinSource & (u8)0x03))); +} + +/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_i2c.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_i2c.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..360f71d --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_i2c.c @@ -0,0 +1,1216 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ******************** +* File Name : stm32f10x_i2c.c +* Author : MCD Application Team +* Version : V2.0.2 +* Date : 07/11/2008 +* Description : This file provides all the I2C firmware functions. +******************************************************************************** +* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS +* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME. +* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, +* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE +* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING +* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS. +*******************************************************************************/ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32f10x_i2c.h" +#include "stm32f10x_rcc.h" + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* I2C SPE mask */ +#define CR1_PE_Set ((u16)0x0001) +#define CR1_PE_Reset ((u16)0xFFFE) + +/* I2C START mask */ +#define CR1_START_Set ((u16)0x0100) +#define CR1_START_Reset ((u16)0xFEFF) + +/* I2C STOP mask */ +#define CR1_STOP_Set ((u16)0x0200) +#define CR1_STOP_Reset ((u16)0xFDFF) + +/* I2C ACK mask */ +#define CR1_ACK_Set ((u16)0x0400) +#define CR1_ACK_Reset ((u16)0xFBFF) + +/* I2C ENGC mask */ +#define CR1_ENGC_Set ((u16)0x0040) +#define CR1_ENGC_Reset ((u16)0xFFBF) + +/* I2C SWRST mask */ +#define CR1_SWRST_Set ((u16)0x8000) +#define CR1_SWRST_Reset ((u16)0x7FFF) + +/* I2C PEC mask */ +#define CR1_PEC_Set ((u16)0x1000) +#define CR1_PEC_Reset ((u16)0xEFFF) + +/* I2C ENPEC mask */ +#define CR1_ENPEC_Set ((u16)0x0020) +#define CR1_ENPEC_Reset ((u16)0xFFDF) + +/* I2C ENARP mask */ +#define CR1_ENARP_Set ((u16)0x0010) +#define CR1_ENARP_Reset ((u16)0xFFEF) + +/* I2C NOSTRETCH mask */ +#define CR1_NOSTRETCH_Set ((u16)0x0080) +#define CR1_NOSTRETCH_Reset ((u16)0xFF7F) + +/* I2C registers Masks */ +#define CR1_CLEAR_Mask ((u16)0xFBF5) + +/* I2C DMAEN mask */ +#define CR2_DMAEN_Set ((u16)0x0800) +#define CR2_DMAEN_Reset ((u16)0xF7FF) + +/* I2C LAST mask */ +#define CR2_LAST_Set ((u16)0x1000) +#define CR2_LAST_Reset ((u16)0xEFFF) + +/* I2C FREQ mask */ +#define CR2_FREQ_Reset ((u16)0xFFC0) + +/* I2C ADD0 mask */ +#define OAR1_ADD0_Set ((u16)0x0001) +#define OAR1_ADD0_Reset ((u16)0xFFFE) + +/* I2C ENDUAL mask */ +#define OAR2_ENDUAL_Set ((u16)0x0001) +#define OAR2_ENDUAL_Reset ((u16)0xFFFE) + +/* I2C ADD2 mask */ +#define OAR2_ADD2_Reset ((u16)0xFF01) + +/* I2C F/S mask */ +#define CCR_FS_Set ((u16)0x8000) + +/* I2C CCR mask */ +#define CCR_CCR_Set ((u16)0x0FFF) + +/* I2C FLAG mask */ +#define FLAG_Mask ((u32)0x00FFFFFF) + +/* I2C Interrupt Enable mask */ +#define ITEN_Mask ((u32)0x07000000) + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : I2C_DeInit +* Description : Deinitializes the I2Cx peripheral registers to their default +* reset values. +* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void I2C_DeInit(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + + switch (*(u32*)&I2Cx) + { + case I2C1_BASE: + /* Enable I2C1 reset state */ + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_I2C1, ENABLE); + /* Release I2C1 from reset state */ + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_I2C1, DISABLE); + break; + + case I2C2_BASE: + /* Enable I2C2 reset state */ + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_I2C2, ENABLE); + /* Release I2C2 from reset state */ + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_I2C2, DISABLE); + break; + + default: + break; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : I2C_Init +* Description : Initializes the I2Cx peripheral according to the specified +* parameters in the I2C_InitStruct. +* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. +* - I2C_InitStruct: pointer to a I2C_InitTypeDef structure that +* contains the configuration information for the specified +* I2C peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : None +******************************************************************************/ +void I2C_Init(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, I2C_InitTypeDef* I2C_InitStruct) +{ + u16 tmpreg = 0, freqrange = 0; + u16 result = 0x04; + u32 pclk1 = 8000000; + RCC_ClocksTypeDef rcc_clocks; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_I2C_MODE(I2C_InitStruct->I2C_Mode)); + assert_param(IS_I2C_DUTY_CYCLE(I2C_InitStruct->I2C_DutyCycle)); + assert_param(IS_I2C_OWN_ADDRESS1(I2C_InitStruct->I2C_OwnAddress1)); + assert_param(IS_I2C_ACK_STATE(I2C_InitStruct->I2C_Ack)); + assert_param(IS_I2C_ACKNOWLEDGE_ADDRESS(I2C_InitStruct->I2C_AcknowledgedAddress)); + assert_param(IS_I2C_CLOCK_SPEED(I2C_InitStruct->I2C_ClockSpeed)); + +/*---------------------------- I2Cx CR2 Configuration ------------------------*/ + /* Get the I2Cx CR2 value */ + tmpreg = I2Cx->CR2; + /* Clear frequency FREQ[5:0] bits */ + tmpreg &= CR2_FREQ_Reset; + /* Get pclk1 frequency value */ + RCC_GetClocksFreq(&rcc_clocks); + pclk1 = rcc_clocks.PCLK1_Frequency; + /* Set frequency bits depending on pclk1 value */ + freqrange = (u16)(pclk1 / 1000000); + tmpreg |= freqrange; + /* Write to I2Cx CR2 */ + I2Cx->CR2 = tmpreg; + +/*---------------------------- I2Cx CCR Configuration ------------------------*/ + /* Disable the selected I2C peripheral to configure TRISE */ + I2Cx->CR1 &= CR1_PE_Reset; + + /* Reset tmpreg value */ + /* Clear F/S, DUTY and CCR[11:0] bits */ + tmpreg = 0; + + /* Configure speed in standard mode */ + if (I2C_InitStruct->I2C_ClockSpeed <= 100000) + { + /* Standard mode speed calculate */ + result = (u16)(pclk1 / (I2C_InitStruct->I2C_ClockSpeed << 1)); + /* Test if CCR value is under 0x4*/ + if (result < 0x04) + { + /* Set minimum allowed value */ + result = 0x04; + } + /* Set speed value for standard mode */ + tmpreg |= result; + /* Set Maximum Rise Time for standard mode */ + I2Cx->TRISE = freqrange + 1; + } + /* Configure speed in fast mode */ + else /*(I2C_InitStruct->I2C_ClockSpeed <= 400000)*/ + { + if (I2C_InitStruct->I2C_DutyCycle == I2C_DutyCycle_2) + { + /* Fast mode speed calculate: Tlow/Thigh = 2 */ + result = (u16)(pclk1 / (I2C_InitStruct->I2C_ClockSpeed * 3)); + } + else /*I2C_InitStruct->I2C_DutyCycle == I2C_DutyCycle_16_9*/ + { + /* Fast mode speed calculate: Tlow/Thigh = 16/9 */ + result = (u16)(pclk1 / (I2C_InitStruct->I2C_ClockSpeed * 25)); + /* Set DUTY bit */ + result |= I2C_DutyCycle_16_9; + } + /* Test if CCR value is under 0x1*/ + if ((result & CCR_CCR_Set) == 0) + { + /* Set minimum allowed value */ + result |= (u16)0x0001; + } + /* Set speed value and set F/S bit for fast mode */ + tmpreg |= result | CCR_FS_Set; + /* Set Maximum Rise Time for fast mode */ + I2Cx->TRISE = (u16)(((freqrange * 300) / 1000) + 1); + } + /* Write to I2Cx CCR */ + I2Cx->CCR = tmpreg; + + /* Enable the selected I2C peripheral */ + I2Cx->CR1 |= CR1_PE_Set; + +/*---------------------------- I2Cx CR1 Configuration ------------------------*/ + /* Get the I2Cx CR1 value */ + tmpreg = I2Cx->CR1; + /* Clear ACK, SMBTYPE and SMBUS bits */ + tmpreg &= CR1_CLEAR_Mask; + /* Configure I2Cx: mode and acknowledgement */ + /* Set SMBTYPE and SMBUS bits according to I2C_Mode value */ + /* Set ACK bit according to I2C_Ack value */ + tmpreg |= (u16)((u32)I2C_InitStruct->I2C_Mode | I2C_InitStruct->I2C_Ack); + /* Write to I2Cx CR1 */ + I2Cx->CR1 = tmpreg; + +/*---------------------------- I2Cx OAR1 Configuration -----------------------*/ + /* Set I2Cx Own Address1 and acknowledged address */ + I2Cx->OAR1 = (I2C_InitStruct->I2C_AcknowledgedAddress | I2C_InitStruct->I2C_OwnAddress1); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : I2C_StructInit +* Description : Fills each I2C_InitStruct member with its default value. +* Input : - I2C_InitStruct: pointer to an I2C_InitTypeDef structure +* which will be initialized. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void I2C_StructInit(I2C_InitTypeDef* I2C_InitStruct) +{ +/*---------------- Reset I2C init structure parameters values ----------------*/ + /* Initialize the I2C_Mode member */ + I2C_InitStruct->I2C_Mode = I2C_Mode_I2C; + + /* Initialize the I2C_DutyCycle member */ + I2C_InitStruct->I2C_DutyCycle = I2C_DutyCycle_2; + + /* Initialize the I2C_OwnAddress1 member */ + I2C_InitStruct->I2C_OwnAddress1 = 0; + + /* Initialize the I2C_Ack member */ + I2C_InitStruct->I2C_Ack = I2C_Ack_Disable; + + /* Initialize the I2C_AcknowledgedAddress member */ + I2C_InitStruct->I2C_AcknowledgedAddress = I2C_AcknowledgedAddress_7bit; + + /* initialize the I2C_ClockSpeed member */ + I2C_InitStruct->I2C_ClockSpeed = 5000; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : I2C_Cmd +* Description : Enables or disables the specified I2C peripheral. +* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. +* - NewState: new state of the I2Cx peripheral. This parameter +* can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void I2C_Cmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected I2C peripheral */ + I2Cx->CR1 |= CR1_PE_Set; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected I2C peripheral */ + I2Cx->CR1 &= CR1_PE_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : I2C_DMACmd +* Description : Enables or disables the specified I2C DMA requests. +* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. +* - NewState: new state of the I2C DMA transfer. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void I2C_DMACmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected I2C DMA requests */ + I2Cx->CR2 |= CR2_DMAEN_Set; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected I2C DMA requests */ + I2Cx->CR2 &= CR2_DMAEN_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : I2C_DMALastTransferCmd +* Description : Specifies that the next DMA transfer is the last one. +* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. +* - NewState: new state of the I2C DMA last transfer. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void I2C_DMALastTransferCmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Next DMA transfer is the last transfer */ + I2Cx->CR2 |= CR2_LAST_Set; + } + else + { + /* Next DMA transfer is not the last transfer */ + I2Cx->CR2 &= CR2_LAST_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : I2C_GenerateSTART +* Description : Generates I2Cx communication START condition. +* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. +* - NewState: new state of the I2C START condition generation. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None. +*******************************************************************************/ +void I2C_GenerateSTART(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Generate a START condition */ + I2Cx->CR1 |= CR1_START_Set; + } + else + { + /* Disable the START condition generation */ + I2Cx->CR1 &= CR1_START_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : I2C_GenerateSTOP +* Description : Generates I2Cx communication STOP condition. +* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. +* - NewState: new state of the I2C STOP condition generation. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None. +*******************************************************************************/ +void I2C_GenerateSTOP(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Generate a STOP condition */ + I2Cx->CR1 |= CR1_STOP_Set; + } + else + { + /* Disable the STOP condition generation */ + I2Cx->CR1 &= CR1_STOP_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : I2C_AcknowledgeConfig +* Description : Enables or disables the specified I2C acknowledge feature. +* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. +* - NewState: new state of the I2C Acknowledgement. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None. +*******************************************************************************/ +void I2C_AcknowledgeConfig(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the acknowledgement */ + I2Cx->CR1 |= CR1_ACK_Set; + } + else + { + /* Disable the acknowledgement */ + I2Cx->CR1 &= CR1_ACK_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : I2C_OwnAddress2Config +* Description : Configures the specified I2C own address2. +* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. +* - Address: specifies the 7bit I2C own address2. +* Output : None +* Return : None. +*******************************************************************************/ +void I2C_OwnAddress2Config(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, u8 Address) +{ + u16 tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg = I2Cx->OAR2; + /* Reset I2Cx Own address2 bit [7:1] */ + tmpreg &= OAR2_ADD2_Reset; + /* Set I2Cx Own address2 */ + tmpreg |= (u16)(Address & (u16)0x00FE); + /* Store the new register value */ + I2Cx->OAR2 = tmpreg; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : I2C_DualAddressCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the specified I2C dual addressing mode. +* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. +* - NewState: new state of the I2C dual addressing mode. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void I2C_DualAddressCmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable dual addressing mode */ + I2Cx->OAR2 |= OAR2_ENDUAL_Set; + } + else + { + /* Disable dual addressing mode */ + I2Cx->OAR2 &= OAR2_ENDUAL_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : I2C_GeneralCallCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the specified I2C general call feature. +* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. +* - NewState: new state of the I2C General call. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void I2C_GeneralCallCmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable generall call */ + I2Cx->CR1 |= CR1_ENGC_Set; + } + else + { + /* Disable generall call */ + I2Cx->CR1 &= CR1_ENGC_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : I2C_ITConfig +* Description : Enables or disables the specified I2C interrupts. +* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. +* - I2C_IT: specifies the I2C interrupts sources to be enabled +* or disabled. +* This parameter can be any combination of the following values: +* - I2C_IT_BUF: Buffer interrupt mask +* - I2C_IT_EVT: Event interrupt mask +* - I2C_IT_ERR: Error interrupt mask +* - NewState: new state of the specified I2C interrupts. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void I2C_ITConfig(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, u16 I2C_IT, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + assert_param(IS_I2C_CONFIG_IT(I2C_IT)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected I2C interrupts */ + I2Cx->CR2 |= I2C_IT; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected I2C interrupts */ + I2Cx->CR2 &= (u16)~I2C_IT; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : I2C_SendData +* Description : Sends a data byte through the I2Cx peripheral. +* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. +* - Data: Byte to be transmitted.. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void I2C_SendData(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, u8 Data) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + + /* Write in the DR register the data to be sent */ + I2Cx->DR = Data; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : I2C_ReceiveData +* Description : Returns the most recent received data by the I2Cx peripheral. +* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : The value of the received data. +*******************************************************************************/ +u8 I2C_ReceiveData(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + + /* Return the data in the DR register */ + return (u8)I2Cx->DR; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : I2C_Send7bitAddress +* Description : Transmits the address byte to select the slave device. +* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. +* - Address: specifies the slave address which will be transmitted +* - I2C_Direction: specifies whether the I2C device will be a +* Transmitter or a Receiver. +* This parameter can be one of the following values +* - I2C_Direction_Transmitter: Transmitter mode +* - I2C_Direction_Receiver: Receiver mode +* Output : None +* Return : None. +*******************************************************************************/ +void I2C_Send7bitAddress(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, u8 Address, u8 I2C_Direction) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_I2C_DIRECTION(I2C_Direction)); + + /* Test on the direction to set/reset the read/write bit */ + if (I2C_Direction != I2C_Direction_Transmitter) + { + /* Set the address bit0 for read */ + Address |= OAR1_ADD0_Set; + } + else + { + /* Reset the address bit0 for write */ + Address &= OAR1_ADD0_Reset; + } + /* Send the address */ + I2Cx->DR = Address; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : I2C_ReadRegister +* Description : Reads the specified I2C register and returns its value. +* Input1 : - I2C_Register: specifies the register to read. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - I2C_Register_CR1: CR1 register. +* - I2C_Register_CR2: CR2 register. +* - I2C_Register_OAR1: OAR1 register. +* - I2C_Register_OAR2: OAR2 register. +* - I2C_Register_DR: DR register. +* - I2C_Register_SR1: SR1 register. +* - I2C_Register_SR2: SR2 register. +* - I2C_Register_CCR: CCR register. +* - I2C_Register_TRISE: TRISE register. +* Output : None +* Return : The value of the read register. +*******************************************************************************/ +u16 I2C_ReadRegister(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, u8 I2C_Register) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_I2C_REGISTER(I2C_Register)); + + /* Return the selected register value */ + return (*(vu16 *)(*((vu32 *)&I2Cx) + I2C_Register)); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : I2C_SoftwareResetCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the specified I2C software reset. +* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. +* - NewState: new state of the I2C software reset. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void I2C_SoftwareResetCmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Peripheral under reset */ + I2Cx->CR1 |= CR1_SWRST_Set; + } + else + { + /* Peripheral not under reset */ + I2Cx->CR1 &= CR1_SWRST_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : I2C_SMBusAlertConfig +* Description : Drives the SMBusAlert pin high or low for the specified I2C. +* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. +* - I2C_SMBusAlert: specifies SMBAlert pin level. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - I2C_SMBusAlert_Low: SMBAlert pin driven low +* - I2C_SMBusAlert_High: SMBAlert pin driven high +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void I2C_SMBusAlertConfig(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, u16 I2C_SMBusAlert) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_I2C_SMBUS_ALERT(I2C_SMBusAlert)); + + if (I2C_SMBusAlert == I2C_SMBusAlert_Low) + { + /* Drive the SMBusAlert pin Low */ + I2Cx->CR1 |= I2C_SMBusAlert_Low; + } + else + { + /* Drive the SMBusAlert pin High */ + I2Cx->CR1 &= I2C_SMBusAlert_High; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : I2C_TransmitPEC +* Description : Enables or disables the specified I2C PEC transfer. +* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. +* - NewState: new state of the I2C PEC transmission. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void I2C_TransmitPEC(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected I2C PEC transmission */ + I2Cx->CR1 |= CR1_PEC_Set; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected I2C PEC transmission */ + I2Cx->CR1 &= CR1_PEC_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : I2C_PECPositionConfig +* Description : Selects the specified I2C PEC position. +* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. +* - I2C_PECPosition: specifies the PEC position. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - I2C_PECPosition_Next: indicates that the next +* byte is PEC +* - I2C_PECPosition_Current: indicates that current +* byte is PEC +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void I2C_PECPositionConfig(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, u16 I2C_PECPosition) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_I2C_PEC_POSITION(I2C_PECPosition)); + + if (I2C_PECPosition == I2C_PECPosition_Next) + { + /* Next byte in shift register is PEC */ + I2Cx->CR1 |= I2C_PECPosition_Next; + } + else + { + /* Current byte in shift register is PEC */ + I2Cx->CR1 &= I2C_PECPosition_Current; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : I2C_CalculatePEC +* Description : Enables or disables the PEC value calculation of the +* transfered bytes. +* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. +* - NewState: new state of the I2Cx PEC value calculation. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void I2C_CalculatePEC(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected I2C PEC calculation */ + I2Cx->CR1 |= CR1_ENPEC_Set; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected I2C PEC calculation */ + I2Cx->CR1 &= CR1_ENPEC_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : I2C_GetPEC +* Description : Returns the PEC value for the specified I2C. +* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : The PEC value. +*******************************************************************************/ +u8 I2C_GetPEC(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + + /* Return the selected I2C PEC value */ + return ((I2Cx->SR2) >> 8); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : I2C_ARPCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the specified I2C ARP. +* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. +* - NewState: new state of the I2Cx ARP. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void I2C_ARPCmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected I2C ARP */ + I2Cx->CR1 |= CR1_ENARP_Set; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected I2C ARP */ + I2Cx->CR1 &= CR1_ENARP_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : I2C_StretchClockCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the specified I2C Clock stretching. +* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. +* - NewState: new state of the I2Cx Clock stretching. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void I2C_StretchClockCmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState == DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected I2C Clock stretching */ + I2Cx->CR1 |= CR1_NOSTRETCH_Set; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected I2C Clock stretching */ + I2Cx->CR1 &= CR1_NOSTRETCH_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : I2C_FastModeDutyCycleConfig +* Description : Selects the specified I2C fast mode duty cycle. +* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. +* - I2C_DutyCycle: specifies the fast mode duty cycle. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - I2C_DutyCycle_2: I2C fast mode Tlow/Thigh = 2 +* - I2C_DutyCycle_16_9: I2C fast mode Tlow/Thigh = 16/9 +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void I2C_FastModeDutyCycleConfig(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, u16 I2C_DutyCycle) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_I2C_DUTY_CYCLE(I2C_DutyCycle)); + + if (I2C_DutyCycle != I2C_DutyCycle_16_9) + { + /* I2C fast mode Tlow/Thigh=2 */ + I2Cx->CCR &= I2C_DutyCycle_2; + } + else + { + /* I2C fast mode Tlow/Thigh=16/9 */ + I2Cx->CCR |= I2C_DutyCycle_16_9; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : I2C_GetLastEvent +* Description : Returns the last I2Cx Event. +* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : The last event +*******************************************************************************/ +u32 I2C_GetLastEvent(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx) +{ + u32 lastevent = 0; + u32 flag1 = 0, flag2 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + + /* Read the I2Cx status register */ + flag1 = I2Cx->SR1; + flag2 = I2Cx->SR2; + flag2 = flag2 << 16; + + /* Get the last event value from I2C status register */ + lastevent = (flag1 | flag2) & FLAG_Mask; + + /* Return status */ + return lastevent; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : I2C_CheckEvent +* Description : Checks whether the last I2Cx Event is equal to the one passed +* as parameter. +* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. +* - I2C_EVENT: specifies the event to be checked. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - I2C_EVENT_SLAVE_ADDRESS_MATCHED : EV1 +* - I2C_EVENT_SLAVE_BYTE_RECEIVED : EV2 +* - I2C_EVENT_SLAVE_BYTE_TRANSMITTED : EV3 +* - I2C_EVENT_SLAVE_ACK_FAILURE : EV3-2 +* - I2C_EVENT_MASTER_MODE_SELECT : EV5 +* - I2C_EVENT_MASTER_MODE_SELECTED : EV6 +* - I2C_EVENT_MASTER_BYTE_RECEIVED : EV7 +* - I2C_EVENT_MASTER_BYTE_TRANSMITTED : EV8 +* - I2C_EVENT_MASTER_MODE_ADDRESS10 : EV9 +* - I2C_EVENT_SLAVE_STOP_DETECTED : EV4 +* Output : None +* Return : An ErrorStatus enumuration value: +* - SUCCESS: Last event is equal to the I2C_EVENT +* - ERROR: Last event is different from the I2C_EVENT +*******************************************************************************/ +ErrorStatus I2C_CheckEvent(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, u32 I2C_EVENT) +{ + u32 lastevent = 0; + u32 flag1 = 0, flag2 = 0; + ErrorStatus status = ERROR; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_I2C_EVENT(I2C_EVENT)); + + /* Read the I2Cx status register */ + flag1 = I2Cx->SR1; + flag2 = I2Cx->SR2; + flag2 = flag2 << 16; + + /* Get the last event value from I2C status register */ + lastevent = (flag1 | flag2) & FLAG_Mask; + + /* Check whether the last event is equal to I2C_EVENT */ + if (lastevent == I2C_EVENT ) + { + /* SUCCESS: last event is equal to I2C_EVENT */ + status = SUCCESS; + } + else + { + /* ERROR: last event is different from I2C_EVENT */ + status = ERROR; + } + + /* Return status */ + return status; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : I2C_GetFlagStatus +* Description : Checks whether the specified I2C flag is set or not. +* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. +* - I2C_FLAG: specifies the flag to check. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - I2C_FLAG_DUALF: Dual flag (Slave mode) +* - I2C_FLAG_SMBHOST: SMBus host header (Slave mode) +* - I2C_FLAG_SMBDEFAULT: SMBus default header (Slave mode) +* - I2C_FLAG_GENCALL: General call header flag (Slave mode) +* - I2C_FLAG_TRA: Transmitter/Receiver flag +* - I2C_FLAG_BUSY: Bus busy flag +* - I2C_FLAG_MSL: Master/Slave flag +* - I2C_FLAG_SMBALERT: SMBus Alert flag +* - I2C_FLAG_TIMEOUT: Timeout or Tlow error flag +* - I2C_FLAG_PECERR: PEC error in reception flag +* - I2C_FLAG_OVR: Overrun/Underrun flag (Slave mode) +* - I2C_FLAG_AF: Acknowledge failure flag +* - I2C_FLAG_ARLO: Arbitration lost flag (Master mode) +* - I2C_FLAG_BERR: Bus error flag +* - I2C_FLAG_TXE: Data register empty flag (Transmitter) +* - I2C_FLAG_RXNE: Data register not empty (Receiver) flag +* - I2C_FLAG_STOPF: Stop detection flag (Slave mode) +* - I2C_FLAG_ADD10: 10-bit header sent flag (Master mode) +* - I2C_FLAG_BTF: Byte transfer finished flag +* - I2C_FLAG_ADDR: Address sent flag (Master mode) “ADSL” +* Address matched flag (Slave mode)”ENDAD” +* - I2C_FLAG_SB: Start bit flag (Master mode) +* Output : None +* Return : The new state of I2C_FLAG (SET or RESET). +*******************************************************************************/ +FlagStatus I2C_GetFlagStatus(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, u32 I2C_FLAG) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + u32 i2creg = 0, i2cxbase = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_I2C_GET_FLAG(I2C_FLAG)); + + /* Get the I2Cx peripheral base address */ + i2cxbase = (*(u32*)&(I2Cx)); + + /* Read flag register index */ + i2creg = I2C_FLAG >> 28; + + /* Get bit[23:0] of the flag */ + I2C_FLAG &= FLAG_Mask; + + if(i2creg != 0) + { + /* Get the I2Cx SR1 register address */ + i2cxbase += 0x14; + } + else + { + /* Flag in I2Cx SR2 Register */ + I2C_FLAG = (u32)(I2C_FLAG >> 16); + /* Get the I2Cx SR2 register address */ + i2cxbase += 0x18; + } + + if(((*(vu32 *)i2cxbase) & I2C_FLAG) != (u32)RESET) + { + /* I2C_FLAG is set */ + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* I2C_FLAG is reset */ + bitstatus = RESET; + } + + /* Return the I2C_FLAG status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : I2C_ClearFlag +* Description : Clears the I2Cx's pending flags. +* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. +* - I2C_FLAG: specifies the flag to clear. +* This parameter can be any combination of the following +* values: +* - I2C_FLAG_SMBALERT: SMBus Alert flag +* - I2C_FLAG_TIMEOUT: Timeout or Tlow error flag +* - I2C_FLAG_PECERR: PEC error in reception flag +* - I2C_FLAG_OVR: Overrun/Underrun flag (Slave mode) +* - I2C_FLAG_AF: Acknowledge failure flag +* - I2C_FLAG_ARLO: Arbitration lost flag (Master mode) +* - I2C_FLAG_BERR: Bus error flag +* +* Notes: +* - STOPF (STOP detection) is cleared by software +* sequence: a read operation to I2C_SR1 register +* (I2C_GetFlagStatus()) followed by a write operation +* to I2C_CR1 register (I2C_Cmd() to re-enable the +* I2C peripheral). +* - ADD10 (10-bit header sent) is cleared by software +* sequence: a read operation to I2C_SR1 +* (I2C_GetFlagStatus()) followed by writing the +* second byte of the address in DR register. +* - BTF (Byte Transfer Finished) is cleared by software +* sequence: a read operation to I2C_SR1 register +* (I2C_GetFlagStatus()) followed by a read/write to +* I2C_DR register (I2C_SendData()). +* - ADDR (Address sent) is cleared by software sequence: +* a read operation to I2C_SR1 register +* (I2C_GetFlagStatus()) followed by a read operation to +* I2C_SR2 register ((void)(I2Cx->SR2)). +* - SB (Start Bit) is cleared software sequence: a read +* operation to I2C_SR1 register (I2C_GetFlagStatus()) +* followed by a write operation to I2C_DR reigister +* (I2C_SendData()). +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void I2C_ClearFlag(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, u32 I2C_FLAG) +{ + u32 flagpos = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_I2C_CLEAR_FLAG(I2C_FLAG)); + + /* Get the I2C flag position */ + flagpos = I2C_FLAG & FLAG_Mask; + + /* Clear the selected I2C flag */ + I2Cx->SR1 = (u16)~flagpos; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : I2C_GetITStatus +* Description : Checks whether the specified I2C interrupt has occurred or not. +* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. +* - I2C_IT: specifies the interrupt source to check. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - I2C_IT_SMBALERT: SMBus Alert flag +* - I2C_IT_TIMEOUT: Timeout or Tlow error flag +* - I2C_IT_PECERR: PEC error in reception flag +* - I2C_IT_OVR: Overrun/Underrun flag (Slave mode) +* - I2C_IT_AF: Acknowledge failure flag +* - I2C_IT_ARLO: Arbitration lost flag (Master mode) +* - I2C_IT_BERR: Bus error flag +* - I2C_IT_TXE: Data register empty flag (Transmitter) +* - I2C_IT_RXNE: Data register not empty (Receiver) flag +* - I2C_IT_STOPF: Stop detection flag (Slave mode) +* - I2C_IT_ADD10: 10-bit header sent flag (Master mode) +* - I2C_IT_BTF: Byte transfer finished flag +* - I2C_IT_ADDR: Address sent flag (Master mode) “ADSL” +* Address matched flag (Slave mode)”ENDAD” +* - I2C_IT_SB: Start bit flag (Master mode) +* Output : None +* Return : The new state of I2C_IT (SET or RESET). +*******************************************************************************/ +ITStatus I2C_GetITStatus(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, u32 I2C_IT) +{ + ITStatus bitstatus = RESET; + u32 enablestatus = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_I2C_GET_IT(I2C_IT)); + + /* Check if the interrupt source is enabled or not */ + enablestatus = (u32)(((I2C_IT & ITEN_Mask) >> 16) & (I2Cx->CR2)) ; + + /* Get bit[23:0] of the flag */ + I2C_IT &= FLAG_Mask; + + /* Check the status of the specified I2C flag */ + if (((I2Cx->SR1 & I2C_IT) != (u32)RESET) && enablestatus) + { + /* I2C_IT is set */ + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* I2C_IT is reset */ + bitstatus = RESET; + } + /* Return the I2C_IT status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : I2C_ClearITPendingBit +* Description : Clears the I2Cx’s interrupt pending bits. +* Input : - I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. +* - I2C_IT: specifies the interrupt pending bit to clear. +* This parameter can be any combination of the following +* values: +* - I2C_IT_SMBALERT: SMBus Alert interrupt +* - I2C_IT_TIMEOUT: Timeout or Tlow error interrupt +* - I2C_IT_PECERR: PEC error in reception interrupt +* - I2C_IT_OVR: Overrun/Underrun interrupt (Slave mode) +* - I2C_IT_AF: Acknowledge failure interrupt +* - I2C_IT_ARLO: Arbitration lost interrupt (Master mode) +* - I2C_IT_BERR: Bus error interrupt +* +* Notes: +* - STOPF (STOP detection) is cleared by software +* sequence: a read operation to I2C_SR1 register +* (I2C_GetITStatus()) followed by a write operation to +* I2C_CR1 register (I2C_Cmd() to re-enable the I2C +* peripheral). +* - ADD10 (10-bit header sent) is cleared by software +* sequence: a read operation to I2C_SR1 +* (I2C_GetITStatus()) followed by writing the second +* byte of the address in I2C_DR register. +* - BTF (Byte Transfer Finished) is cleared by software +* sequence: a read operation to I2C_SR1 register +* (I2C_GetITStatus()) followed by a read/write to +* I2C_DR register (I2C_SendData()). +* - ADDR (Address sent) is cleared by software sequence: +* a read operation to I2C_SR1 register (I2C_GetITStatus()) +* followed by a read operation to I2C_SR2 register +* ((void)(I2Cx->SR2)). +* - SB (Start Bit) is cleared by software sequence: a +* read operation to I2C_SR1 register (I2C_GetITStatus()) +* followed by a write operation to I2C_DR reigister +* (I2C_SendData()). +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void I2C_ClearITPendingBit(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, u32 I2C_IT) +{ + u32 flagpos = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_I2C_CLEAR_IT(I2C_IT)); + + /* Get the I2C flag position */ + flagpos = I2C_IT & FLAG_Mask; + + /* Clear the selected I2C flag */ + I2Cx->SR1 = (u16)~flagpos; +} + +/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_iwdg.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_iwdg.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..77cb094 --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_iwdg.c @@ -0,0 +1,148 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ******************** +* File Name : stm32f10x_iwdg.c +* Author : MCD Application Team +* Version : V2.0.2 +* Date : 07/11/2008 +* Description : This file provides all the IWDG firmware functions. +******************************************************************************** +* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS +* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME. +* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, +* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE +* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING +* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS. +*******************************************************************************/ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32f10x_iwdg.h" + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* ---------------------- IWDG registers bit mask ------------------------ */ +/* KR register bit mask */ +#define KR_KEY_Reload ((u16)0xAAAA) +#define KR_KEY_Enable ((u16)0xCCCC) + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : IWDG_WriteAccessCmd +* Description : Enables or disables write access to IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR +* registers. +* Input : - IWDG_WriteAccess: new state of write access to IWDG_PR and +* IWDG_RLR registers. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - IWDG_WriteAccess_Enable: Enable write access to +* IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers +* - IWDG_WriteAccess_Disable: Disable write access to +* IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void IWDG_WriteAccessCmd(u16 IWDG_WriteAccess) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_IWDG_WRITE_ACCESS(IWDG_WriteAccess)); + + IWDG->KR = IWDG_WriteAccess; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : IWDG_SetPrescaler +* Description : Sets IWDG Prescaler value. +* Input : - IWDG_Prescaler: specifies the IWDG Prescaler value. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - IWDG_Prescaler_4: IWDG prescaler set to 4 +* - IWDG_Prescaler_8: IWDG prescaler set to 8 +* - IWDG_Prescaler_16: IWDG prescaler set to 16 +* - IWDG_Prescaler_32: IWDG prescaler set to 32 +* - IWDG_Prescaler_64: IWDG prescaler set to 64 +* - IWDG_Prescaler_128: IWDG prescaler set to 128 +* - IWDG_Prescaler_256: IWDG prescaler set to 256 +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void IWDG_SetPrescaler(u8 IWDG_Prescaler) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_IWDG_PRESCALER(IWDG_Prescaler)); + + IWDG->PR = IWDG_Prescaler; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : IWDG_SetReload +* Description : Sets IWDG Reload value. +* Input : - Reload: specifies the IWDG Reload value. +* This parameter must be a number between 0 and 0x0FFF. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void IWDG_SetReload(u16 Reload) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_IWDG_RELOAD(Reload)); + + IWDG->RLR = Reload; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : IWDG_ReloadCounter +* Description : Reloads IWDG counter with value defined in the reload register +* (write access to IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers disabled). +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void IWDG_ReloadCounter(void) +{ + IWDG->KR = KR_KEY_Reload; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : IWDG_Enable +* Description : Enables IWDG (write access to IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers +* disabled). +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void IWDG_Enable(void) +{ + IWDG->KR = KR_KEY_Enable; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : IWDG_GetFlagStatus +* Description : Checks whether the specified IWDG flag is set or not. +* Input : - IWDG_FLAG: specifies the flag to check. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - IWDG_FLAG_PVU: Prescaler Value Update on going +* - IWDG_FLAG_RVU: Reload Value Update on going +* Output : None +* Return : The new state of IWDG_FLAG (SET or RESET). +*******************************************************************************/ +FlagStatus IWDG_GetFlagStatus(u16 IWDG_FLAG) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_IWDG_FLAG(IWDG_FLAG)); + + if ((IWDG->SR & IWDG_FLAG) != (u32)RESET) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + + /* Return the flag status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_lib.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_lib.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..21d5ce5 --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_lib.c @@ -0,0 +1,303 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ******************** +* File Name : stm32f10x_lib.c +* Author : MCD Application Team +* Version : V2.0.2 +* Date : 07/11/2008 +* Description : This file provides all peripherals pointers initialization. +******************************************************************************** +* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS +* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME. +* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, +* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE +* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING +* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS. +*******************************************************************************/ + +#define EXT + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32f10x_lib.h" + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +#ifdef DEBUG +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : debug +* Description : This function initialize peripherals pointers. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void debug(void) +{ + +/************************************* ADC ************************************/ +#ifdef _ADC1 + ADC1 = (ADC_TypeDef *) ADC1_BASE; +#endif /*_ADC1 */ + +#ifdef _ADC2 + ADC2 = (ADC_TypeDef *) ADC2_BASE; +#endif /*_ADC2 */ + +#ifdef _ADC3 + ADC3 = (ADC_TypeDef *) ADC3_BASE; +#endif /*_ADC3 */ + +/************************************* BKP ************************************/ +#ifdef _BKP + BKP = (BKP_TypeDef *) BKP_BASE; +#endif /*_BKP */ + +/************************************* CAN ************************************/ +#ifdef _CAN + CAN = (CAN_TypeDef *) CAN_BASE; +#endif /*_CAN */ + +/************************************* CRC ************************************/ +#ifdef _CRC + CRC = (CRC_TypeDef *) CRC_BASE; +#endif /*_CRC */ + +/************************************* DAC ************************************/ +#ifdef _DAC + DAC = (DAC_TypeDef *) DAC_BASE; +#endif /*_DAC */ + +/************************************* DBGMCU**********************************/ +#ifdef _DBGMCU + DBGMCU = (DBGMCU_TypeDef *) DBGMCU_BASE; +#endif /*_DBGMCU */ + +/************************************* DMA ************************************/ +#ifdef _DMA + DMA1 = (DMA_TypeDef *) DMA1_BASE; + DMA2 = (DMA_TypeDef *) DMA2_BASE; +#endif /*_DMA */ + +#ifdef _DMA1_Channel1 + DMA1_Channel1 = (DMA_Channel_TypeDef *) DMA1_Channel1_BASE; +#endif /*_DMA1_Channel1 */ + +#ifdef _DMA1_Channel2 + DMA1_Channel2 = (DMA_Channel_TypeDef *) DMA1_Channel2_BASE; +#endif /*_DMA1_Channel2 */ + +#ifdef _DMA1_Channel3 + DMA1_Channel3 = (DMA_Channel_TypeDef *) DMA1_Channel3_BASE; +#endif /*_DMA1_Channel3 */ + +#ifdef _DMA1_Channel4 + DMA1_Channel4 = (DMA_Channel_TypeDef *) DMA1_Channel4_BASE; +#endif /*_DMA1_Channel4 */ + +#ifdef _DMA1_Channel5 + DMA1_Channel5 = (DMA_Channel_TypeDef *) DMA1_Channel5_BASE; +#endif /*_DMA1_Channel5 */ + +#ifdef _DMA1_Channel6 + DMA1_Channel6 = (DMA_Channel_TypeDef *) DMA1_Channel6_BASE; +#endif /*_DMA1_Channel6 */ + +#ifdef _DMA1_Channel7 + DMA1_Channel7 = (DMA_Channel_TypeDef *) DMA1_Channel7_BASE; +#endif /*_DMA1_Channel7 */ + +#ifdef _DMA2_Channel1 + DMA2_Channel1 = (DMA_Channel_TypeDef *) DMA2_Channel1_BASE; +#endif /*_DMA2_Channel1 */ + +#ifdef _DMA2_Channel2 + DMA2_Channel2 = (DMA_Channel_TypeDef *) DMA2_Channel2_BASE; +#endif /*_DMA2_Channel2 */ + +#ifdef _DMA2_Channel3 + DMA2_Channel3 = (DMA_Channel_TypeDef *) DMA2_Channel3_BASE; +#endif /*_DMA2_Channel3 */ + +#ifdef _DMA2_Channel4 + DMA2_Channel4 = (DMA_Channel_TypeDef *) DMA2_Channel4_BASE; +#endif /*_DMA2_Channel4 */ + +#ifdef _DMA2_Channel5 + DMA2_Channel5 = (DMA_Channel_TypeDef *) DMA2_Channel5_BASE; +#endif /*_DMA2_Channel5 */ + +/************************************* EXTI ***********************************/ +#ifdef _EXTI + EXTI = (EXTI_TypeDef *) EXTI_BASE; +#endif /*_EXTI */ + +/************************************* FLASH and Option Bytes *****************/ +#ifdef _FLASH + FLASH = (FLASH_TypeDef *) FLASH_R_BASE; + OB = (OB_TypeDef *) OB_BASE; +#endif /*_FLASH */ + +/************************************* FSMC ***********************************/ +#ifdef _FSMC + FSMC_Bank1 = (FSMC_Bank1_TypeDef *) FSMC_Bank1_R_BASE; + FSMC_Bank1E = (FSMC_Bank1E_TypeDef *) FSMC_Bank1E_R_BASE; + FSMC_Bank2 = (FSMC_Bank2_TypeDef *) FSMC_Bank2_R_BASE; + FSMC_Bank3 = (FSMC_Bank3_TypeDef *) FSMC_Bank3_R_BASE; + FSMC_Bank4 = (FSMC_Bank4_TypeDef *) FSMC_Bank4_R_BASE; +#endif /*_FSMC */ + +/************************************* GPIO ***********************************/ +#ifdef _GPIOA + GPIOA = (GPIO_TypeDef *) GPIOA_BASE; +#endif /*_GPIOA */ + +#ifdef _GPIOB + GPIOB = (GPIO_TypeDef *) GPIOB_BASE; +#endif /*_GPIOB */ + +#ifdef _GPIOC + GPIOC = (GPIO_TypeDef *) GPIOC_BASE; +#endif /*_GPIOC */ + +#ifdef _GPIOD + GPIOD = (GPIO_TypeDef *) GPIOD_BASE; +#endif /*_GPIOD */ + +#ifdef _GPIOE + GPIOE = (GPIO_TypeDef *) GPIOE_BASE; +#endif /*_GPIOE */ + +#ifdef _GPIOF + GPIOF = (GPIO_TypeDef *) GPIOF_BASE; +#endif /*_GPIOF */ + +#ifdef _GPIOG + GPIOG = (GPIO_TypeDef *) GPIOG_BASE; +#endif /*_GPIOG */ + +#ifdef _AFIO + AFIO = (AFIO_TypeDef *) AFIO_BASE; +#endif /*_AFIO */ + +/************************************* I2C ************************************/ +#ifdef _I2C1 + I2C1 = (I2C_TypeDef *) I2C1_BASE; +#endif /*_I2C1 */ + +#ifdef _I2C2 + I2C2 = (I2C_TypeDef *) I2C2_BASE; +#endif /*_I2C2 */ + +/************************************* IWDG ***********************************/ +#ifdef _IWDG + IWDG = (IWDG_TypeDef *) IWDG_BASE; +#endif /*_IWDG */ + +/************************************* NVIC ***********************************/ +#ifdef _NVIC + NVIC = (NVIC_TypeDef *) NVIC_BASE; + SCB = (SCB_TypeDef *) SCB_BASE; +#endif /*_NVIC */ + +/************************************* PWR ************************************/ +#ifdef _PWR + PWR = (PWR_TypeDef *) PWR_BASE; +#endif /*_PWR */ + +/************************************* RCC ************************************/ +#ifdef _RCC + RCC = (RCC_TypeDef *) RCC_BASE; +#endif /*_RCC */ + +/************************************* RTC ************************************/ +#ifdef _RTC + RTC = (RTC_TypeDef *) RTC_BASE; +#endif /*_RTC */ + +/************************************* SDIO ***********************************/ +#ifdef _SDIO + SDIO = (SDIO_TypeDef *) SDIO_BASE; +#endif /*_SDIO */ + +/************************************* SPI ************************************/ +#ifdef _SPI1 + SPI1 = (SPI_TypeDef *) SPI1_BASE; +#endif /*_SPI1 */ + +#ifdef _SPI2 + SPI2 = (SPI_TypeDef *) SPI2_BASE; +#endif /*_SPI2 */ + +#ifdef _SPI3 + SPI3 = (SPI_TypeDef *) SPI3_BASE; +#endif /*_SPI3 */ + +/************************************* SysTick ********************************/ +#ifdef _SysTick + SysTick = (SysTick_TypeDef *) SysTick_BASE; +#endif /*_SysTick */ + +/************************************* TIM ************************************/ +#ifdef _TIM1 + TIM1 = (TIM_TypeDef *) TIM1_BASE; +#endif /*_TIM1 */ + +#ifdef _TIM2 + TIM2 = (TIM_TypeDef *) TIM2_BASE; +#endif /*_TIM2 */ + +#ifdef _TIM3 + TIM3 = (TIM_TypeDef *) TIM3_BASE; +#endif /*_TIM3 */ + +#ifdef _TIM4 + TIM4 = (TIM_TypeDef *) TIM4_BASE; +#endif /*_TIM4 */ + +#ifdef _TIM5 + TIM5 = (TIM_TypeDef *) TIM5_BASE; +#endif /*_TIM5 */ + +#ifdef _TIM6 + TIM6 = (TIM_TypeDef *) TIM6_BASE; +#endif /*_TIM6 */ + +#ifdef _TIM7 + TIM7 = (TIM_TypeDef *) TIM7_BASE; +#endif /*_TIM7 */ + +#ifdef _TIM8 + TIM8 = (TIM_TypeDef *) TIM8_BASE; +#endif /*_TIM8 */ + +/************************************* USART **********************************/ +#ifdef _USART1 + USART1 = (USART_TypeDef *) USART1_BASE; +#endif /*_USART1 */ + +#ifdef _USART2 + USART2 = (USART_TypeDef *) USART2_BASE; +#endif /*_USART2 */ + +#ifdef _USART3 + USART3 = (USART_TypeDef *) USART3_BASE; +#endif /*_USART3 */ + +#ifdef _UART4 + UART4 = (USART_TypeDef *) UART4_BASE; +#endif /*_UART4 */ + +#ifdef _UART5 + UART5 = (USART_TypeDef *) UART5_BASE; +#endif /*_UART5 */ + +/************************************* WWDG ***********************************/ +#ifdef _WWDG + WWDG = (WWDG_TypeDef *) WWDG_BASE; +#endif /*_WWDG */ +} +#endif /* DEBUG*/ + +/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_nvic.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_nvic.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0ce30af --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_nvic.c @@ -0,0 +1,751 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ******************** +* File Name : stm32f10x_nvic.c +* Author : MCD Application Team +* Version : V2.0.2 +* Date : 07/11/2008 +* Description : This file provides all the NVIC firmware functions. +******************************************************************************** +* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS +* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME. +* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, +* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE +* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING +* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS. +*******************************************************************************/ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32f10x_nvic.h" + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#define AIRCR_VECTKEY_MASK ((u32)0x05FA0000) + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : NVIC_DeInit +* Description : Deinitializes the NVIC peripheral registers to their default +* reset values. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void NVIC_DeInit(void) +{ + u32 index = 0; + + NVIC->ICER[0] = 0xFFFFFFFF; + NVIC->ICER[1] = 0x0FFFFFFF; + NVIC->ICPR[0] = 0xFFFFFFFF; + NVIC->ICPR[1] = 0x0FFFFFFF; + + for(index = 0; index < 0x0F; index++) + { + NVIC->IPR[index] = 0x00000000; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : NVIC_SCBDeInit +* Description : Deinitializes the SCB peripheral registers to their default +* reset values. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void NVIC_SCBDeInit(void) +{ + u32 index = 0x00; + + SCB->ICSR = 0x0A000000; + SCB->VTOR = 0x00000000; + SCB->AIRCR = AIRCR_VECTKEY_MASK; + SCB->SCR = 0x00000000; + SCB->CCR = 0x00000000; + for(index = 0; index < 0x03; index++) + { + SCB->SHPR[index] = 0; + } + SCB->SHCSR = 0x00000000; + SCB->CFSR = 0xFFFFFFFF; + SCB->HFSR = 0xFFFFFFFF; + SCB->DFSR = 0xFFFFFFFF; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : NVIC_PriorityGroupConfig +* Description : Configures the priority grouping: pre-emption priority +* and subpriority. +* Input : - NVIC_PriorityGroup: specifies the priority grouping bits +* length. This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - NVIC_PriorityGroup_0: 0 bits for pre-emption priority +* 4 bits for subpriority +* - NVIC_PriorityGroup_1: 1 bits for pre-emption priority +* 3 bits for subpriority +* - NVIC_PriorityGroup_2: 2 bits for pre-emption priority +* 2 bits for subpriority +* - NVIC_PriorityGroup_3: 3 bits for pre-emption priority +* 1 bits for subpriority +* - NVIC_PriorityGroup_4: 4 bits for pre-emption priority +* 0 bits for subpriority +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void NVIC_PriorityGroupConfig(u32 NVIC_PriorityGroup) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_NVIC_PRIORITY_GROUP(NVIC_PriorityGroup)); + + /* Set the PRIGROUP[10:8] bits according to NVIC_PriorityGroup value */ + SCB->AIRCR = AIRCR_VECTKEY_MASK | NVIC_PriorityGroup; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : NVIC_Init +* Description : Initializes the NVIC peripheral according to the specified +* parameters in the NVIC_InitStruct. +* Input : - NVIC_InitStruct: pointer to a NVIC_InitTypeDef structure +* that contains the configuration information for the +* specified NVIC peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void NVIC_Init(NVIC_InitTypeDef* NVIC_InitStruct) +{ + u32 tmppriority = 0x00, tmpreg = 0x00, tmpmask = 0x00; + u32 tmppre = 0, tmpsub = 0x0F; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannelCmd)); + assert_param(IS_NVIC_IRQ_CHANNEL(NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannel)); + assert_param(IS_NVIC_PREEMPTION_PRIORITY(NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannelPreemptionPriority)); + assert_param(IS_NVIC_SUB_PRIORITY(NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannelSubPriority)); + + if (NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannelCmd != DISABLE) + { + /* Compute the Corresponding IRQ Priority --------------------------------*/ + tmppriority = (0x700 - (SCB->AIRCR & (u32)0x700))>> 0x08; + tmppre = (0x4 - tmppriority); + tmpsub = tmpsub >> tmppriority; + + tmppriority = (u32)NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannelPreemptionPriority << tmppre; + tmppriority |= NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannelSubPriority & tmpsub; + + tmppriority = tmppriority << 0x04; + tmppriority = ((u32)tmppriority) << ((NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannel & (u8)0x03) * 0x08); + + tmpreg = NVIC->IPR[(NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannel >> 0x02)]; + tmpmask = (u32)0xFF << ((NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannel & (u8)0x03) * 0x08); + tmpreg &= ~tmpmask; + tmppriority &= tmpmask; + tmpreg |= tmppriority; + + NVIC->IPR[(NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannel >> 0x02)] = tmpreg; + + /* Enable the Selected IRQ Channels --------------------------------------*/ + NVIC->ISER[(NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannel >> 0x05)] = + (u32)0x01 << (NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannel & (u8)0x1F); + } + else + { + /* Disable the Selected IRQ Channels -------------------------------------*/ + NVIC->ICER[(NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannel >> 0x05)] = + (u32)0x01 << (NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannel & (u8)0x1F); + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : NVIC_StructInit +* Description : Fills each NVIC_InitStruct member with its default value. +* Input : - NVIC_InitStruct: pointer to a NVIC_InitTypeDef structure which +* will be initialized. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void NVIC_StructInit(NVIC_InitTypeDef* NVIC_InitStruct) +{ + /* NVIC_InitStruct members default value */ + NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannel = 0x00; + NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannelPreemptionPriority = 0x00; + NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannelSubPriority = 0x00; + NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannelCmd = DISABLE; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : NVIC_SETPRIMASK +* Description : Enables the PRIMASK priority: Raises the execution priority to 0. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void NVIC_SETPRIMASK(void) +{ + __SETPRIMASK(); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : NVIC_RESETPRIMASK +* Description : Disables the PRIMASK priority. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void NVIC_RESETPRIMASK(void) +{ + __RESETPRIMASK(); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : NVIC_SETFAULTMASK +* Description : Enables the FAULTMASK priority: Raises the execution priority to -1. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void NVIC_SETFAULTMASK(void) +{ + __SETFAULTMASK(); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : NVIC_RESETFAULTMASK +* Description : Disables the FAULTMASK priority. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void NVIC_RESETFAULTMASK(void) +{ + __RESETFAULTMASK(); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : NVIC_BASEPRICONFIG +* Description : The execution priority can be changed from 15 (lowest + configurable priority) to 1. Writing a zero value will disable +* the mask of execution priority. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void NVIC_BASEPRICONFIG(u32 NewPriority) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_NVIC_BASE_PRI(NewPriority)); + + __BASEPRICONFIG(NewPriority << 0x04); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : NVIC_GetBASEPRI +* Description : Returns the BASEPRI mask value. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : BASEPRI register value +*******************************************************************************/ +u32 NVIC_GetBASEPRI(void) +{ + return (__GetBASEPRI()); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : NVIC_GetCurrentPendingIRQChannel +* Description : Returns the current pending IRQ channel identifier. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : Pending IRQ Channel Identifier. +*******************************************************************************/ +u16 NVIC_GetCurrentPendingIRQChannel(void) +{ + return ((u16)((SCB->ICSR & (u32)0x003FF000) >> 0x0C)); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : NVIC_GetIRQChannelPendingBitStatus +* Description : Checks whether the specified IRQ Channel pending bit is set +* or not. +* Input : - NVIC_IRQChannel: specifies the interrupt pending bit to check. +* Output : None +* Return : The new state of IRQ Channel pending bit(SET or RESET). +*******************************************************************************/ +ITStatus NVIC_GetIRQChannelPendingBitStatus(u8 NVIC_IRQChannel) +{ + ITStatus pendingirqstatus = RESET; + u32 tmp = 0x00; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_NVIC_IRQ_CHANNEL(NVIC_IRQChannel)); + + tmp = ((u32)0x01 << (NVIC_IRQChannel & (u32)0x1F)); + + if (((NVIC->ISPR[(NVIC_IRQChannel >> 0x05)]) & tmp) == tmp) + { + pendingirqstatus = SET; + } + else + { + pendingirqstatus = RESET; + } + return pendingirqstatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : NVIC_SetIRQChannelPendingBit +* Description : Sets the NVIC’s interrupt pending bit. +* Input : - NVIC_IRQChannel: specifies the interrupt pending bit to Set. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void NVIC_SetIRQChannelPendingBit(u8 NVIC_IRQChannel) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_NVIC_IRQ_CHANNEL(NVIC_IRQChannel)); + + *(vu32*) 0xE000EF00 = (u32)NVIC_IRQChannel; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : NVIC_ClearIRQChannelPendingBit +* Description : Clears the NVIC’s interrupt pending bit. +* Input : - NVIC_IRQChannel: specifies the interrupt pending bit to clear. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void NVIC_ClearIRQChannelPendingBit(u8 NVIC_IRQChannel) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_NVIC_IRQ_CHANNEL(NVIC_IRQChannel)); + + NVIC->ICPR[(NVIC_IRQChannel >> 0x05)] = (u32)0x01 << (NVIC_IRQChannel & (u32)0x1F); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : NVIC_GetCurrentActiveHandler +* Description : Returns the current active Handler (IRQ Channel and +* SystemHandler) identifier. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : Active Handler Identifier. +*******************************************************************************/ +u16 NVIC_GetCurrentActiveHandler(void) +{ + return ((u16)(SCB->ICSR & (u32)0x3FF)); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : NVIC_GetIRQChannelActiveBitStatus +* Description : Checks whether the specified IRQ Channel active bit is set +* or not. +* Input : - NVIC_IRQChannel: specifies the interrupt active bit to check. +* Output : None +* Return : The new state of IRQ Channel active bit(SET or RESET). +*******************************************************************************/ +ITStatus NVIC_GetIRQChannelActiveBitStatus(u8 NVIC_IRQChannel) +{ + ITStatus activeirqstatus = RESET; + u32 tmp = 0x00; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_NVIC_IRQ_CHANNEL(NVIC_IRQChannel)); + + tmp = ((u32)0x01 << (NVIC_IRQChannel & (u32)0x1F)); + + if (((NVIC->IABR[(NVIC_IRQChannel >> 0x05)]) & tmp) == tmp ) + { + activeirqstatus = SET; + } + else + { + activeirqstatus = RESET; + } + return activeirqstatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : NVIC_GetCPUID +* Description : Returns the ID number, the version number and the implementation +* details of the Cortex-M3 core. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : CPU ID. +*******************************************************************************/ +u32 NVIC_GetCPUID(void) +{ + return (SCB->CPUID); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : NVIC_SetVectorTable +* Description : Sets the vector table location and Offset. +* Input : - NVIC_VectTab: specifies if the vector table is in RAM or +* FLASH memory. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - NVIC_VectTab_RAM +* - NVIC_VectTab_FLASH +* - Offset: Vector Table base offset field. +* This value must be a multiple of 0x100. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void NVIC_SetVectorTable(u32 NVIC_VectTab, u32 Offset) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_NVIC_VECTTAB(NVIC_VectTab)); + assert_param(IS_NVIC_OFFSET(Offset)); + + SCB->VTOR = NVIC_VectTab | (Offset & (u32)0x1FFFFF80); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : NVIC_GenerateSystemReset +* Description : Generates a system reset. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void NVIC_GenerateSystemReset(void) +{ + SCB->AIRCR = AIRCR_VECTKEY_MASK | (u32)0x04; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : NVIC_GenerateCoreReset +* Description : Generates a Core (Core + NVIC) reset. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void NVIC_GenerateCoreReset(void) +{ + SCB->AIRCR = AIRCR_VECTKEY_MASK | (u32)0x01; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : NVIC_SystemLPConfig +* Description : Selects the condition for the system to enter low power mode. +* Input : - LowPowerMode: Specifies the new mode for the system to enter +* low power mode. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - NVIC_LP_SEVONPEND +* - NVIC_LP_SLEEPDEEP +* - NVIC_LP_SLEEPONEXIT +* - NewState: new state of LP condition. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void NVIC_SystemLPConfig(u8 LowPowerMode, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_NVIC_LP(LowPowerMode)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + SCB->SCR |= LowPowerMode; + } + else + { + SCB->SCR &= (u32)(~(u32)LowPowerMode); + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : NVIC_SystemHandlerConfig +* Description : Enables or disables the specified System Handlers. +* Input : - SystemHandler: specifies the system handler to be enabled +* or disabled. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - SystemHandler_MemoryManage +* - SystemHandler_BusFault +* - SystemHandler_UsageFault +* - NewState: new state of specified System Handlers. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void NVIC_SystemHandlerConfig(u32 SystemHandler, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + u32 tmpreg = 0x00; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_CONFIG_SYSTEM_HANDLER(SystemHandler)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + tmpreg = (u32)0x01 << (SystemHandler & (u32)0x1F); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + SCB->SHCSR |= tmpreg; + } + else + { + SCB->SHCSR &= ~tmpreg; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : NVIC_SystemHandlerPriorityConfig +* Description : Configures the specified System Handlers priority. +* Input : - SystemHandler: specifies the system handler to be +* enabled or disabled. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - SystemHandler_MemoryManage +* - SystemHandler_BusFault +* - SystemHandler_UsageFault +* - SystemHandler_SVCall +* - SystemHandler_DebugMonitor +* - SystemHandler_PSV +* - SystemHandler_SysTick +* - SystemHandlerPreemptionPriority: new priority group of the +* specified system handlers. +* - SystemHandlerSubPriority: new sub priority of the specified +* system handlers. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void NVIC_SystemHandlerPriorityConfig(u32 SystemHandler, u8 SystemHandlerPreemptionPriority, + u8 SystemHandlerSubPriority) +{ + u32 tmp1 = 0x00, tmp2 = 0xFF, handlermask = 0x00; + u32 tmppriority = 0x00; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_PRIORITY_SYSTEM_HANDLER(SystemHandler)); + assert_param(IS_NVIC_PREEMPTION_PRIORITY(SystemHandlerPreemptionPriority)); + assert_param(IS_NVIC_SUB_PRIORITY(SystemHandlerSubPriority)); + + tmppriority = (0x700 - (SCB->AIRCR & (u32)0x700))>> 0x08; + tmp1 = (0x4 - tmppriority); + tmp2 = tmp2 >> tmppriority; + + tmppriority = (u32)SystemHandlerPreemptionPriority << tmp1; + tmppriority |= SystemHandlerSubPriority & tmp2; + + tmppriority = tmppriority << 0x04; + tmp1 = SystemHandler & (u32)0xC0; + tmp1 = tmp1 >> 0x06; + tmp2 = (SystemHandler >> 0x08) & (u32)0x03; + tmppriority = tmppriority << (tmp2 * 0x08); + handlermask = (u32)0xFF << (tmp2 * 0x08); + + SCB->SHPR[tmp1] &= ~handlermask; + SCB->SHPR[tmp1] |= tmppriority; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : NVIC_GetSystemHandlerPendingBitStatus +* Description : Checks whether the specified System handlers pending bit is +* set or not. +* Input : - SystemHandler: specifies the system handler pending bit to +* check. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - SystemHandler_MemoryManage +* - SystemHandler_BusFault +* - SystemHandler_SVCall +* Output : None +* Return : The new state of System Handler pending bit(SET or RESET). +*******************************************************************************/ +ITStatus NVIC_GetSystemHandlerPendingBitStatus(u32 SystemHandler) +{ + ITStatus bitstatus = RESET; + u32 tmp = 0x00, tmppos = 0x00; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GET_PENDING_SYSTEM_HANDLER(SystemHandler)); + + tmppos = (SystemHandler >> 0x0A); + tmppos &= (u32)0x0F; + + tmppos = (u32)0x01 << tmppos; + + tmp = SCB->SHCSR & tmppos; + + if (tmp == tmppos) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + return bitstatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : NVIC_SetSystemHandlerPendingBit +* Description : Sets System Handler pending bit. +* Input : - SystemHandler: specifies the system handler pending bit +* to be set. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - SystemHandler_NMI +* - SystemHandler_PSV +* - SystemHandler_SysTick +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void NVIC_SetSystemHandlerPendingBit(u32 SystemHandler) +{ + u32 tmp = 0x00; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SET_PENDING_SYSTEM_HANDLER(SystemHandler)); + + /* Get the System Handler pending bit position */ + tmp = SystemHandler & (u32)0x1F; + /* Set the corresponding System Handler pending bit */ + SCB->ICSR |= ((u32)0x01 << tmp); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : NVIC_ClearSystemHandlerPendingBit +* Description : Clears System Handler pending bit. +* Input : - SystemHandler: specifies the system handler pending bit to +* be clear. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - SystemHandler_PSV +* - SystemHandler_SysTick +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void NVIC_ClearSystemHandlerPendingBit(u32 SystemHandler) +{ + u32 tmp = 0x00; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_CLEAR_SYSTEM_HANDLER(SystemHandler)); + + /* Get the System Handler pending bit position */ + tmp = SystemHandler & (u32)0x1F; + /* Clear the corresponding System Handler pending bit */ + SCB->ICSR |= ((u32)0x01 << (tmp - 0x01)); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : NVIC_GetSystemHandlerActiveBitStatus +* Description : Checks whether the specified System handlers active bit is +* set or not. +* Input : - SystemHandler: specifies the system handler active bit to +* check. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - SystemHandler_MemoryManage +* - SystemHandler_BusFault +* - SystemHandler_UsageFault +* - SystemHandler_SVCall +* - SystemHandler_DebugMonitor +* - SystemHandler_PSV +* - SystemHandler_SysTick +* Output : None +* Return : The new state of System Handler active bit(SET or RESET). +*******************************************************************************/ +ITStatus NVIC_GetSystemHandlerActiveBitStatus(u32 SystemHandler) +{ + ITStatus bitstatus = RESET; + + u32 tmp = 0x00, tmppos = 0x00; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GET_ACTIVE_SYSTEM_HANDLER(SystemHandler)); + + tmppos = (SystemHandler >> 0x0E) & (u32)0x0F; + + tmppos = (u32)0x01 << tmppos; + + tmp = SCB->SHCSR & tmppos; + + if (tmp == tmppos) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + return bitstatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : NVIC_GetFaultHandlerSources +* Description : Returns the system fault handlers sources. +* Input : - SystemHandler: specifies the system handler to get its fault +* sources. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - SystemHandler_HardFault +* - SystemHandler_MemoryManage +* - SystemHandler_BusFault +* - SystemHandler_UsageFault +* - SystemHandler_DebugMonitor +* Output : None +* Return : Source of the fault handler. +*******************************************************************************/ +u32 NVIC_GetFaultHandlerSources(u32 SystemHandler) +{ + u32 faultsources = 0x00; + u32 tmpreg = 0x00, tmppos = 0x00; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FAULT_SOURCE_SYSTEM_HANDLER(SystemHandler)); + + tmpreg = (SystemHandler >> 0x12) & (u32)0x03; + tmppos = (SystemHandler >> 0x14) & (u32)0x03; + + if (tmpreg == 0x00) + { + faultsources = SCB->HFSR; + } + else if (tmpreg == 0x01) + { + faultsources = SCB->CFSR >> (tmppos * 0x08); + if (tmppos != 0x02) + { + faultsources &= (u32)0x0F; + } + else + { + faultsources &= (u32)0xFF; + } + } + else + { + faultsources = SCB->DFSR; + } + return faultsources; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : NVIC_GetFaultAddress +* Description : Returns the address of the location that generated a fault +* handler. +* Input : - SystemHandler: specifies the system handler to get its +* fault address. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - SystemHandler_MemoryManage +* - SystemHandler_BusFault +* Output : None +* Return : Fault address. +*******************************************************************************/ +u32 NVIC_GetFaultAddress(u32 SystemHandler) +{ + u32 faultaddress = 0x00; + u32 tmp = 0x00; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FAULT_ADDRESS_SYSTEM_HANDLER(SystemHandler)); + + tmp = (SystemHandler >> 0x16) & (u32)0x01; + + if (tmp == 0x00) + { + faultaddress = SCB->MMFAR; + } + else + { + faultaddress = SCB->BFAR; + } + return faultaddress; +} + +/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_pwr.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_pwr.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e02594a --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_pwr.c @@ -0,0 +1,280 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ******************** +* File Name : stm32f10x_pwr.c +* Author : MCD Application Team +* Version : V2.0.2 +* Date : 07/11/2008 +* Description : This file provides all the PWR firmware functions. +******************************************************************************** +* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS +* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME. +* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, +* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE +* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING +* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS. +*******************************************************************************/ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32f10x_pwr.h" +#include "stm32f10x_rcc.h" + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* --------- PWR registers bit address in the alias region ---------- */ +#define PWR_OFFSET (PWR_BASE - PERIPH_BASE) + +/* --- CR Register ---*/ +/* Alias word address of DBP bit */ +#define CR_OFFSET (PWR_OFFSET + 0x00) +#define DBP_BitNumber 0x08 +#define CR_DBP_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CR_OFFSET * 32) + (DBP_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* Alias word address of PVDE bit */ +#define PVDE_BitNumber 0x04 +#define CR_PVDE_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CR_OFFSET * 32) + (PVDE_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* --- CSR Register ---*/ +/* Alias word address of EWUP bit */ +#define CSR_OFFSET (PWR_OFFSET + 0x04) +#define EWUP_BitNumber 0x08 +#define CSR_EWUP_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CSR_OFFSET * 32) + (EWUP_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* ------------------ PWR registers bit mask ------------------------ */ +/* CR register bit mask */ +#define CR_PDDS_Set ((u32)0x00000002) +#define CR_DS_Mask ((u32)0xFFFFFFFC) +#define CR_CWUF_Set ((u32)0x00000004) +#define CR_PLS_Mask ((u32)0xFFFFFF1F) + +/* --------- Cortex System Control register bit mask ---------------- */ +/* Cortex System Control register address */ +#define SCB_SysCtrl ((u32)0xE000ED10) +/* SLEEPDEEP bit mask */ +#define SysCtrl_SLEEPDEEP_Set ((u32)0x00000004) + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : PWR_DeInit +* Description : Deinitializes the PWR peripheral registers to their default +* reset values. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void PWR_DeInit(void) +{ + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_PWR, ENABLE); + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_PWR, DISABLE); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : PWR_BackupAccessCmd +* Description : Enables or disables access to the RTC and backup registers. +* Input : - NewState: new state of the access to the RTC and backup +* registers. This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void PWR_BackupAccessCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + *(vu32 *) CR_DBP_BB = (u32)NewState; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : PWR_PVDCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the Power Voltage Detector(PVD). +* Input : - NewState: new state of the PVD. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void PWR_PVDCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + *(vu32 *) CR_PVDE_BB = (u32)NewState; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : PWR_PVDLevelConfig +* Description : Configures the voltage threshold detected by the Power Voltage +* Detector(PVD). +* Input : - PWR_PVDLevel: specifies the PVD detection level +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - PWR_PVDLevel_2V2: PVD detection level set to 2.2V +* - PWR_PVDLevel_2V3: PVD detection level set to 2.3V +* - PWR_PVDLevel_2V4: PVD detection level set to 2.4V +* - PWR_PVDLevel_2V5: PVD detection level set to 2.5V +* - PWR_PVDLevel_2V6: PVD detection level set to 2.6V +* - PWR_PVDLevel_2V7: PVD detection level set to 2.7V +* - PWR_PVDLevel_2V8: PVD detection level set to 2.8V +* - PWR_PVDLevel_2V9: PVD detection level set to 2.9V +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void PWR_PVDLevelConfig(u32 PWR_PVDLevel) +{ + u32 tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_PWR_PVD_LEVEL(PWR_PVDLevel)); + + tmpreg = PWR->CR; + + /* Clear PLS[7:5] bits */ + tmpreg &= CR_PLS_Mask; + + /* Set PLS[7:5] bits according to PWR_PVDLevel value */ + tmpreg |= PWR_PVDLevel; + + /* Store the new value */ + PWR->CR = tmpreg; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : PWR_WakeUpPinCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the WakeUp Pin functionality. +* Input : - NewState: new state of the WakeUp Pin functionality. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void PWR_WakeUpPinCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + *(vu32 *) CSR_EWUP_BB = (u32)NewState; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : PWR_EnterSTOPMode +* Description : Enters STOP mode. +* Input : - PWR_Regulator: specifies the regulator state in STOP mode. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - PWR_Regulator_ON: STOP mode with regulator ON +* - PWR_Regulator_LowPower: STOP mode with +* regulator in low power mode +* - PWR_STOPEntry: specifies if STOP mode in entered with WFI or +* WFE instruction. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - PWR_STOPEntry_WFI: enter STOP mode with WFI instruction +* - PWR_STOPEntry_WFE: enter STOP mode with WFE instruction +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void PWR_EnterSTOPMode(u32 PWR_Regulator, u8 PWR_STOPEntry) +{ + u32 tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_PWR_REGULATOR(PWR_Regulator)); + assert_param(IS_PWR_STOP_ENTRY(PWR_STOPEntry)); + + /* Select the regulator state in STOP mode ---------------------------------*/ + tmpreg = PWR->CR; + + /* Clear PDDS and LPDS bits */ + tmpreg &= CR_DS_Mask; + + /* Set LPDS bit according to PWR_Regulator value */ + tmpreg |= PWR_Regulator; + + /* Store the new value */ + PWR->CR = tmpreg; + + /* Set SLEEPDEEP bit of Cortex System Control Register */ + *(vu32 *) SCB_SysCtrl |= SysCtrl_SLEEPDEEP_Set; + + /* Select STOP mode entry --------------------------------------------------*/ + if(PWR_STOPEntry == PWR_STOPEntry_WFI) + { + /* Request Wait For Interrupt */ + __WFI(); + } + else + { + /* Request Wait For Event */ + __WFE(); + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : PWR_EnterSTANDBYMode +* Description : Enters STANDBY mode. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void PWR_EnterSTANDBYMode(void) +{ + /* Clear Wake-up flag */ + PWR->CR |= CR_CWUF_Set; + + /* Select STANDBY mode */ + PWR->CR |= CR_PDDS_Set; + + /* Set SLEEPDEEP bit of Cortex System Control Register */ + *(vu32 *) SCB_SysCtrl |= SysCtrl_SLEEPDEEP_Set; + + /* Request Wait For Interrupt */ + __WFI(); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : PWR_GetFlagStatus +* Description : Checks whether the specified PWR flag is set or not. +* Input : - PWR_FLAG: specifies the flag to check. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - PWR_FLAG_WU: Wake Up flag +* - PWR_FLAG_SB: StandBy flag +* - PWR_FLAG_PVDO: PVD Output +* Output : None +* Return : The new state of PWR_FLAG (SET or RESET). +*******************************************************************************/ +FlagStatus PWR_GetFlagStatus(u32 PWR_FLAG) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_PWR_GET_FLAG(PWR_FLAG)); + + if ((PWR->CSR & PWR_FLAG) != (u32)RESET) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + + /* Return the flag status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : PWR_ClearFlag +* Description : Clears the PWR's pending flags. +* Input : - PWR_FLAG: specifies the flag to clear. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - PWR_FLAG_WU: Wake Up flag +* - PWR_FLAG_SB: StandBy flag +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void PWR_ClearFlag(u32 PWR_FLAG) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_PWR_CLEAR_FLAG(PWR_FLAG)); + + PWR->CR |= PWR_FLAG << 2; +} + +/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_rcc.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_rcc.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0ab6387 --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_rcc.c @@ -0,0 +1,1104 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ******************** +* File Name : stm32f10x_rcc.c +* Author : MCD Application Team +* Version : V2.0.2 +* Date : 07/11/2008 +* Description : This file provides all the RCC firmware functions. +******************************************************************************** +* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS +* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME. +* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, +* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE +* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING +* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS. +*******************************************************************************/ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32f10x_rcc.h" + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* ------------ RCC registers bit address in the alias region ----------- */ +#define RCC_OFFSET (RCC_BASE - PERIPH_BASE) + +/* --- CR Register ---*/ +/* Alias word address of HSION bit */ +#define CR_OFFSET (RCC_OFFSET + 0x00) +#define HSION_BitNumber 0x00 +#define CR_HSION_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CR_OFFSET * 32) + (HSION_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* Alias word address of PLLON bit */ +#define PLLON_BitNumber 0x18 +#define CR_PLLON_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CR_OFFSET * 32) + (PLLON_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* Alias word address of CSSON bit */ +#define CSSON_BitNumber 0x13 +#define CR_CSSON_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CR_OFFSET * 32) + (CSSON_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* --- CFGR Register ---*/ +/* Alias word address of USBPRE bit */ +#define CFGR_OFFSET (RCC_OFFSET + 0x04) +#define USBPRE_BitNumber 0x16 +#define CFGR_USBPRE_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CFGR_OFFSET * 32) + (USBPRE_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* --- BDCR Register ---*/ +/* Alias word address of RTCEN bit */ +#define BDCR_OFFSET (RCC_OFFSET + 0x20) +#define RTCEN_BitNumber 0x0F +#define BDCR_RTCEN_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (BDCR_OFFSET * 32) + (RTCEN_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* Alias word address of BDRST bit */ +#define BDRST_BitNumber 0x10 +#define BDCR_BDRST_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (BDCR_OFFSET * 32) + (BDRST_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* --- CSR Register ---*/ +/* Alias word address of LSION bit */ +#define CSR_OFFSET (RCC_OFFSET + 0x24) +#define LSION_BitNumber 0x00 +#define CSR_LSION_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CSR_OFFSET * 32) + (LSION_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* ---------------------- RCC registers bit mask ------------------------ */ +/* CR register bit mask */ +#define CR_HSEBYP_Reset ((u32)0xFFFBFFFF) +#define CR_HSEBYP_Set ((u32)0x00040000) +#define CR_HSEON_Reset ((u32)0xFFFEFFFF) +#define CR_HSEON_Set ((u32)0x00010000) +#define CR_HSITRIM_Mask ((u32)0xFFFFFF07) + +/* CFGR register bit mask */ +#define CFGR_PLL_Mask ((u32)0xFFC0FFFF) +#define CFGR_PLLMull_Mask ((u32)0x003C0000) +#define CFGR_PLLSRC_Mask ((u32)0x00010000) +#define CFGR_PLLXTPRE_Mask ((u32)0x00020000) +#define CFGR_SWS_Mask ((u32)0x0000000C) +#define CFGR_SW_Mask ((u32)0xFFFFFFFC) +#define CFGR_HPRE_Reset_Mask ((u32)0xFFFFFF0F) +#define CFGR_HPRE_Set_Mask ((u32)0x000000F0) +#define CFGR_PPRE1_Reset_Mask ((u32)0xFFFFF8FF) +#define CFGR_PPRE1_Set_Mask ((u32)0x00000700) +#define CFGR_PPRE2_Reset_Mask ((u32)0xFFFFC7FF) +#define CFGR_PPRE2_Set_Mask ((u32)0x00003800) +#define CFGR_ADCPRE_Reset_Mask ((u32)0xFFFF3FFF) +#define CFGR_ADCPRE_Set_Mask ((u32)0x0000C000) + +/* CSR register bit mask */ +#define CSR_RMVF_Set ((u32)0x01000000) + +/* RCC Flag Mask */ +#define FLAG_Mask ((u8)0x1F) + +/* Typical Value of the HSI in Hz */ +#define HSI_Value ((u32)8000000) + +/* CIR register byte 2 (Bits[15:8]) base address */ +#define CIR_BYTE2_ADDRESS ((u32)0x40021009) +/* CIR register byte 3 (Bits[23:16]) base address */ +#define CIR_BYTE3_ADDRESS ((u32)0x4002100A) + +/* CFGR register byte 4 (Bits[31:24]) base address */ +#define CFGR_BYTE4_ADDRESS ((u32)0x40021007) + +/* BDCR register base address */ +#define BDCR_ADDRESS (PERIPH_BASE + BDCR_OFFSET) + +/* Time out for HSE start up */ +#define HSEStartUp_TimeOut ((u16)0x01FF) + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +static uc8 APBAHBPrescTable[16] = {0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9}; +static uc8 ADCPrescTable[4] = {2, 4, 6, 8}; + +static volatile FlagStatus HSEStatus; +static vu32 StartUpCounter = 0; + +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RCC_DeInit +* Description : Resets the RCC clock configuration to the default reset state. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void RCC_DeInit(void) +{ + /* Set HSION bit */ + RCC->CR |= (u32)0x00000001; + + /* Reset SW[1:0], HPRE[3:0], PPRE1[2:0], PPRE2[2:0], ADCPRE[1:0] and MCO[2:0] bits */ + RCC->CFGR &= (u32)0xF8FF0000; + + /* Reset HSEON, CSSON and PLLON bits */ + RCC->CR &= (u32)0xFEF6FFFF; + + /* Reset HSEBYP bit */ + RCC->CR &= (u32)0xFFFBFFFF; + + /* Reset PLLSRC, PLLXTPRE, PLLMUL[3:0] and USBPRE bits */ + RCC->CFGR &= (u32)0xFF80FFFF; + + /* Disable all interrupts */ + RCC->CIR = 0x00000000; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RCC_HSEConfig +* Description : Configures the External High Speed oscillator (HSE). +* HSE can not be stopped if it is used directly or through the +* PLL as system clock. +* Input : - RCC_HSE: specifies the new state of the HSE. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - RCC_HSE_OFF: HSE oscillator OFF +* - RCC_HSE_ON: HSE oscillator ON +* - RCC_HSE_Bypass: HSE oscillator bypassed with external +* clock +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void RCC_HSEConfig(u32 RCC_HSE) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_HSE(RCC_HSE)); + + /* Reset HSEON and HSEBYP bits before configuring the HSE ------------------*/ + /* Reset HSEON bit */ + RCC->CR &= CR_HSEON_Reset; + + /* Reset HSEBYP bit */ + RCC->CR &= CR_HSEBYP_Reset; + + /* Configure HSE (RCC_HSE_OFF is already covered by the code section above) */ + switch(RCC_HSE) + { + case RCC_HSE_ON: + /* Set HSEON bit */ + RCC->CR |= CR_HSEON_Set; + break; + + case RCC_HSE_Bypass: + /* Set HSEBYP and HSEON bits */ + RCC->CR |= CR_HSEBYP_Set | CR_HSEON_Set; + break; + + default: + break; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RCC_WaitForHSEStartUp +* Description : Waits for HSE start-up. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : An ErrorStatus enumuration value: +* - SUCCESS: HSE oscillator is stable and ready to use +* - ERROR: HSE oscillator not yet ready +*******************************************************************************/ +ErrorStatus RCC_WaitForHSEStartUp(void) +{ + ErrorStatus status = ERROR; + + /* Wait till HSE is ready and if Time out is reached exit */ + do + { + HSEStatus = RCC_GetFlagStatus(RCC_FLAG_HSERDY); + StartUpCounter++; + } while((HSEStatus == RESET) && (StartUpCounter != HSEStartUp_TimeOut)); + + + if (RCC_GetFlagStatus(RCC_FLAG_HSERDY) != RESET) + { + status = SUCCESS; + } + else + { + status = ERROR; + } + + return (status); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RCC_AdjustHSICalibrationValue +* Description : Adjusts the Internal High Speed oscillator (HSI) calibration +* value. +* Input : - HSICalibrationValue: specifies the calibration trimming value. +* This parameter must be a number between 0 and 0x1F. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void RCC_AdjustHSICalibrationValue(u8 HSICalibrationValue) +{ + u32 tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_CALIBRATION_VALUE(HSICalibrationValue)); + + tmpreg = RCC->CR; + + /* Clear HSITRIM[4:0] bits */ + tmpreg &= CR_HSITRIM_Mask; + + /* Set the HSITRIM[4:0] bits according to HSICalibrationValue value */ + tmpreg |= (u32)HSICalibrationValue << 3; + + /* Store the new value */ + RCC->CR = tmpreg; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RCC_HSICmd +* Description : Enables or disables the Internal High Speed oscillator (HSI). +* HSI can not be stopped if it is used directly or through the +* PLL as system clock. +* Input : - NewState: new state of the HSI. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void RCC_HSICmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + *(vu32 *) CR_HSION_BB = (u32)NewState; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RCC_PLLConfig +* Description : Configures the PLL clock source and multiplication factor. +* This function must be used only when the PLL is disabled. +* Input : - RCC_PLLSource: specifies the PLL entry clock source. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - RCC_PLLSource_HSI_Div2: HSI oscillator clock divided +* by 2 selected as PLL clock entry +* - RCC_PLLSource_HSE_Div1: HSE oscillator clock selected +* as PLL clock entry +* - RCC_PLLSource_HSE_Div2: HSE oscillator clock divided +* by 2 selected as PLL clock entry +* - RCC_PLLMul: specifies the PLL multiplication factor. +* This parameter can be RCC_PLLMul_x where x:[2,16] +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void RCC_PLLConfig(u32 RCC_PLLSource, u32 RCC_PLLMul) +{ + u32 tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_PLL_SOURCE(RCC_PLLSource)); + assert_param(IS_RCC_PLL_MUL(RCC_PLLMul)); + + tmpreg = RCC->CFGR; + + /* Clear PLLSRC, PLLXTPRE and PLLMUL[3:0] bits */ + tmpreg &= CFGR_PLL_Mask; + + /* Set the PLL configuration bits */ + tmpreg |= RCC_PLLSource | RCC_PLLMul; + + /* Store the new value */ + RCC->CFGR = tmpreg; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RCC_PLLCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the PLL. +* The PLL can not be disabled if it is used as system clock. +* Input : - NewState: new state of the PLL. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void RCC_PLLCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + *(vu32 *) CR_PLLON_BB = (u32)NewState; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RCC_SYSCLKConfig +* Description : Configures the system clock (SYSCLK). +* Input : - RCC_SYSCLKSource: specifies the clock source used as system +* clock. This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - RCC_SYSCLKSource_HSI: HSI selected as system clock +* - RCC_SYSCLKSource_HSE: HSE selected as system clock +* - RCC_SYSCLKSource_PLLCLK: PLL selected as system clock +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void RCC_SYSCLKConfig(u32 RCC_SYSCLKSource) +{ + u32 tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_SYSCLK_SOURCE(RCC_SYSCLKSource)); + + tmpreg = RCC->CFGR; + + /* Clear SW[1:0] bits */ + tmpreg &= CFGR_SW_Mask; + + /* Set SW[1:0] bits according to RCC_SYSCLKSource value */ + tmpreg |= RCC_SYSCLKSource; + + /* Store the new value */ + RCC->CFGR = tmpreg; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RCC_GetSYSCLKSource +* Description : Returns the clock source used as system clock. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : The clock source used as system clock. The returned value can +* be one of the following: +* - 0x00: HSI used as system clock +* - 0x04: HSE used as system clock +* - 0x08: PLL used as system clock +*******************************************************************************/ +u8 RCC_GetSYSCLKSource(void) +{ + return ((u8)(RCC->CFGR & CFGR_SWS_Mask)); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RCC_HCLKConfig +* Description : Configures the AHB clock (HCLK). +* Input : - RCC_SYSCLK: defines the AHB clock divider. This clock is +* derived from the system clock (SYSCLK). +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - RCC_SYSCLK_Div1: AHB clock = SYSCLK +* - RCC_SYSCLK_Div2: AHB clock = SYSCLK/2 +* - RCC_SYSCLK_Div4: AHB clock = SYSCLK/4 +* - RCC_SYSCLK_Div8: AHB clock = SYSCLK/8 +* - RCC_SYSCLK_Div16: AHB clock = SYSCLK/16 +* - RCC_SYSCLK_Div64: AHB clock = SYSCLK/64 +* - RCC_SYSCLK_Div128: AHB clock = SYSCLK/128 +* - RCC_SYSCLK_Div256: AHB clock = SYSCLK/256 +* - RCC_SYSCLK_Div512: AHB clock = SYSCLK/512 +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void RCC_HCLKConfig(u32 RCC_SYSCLK) +{ + u32 tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_HCLK(RCC_SYSCLK)); + + tmpreg = RCC->CFGR; + + /* Clear HPRE[3:0] bits */ + tmpreg &= CFGR_HPRE_Reset_Mask; + + /* Set HPRE[3:0] bits according to RCC_SYSCLK value */ + tmpreg |= RCC_SYSCLK; + + /* Store the new value */ + RCC->CFGR = tmpreg; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RCC_PCLK1Config +* Description : Configures the Low Speed APB clock (PCLK1). +* Input : - RCC_HCLK: defines the APB1 clock divider. This clock is +* derived from the AHB clock (HCLK). +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - RCC_HCLK_Div1: APB1 clock = HCLK +* - RCC_HCLK_Div2: APB1 clock = HCLK/2 +* - RCC_HCLK_Div4: APB1 clock = HCLK/4 +* - RCC_HCLK_Div8: APB1 clock = HCLK/8 +* - RCC_HCLK_Div16: APB1 clock = HCLK/16 +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void RCC_PCLK1Config(u32 RCC_HCLK) +{ + u32 tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_PCLK(RCC_HCLK)); + + tmpreg = RCC->CFGR; + + /* Clear PPRE1[2:0] bits */ + tmpreg &= CFGR_PPRE1_Reset_Mask; + + /* Set PPRE1[2:0] bits according to RCC_HCLK value */ + tmpreg |= RCC_HCLK; + + /* Store the new value */ + RCC->CFGR = tmpreg; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RCC_PCLK2Config +* Description : Configures the High Speed APB clock (PCLK2). +* Input : - RCC_HCLK: defines the APB2 clock divider. This clock is +* derived from the AHB clock (HCLK). +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - RCC_HCLK_Div1: APB2 clock = HCLK +* - RCC_HCLK_Div2: APB2 clock = HCLK/2 +* - RCC_HCLK_Div4: APB2 clock = HCLK/4 +* - RCC_HCLK_Div8: APB2 clock = HCLK/8 +* - RCC_HCLK_Div16: APB2 clock = HCLK/16 +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void RCC_PCLK2Config(u32 RCC_HCLK) +{ + u32 tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_PCLK(RCC_HCLK)); + + tmpreg = RCC->CFGR; + + /* Clear PPRE2[2:0] bits */ + tmpreg &= CFGR_PPRE2_Reset_Mask; + + /* Set PPRE2[2:0] bits according to RCC_HCLK value */ + tmpreg |= RCC_HCLK << 3; + + /* Store the new value */ + RCC->CFGR = tmpreg; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RCC_ITConfig +* Description : Enables or disables the specified RCC interrupts. +* Input : - RCC_IT: specifies the RCC interrupt sources to be enabled +* or disabled. +* This parameter can be any combination of the following values: +* - RCC_IT_LSIRDY: LSI ready interrupt +* - RCC_IT_LSERDY: LSE ready interrupt +* - RCC_IT_HSIRDY: HSI ready interrupt +* - RCC_IT_HSERDY: HSE ready interrupt +* - RCC_IT_PLLRDY: PLL ready interrupt +* - NewState: new state of the specified RCC interrupts. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void RCC_ITConfig(u8 RCC_IT, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_IT(RCC_IT)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Perform Byte access to RCC_CIR[12:8] bits to enable the selected interrupts */ + *(vu8 *) CIR_BYTE2_ADDRESS |= RCC_IT; + } + else + { + /* Perform Byte access to RCC_CIR[12:8] bits to disable the selected interrupts */ + *(vu8 *) CIR_BYTE2_ADDRESS &= (u8)~RCC_IT; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RCC_USBCLKConfig +* Description : Configures the USB clock (USBCLK). +* Input : - RCC_USBCLKSource: specifies the USB clock source. This clock +* is derived from the PLL output. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - RCC_USBCLKSource_PLLCLK_1Div5: PLL clock divided by 1,5 +* selected as USB clock source +* - RCC_USBCLKSource_PLLCLK_Div1: PLL clock selected as USB +* clock source +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void RCC_USBCLKConfig(u32 RCC_USBCLKSource) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_USBCLK_SOURCE(RCC_USBCLKSource)); + + *(vu32 *) CFGR_USBPRE_BB = RCC_USBCLKSource; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RCC_ADCCLKConfig +* Description : Configures the ADC clock (ADCCLK). +* Input : - RCC_PCLK2: defines the ADC clock divider. This clock is +* derived from the APB2 clock (PCLK2). +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - RCC_PCLK2_Div2: ADC clock = PCLK2/2 +* - RCC_PCLK2_Div4: ADC clock = PCLK2/4 +* - RCC_PCLK2_Div6: ADC clock = PCLK2/6 +* - RCC_PCLK2_Div8: ADC clock = PCLK2/8 +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void RCC_ADCCLKConfig(u32 RCC_PCLK2) +{ + u32 tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_ADCCLK(RCC_PCLK2)); + + tmpreg = RCC->CFGR; + + /* Clear ADCPRE[1:0] bits */ + tmpreg &= CFGR_ADCPRE_Reset_Mask; + + /* Set ADCPRE[1:0] bits according to RCC_PCLK2 value */ + tmpreg |= RCC_PCLK2; + + /* Store the new value */ + RCC->CFGR = tmpreg; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RCC_LSEConfig +* Description : Configures the External Low Speed oscillator (LSE). +* Input : - RCC_LSE: specifies the new state of the LSE. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - RCC_LSE_OFF: LSE oscillator OFF +* - RCC_LSE_ON: LSE oscillator ON +* - RCC_LSE_Bypass: LSE oscillator bypassed with external +* clock +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void RCC_LSEConfig(u8 RCC_LSE) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_LSE(RCC_LSE)); + + /* Reset LSEON and LSEBYP bits before configuring the LSE ------------------*/ + /* Reset LSEON bit */ + *(vu8 *) BDCR_ADDRESS = RCC_LSE_OFF; + + /* Reset LSEBYP bit */ + *(vu8 *) BDCR_ADDRESS = RCC_LSE_OFF; + + /* Configure LSE (RCC_LSE_OFF is already covered by the code section above) */ + switch(RCC_LSE) + { + case RCC_LSE_ON: + /* Set LSEON bit */ + *(vu8 *) BDCR_ADDRESS = RCC_LSE_ON; + break; + + case RCC_LSE_Bypass: + /* Set LSEBYP and LSEON bits */ + *(vu8 *) BDCR_ADDRESS = RCC_LSE_Bypass | RCC_LSE_ON; + break; + + default: + break; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RCC_LSICmd +* Description : Enables or disables the Internal Low Speed oscillator (LSI). +* LSI can not be disabled if the IWDG is running. +* Input : - NewState: new state of the LSI. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void RCC_LSICmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + *(vu32 *) CSR_LSION_BB = (u32)NewState; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RCC_RTCCLKConfig +* Description : Configures the RTC clock (RTCCLK). +* Once the RTC clock is selected it can’t be changed unless the +* Backup domain is reset. +* Input : - RCC_RTCCLKSource: specifies the RTC clock source. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - RCC_RTCCLKSource_LSE: LSE selected as RTC clock +* - RCC_RTCCLKSource_LSI: LSI selected as RTC clock +* - RCC_RTCCLKSource_HSE_Div128: HSE clock divided by 128 +* selected as RTC clock +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void RCC_RTCCLKConfig(u32 RCC_RTCCLKSource) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_RTCCLK_SOURCE(RCC_RTCCLKSource)); + + /* Select the RTC clock source */ + RCC->BDCR |= RCC_RTCCLKSource; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RCC_RTCCLKCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the RTC clock. +* This function must be used only after the RTC clock was +* selected using the RCC_RTCCLKConfig function. +* Input : - NewState: new state of the RTC clock. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void RCC_RTCCLKCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + *(vu32 *) BDCR_RTCEN_BB = (u32)NewState; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RCC_GetClocksFreq +* Description : Returns the frequencies of different on chip clocks. +* Input : - RCC_Clocks: pointer to a RCC_ClocksTypeDef structure which +* will hold the clocks frequencies. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void RCC_GetClocksFreq(RCC_ClocksTypeDef* RCC_Clocks) +{ + u32 tmp = 0, pllmull = 0, pllsource = 0, presc = 0; + + /* Get SYSCLK source -------------------------------------------------------*/ + tmp = RCC->CFGR & CFGR_SWS_Mask; + + switch (tmp) + { + case 0x00: /* HSI used as system clock */ + RCC_Clocks->SYSCLK_Frequency = HSI_Value; + break; + + case 0x04: /* HSE used as system clock */ + RCC_Clocks->SYSCLK_Frequency = HSE_Value; + break; + + case 0x08: /* PLL used as system clock */ + /* Get PLL clock source and multiplication factor ----------------------*/ + pllmull = RCC->CFGR & CFGR_PLLMull_Mask; + pllmull = ( pllmull >> 18) + 2; + + pllsource = RCC->CFGR & CFGR_PLLSRC_Mask; + + if (pllsource == 0x00) + {/* HSI oscillator clock divided by 2 selected as PLL clock entry */ + RCC_Clocks->SYSCLK_Frequency = (HSI_Value >> 1) * pllmull; + } + else + {/* HSE selected as PLL clock entry */ + + if ((RCC->CFGR & CFGR_PLLXTPRE_Mask) != (u32)RESET) + {/* HSE oscillator clock divided by 2 */ + + RCC_Clocks->SYSCLK_Frequency = (HSE_Value >> 1) * pllmull; + } + else + { + RCC_Clocks->SYSCLK_Frequency = HSE_Value * pllmull; + } + } + break; + + default: + RCC_Clocks->SYSCLK_Frequency = HSI_Value; + break; + } + + /* Compute HCLK, PCLK1, PCLK2 and ADCCLK clocks frequencies ----------------*/ + /* Get HCLK prescaler */ + tmp = RCC->CFGR & CFGR_HPRE_Set_Mask; + tmp = tmp >> 4; + presc = APBAHBPrescTable[tmp]; + + /* HCLK clock frequency */ + RCC_Clocks->HCLK_Frequency = RCC_Clocks->SYSCLK_Frequency >> presc; + + /* Get PCLK1 prescaler */ + tmp = RCC->CFGR & CFGR_PPRE1_Set_Mask; + tmp = tmp >> 8; + presc = APBAHBPrescTable[tmp]; + + /* PCLK1 clock frequency */ + RCC_Clocks->PCLK1_Frequency = RCC_Clocks->HCLK_Frequency >> presc; + + /* Get PCLK2 prescaler */ + tmp = RCC->CFGR & CFGR_PPRE2_Set_Mask; + tmp = tmp >> 11; + presc = APBAHBPrescTable[tmp]; + + /* PCLK2 clock frequency */ + RCC_Clocks->PCLK2_Frequency = RCC_Clocks->HCLK_Frequency >> presc; + + /* Get ADCCLK prescaler */ + tmp = RCC->CFGR & CFGR_ADCPRE_Set_Mask; + tmp = tmp >> 14; + presc = ADCPrescTable[tmp]; + + /* ADCCLK clock frequency */ + RCC_Clocks->ADCCLK_Frequency = RCC_Clocks->PCLK2_Frequency / presc; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the AHB peripheral clock. +* Input : - RCC_AHBPeriph: specifies the AHB peripheral to gates its clock. +* This parameter can be any combination of the following values: +* - RCC_AHBPeriph_DMA1 +* - RCC_AHBPeriph_DMA2 +* - RCC_AHBPeriph_SRAM +* - RCC_AHBPeriph_FLITF +* - RCC_AHBPeriph_CRC +* - RCC_AHBPeriph_FSMC +* - RCC_AHBPeriph_SDIO +* SRAM and FLITF clock can be disabled only during sleep mode. +* - NewState: new state of the specified peripheral clock. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd(u32 RCC_AHBPeriph, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_AHB_PERIPH(RCC_AHBPeriph)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + RCC->AHBENR |= RCC_AHBPeriph; + } + else + { + RCC->AHBENR &= ~RCC_AHBPeriph; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the High Speed APB (APB2) peripheral clock. +* Input : - RCC_APB2Periph: specifies the APB2 peripheral to gates its +* clock. +* This parameter can be any combination of the following values: +* - RCC_APB2Periph_AFIO, RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOA, RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOB, +* RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOC, RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOD, RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOE, +* RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOF, RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOG, RCC_APB2Periph_ADC1, +* RCC_APB2Periph_ADC2, RCC_APB2Periph_TIM1, RCC_APB2Periph_SPI1, +* RCC_APB2Periph_TIM8, RCC_APB2Periph_USART1, RCC_APB2Periph_ADC3, +* RCC_APB2Periph_ALL +* - NewState: new state of the specified peripheral clock. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd(u32 RCC_APB2Periph, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_APB2_PERIPH(RCC_APB2Periph)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + RCC->APB2ENR |= RCC_APB2Periph; + } + else + { + RCC->APB2ENR &= ~RCC_APB2Periph; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the Low Speed APB (APB1) peripheral clock. +* Input : - RCC_APB1Periph: specifies the APB1 peripheral to gates its +* clock. +* This parameter can be any combination of the following values: +* - RCC_APB1Periph_TIM2, RCC_APB1Periph_TIM3, RCC_APB1Periph_TIM4, +* RCC_APB1Periph_TIM5, RCC_APB1Periph_TIM6, RCC_APB1Periph_TIM7, +* RCC_APB1Periph_WWDG, RCC_APB1Periph_SPI2, RCC_APB1Periph_SPI3, +* RCC_APB1Periph_USART2, RCC_APB1Periph_USART3, RCC_APB1Periph_USART4, +* RCC_APB1Periph_USART5, RCC_APB1Periph_I2C1, RCC_APB1Periph_I2C2, +* RCC_APB1Periph_USB, RCC_APB1Periph_CAN, RCC_APB1Periph_BKP, +* RCC_APB1Periph_PWR, RCC_APB1Periph_DAC, RCC_APB1Periph_ALL +* - NewState: new state of the specified peripheral clock. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(u32 RCC_APB1Periph, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_APB1_PERIPH(RCC_APB1Periph)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + RCC->APB1ENR |= RCC_APB1Periph; + } + else + { + RCC->APB1ENR &= ~RCC_APB1Periph; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd +* Description : Forces or releases High Speed APB (APB2) peripheral reset. +* Input : - RCC_APB2Periph: specifies the APB2 peripheral to reset. +* This parameter can be any combination of the following values: +* - RCC_APB2Periph_AFIO, RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOA, RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOB, +* RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOC, RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOD, RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOE, +* RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOF, RCC_APB2Periph_GPIOG, RCC_APB2Periph_ADC1, +* RCC_APB2Periph_ADC2, RCC_APB2Periph_TIM1, RCC_APB2Periph_SPI1, +* RCC_APB2Periph_TIM8, RCC_APB2Periph_USART1, RCC_APB2Periph_ADC3, +* RCC_APB2Periph_ALL +* - NewState: new state of the specified peripheral reset. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(u32 RCC_APB2Periph, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_APB2_PERIPH(RCC_APB2Periph)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + RCC->APB2RSTR |= RCC_APB2Periph; + } + else + { + RCC->APB2RSTR &= ~RCC_APB2Periph; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd +* Description : Forces or releases Low Speed APB (APB1) peripheral reset. +* Input : - RCC_APB1Periph: specifies the APB1 peripheral to reset. +* This parameter can be any combination of the following values: +* - RCC_APB1Periph_TIM2, RCC_APB1Periph_TIM3, RCC_APB1Periph_TIM4, +* RCC_APB1Periph_TIM5, RCC_APB1Periph_TIM6, RCC_APB1Periph_TIM7, +* RCC_APB1Periph_WWDG, RCC_APB1Periph_SPI2, RCC_APB1Periph_SPI3, +* RCC_APB1Periph_USART2, RCC_APB1Periph_USART3, RCC_APB1Periph_USART4, +* RCC_APB1Periph_USART5, RCC_APB1Periph_I2C1, RCC_APB1Periph_I2C2, +* RCC_APB1Periph_USB, RCC_APB1Periph_CAN, RCC_APB1Periph_BKP, +* RCC_APB1Periph_PWR, RCC_APB1Periph_DAC, RCC_APB1Periph_ALL +* - NewState: new state of the specified peripheral clock. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(u32 RCC_APB1Periph, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_APB1_PERIPH(RCC_APB1Periph)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + RCC->APB1RSTR |= RCC_APB1Periph; + } + else + { + RCC->APB1RSTR &= ~RCC_APB1Periph; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RCC_BackupResetCmd +* Description : Forces or releases the Backup domain reset. +* Input : - NewState: new state of the Backup domain reset. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void RCC_BackupResetCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + *(vu32 *) BDCR_BDRST_BB = (u32)NewState; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RCC_ClockSecuritySystemCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the Clock Security System. +* Input : - NewState: new state of the Clock Security System.. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void RCC_ClockSecuritySystemCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + *(vu32 *) CR_CSSON_BB = (u32)NewState; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RCC_MCOConfig +* Description : Selects the clock source to output on MCO pin. +* Input : - RCC_MCO: specifies the clock source to output. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - RCC_MCO_NoClock: No clock selected +* - RCC_MCO_SYSCLK: System clock selected +* - RCC_MCO_HSI: HSI oscillator clock selected +* - RCC_MCO_HSE: HSE oscillator clock selected +* - RCC_MCO_PLLCLK_Div2: PLL clock divided by 2 selected +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void RCC_MCOConfig(u8 RCC_MCO) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_MCO(RCC_MCO)); + + /* Perform Byte access to MCO[2:0] bits to select the MCO source */ + *(vu8 *) CFGR_BYTE4_ADDRESS = RCC_MCO; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RCC_GetFlagStatus +* Description : Checks whether the specified RCC flag is set or not. +* Input : - RCC_FLAG: specifies the flag to check. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - RCC_FLAG_HSIRDY: HSI oscillator clock ready +* - RCC_FLAG_HSERDY: HSE oscillator clock ready +* - RCC_FLAG_PLLRDY: PLL clock ready +* - RCC_FLAG_LSERDY: LSE oscillator clock ready +* - RCC_FLAG_LSIRDY: LSI oscillator clock ready +* - RCC_FLAG_PINRST: Pin reset +* - RCC_FLAG_PORRST: POR/PDR reset +* - RCC_FLAG_SFTRST: Software reset +* - RCC_FLAG_IWDGRST: Independent Watchdog reset +* - RCC_FLAG_WWDGRST: Window Watchdog reset +* - RCC_FLAG_LPWRRST: Low Power reset +* Output : None +* Return : The new state of RCC_FLAG (SET or RESET). +*******************************************************************************/ +FlagStatus RCC_GetFlagStatus(u8 RCC_FLAG) +{ + u32 tmp = 0; + u32 statusreg = 0; + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_FLAG(RCC_FLAG)); + + /* Get the RCC register index */ + tmp = RCC_FLAG >> 5; + + if (tmp == 1) /* The flag to check is in CR register */ + { + statusreg = RCC->CR; + } + else if (tmp == 2) /* The flag to check is in BDCR register */ + { + statusreg = RCC->BDCR; + } + else /* The flag to check is in CSR register */ + { + statusreg = RCC->CSR; + } + + /* Get the flag position */ + tmp = RCC_FLAG & FLAG_Mask; + + if ((statusreg & ((u32)1 << tmp)) != (u32)RESET) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + + /* Return the flag status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RCC_ClearFlag +* Description : Clears the RCC reset flags. +* The reset flags are: RCC_FLAG_PINRST, RCC_FLAG_PORRST, +* RCC_FLAG_SFTRST, RCC_FLAG_IWDGRST, RCC_FLAG_WWDGRST, +* RCC_FLAG_LPWRRST +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void RCC_ClearFlag(void) +{ + /* Set RMVF bit to clear the reset flags */ + RCC->CSR |= CSR_RMVF_Set; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RCC_GetITStatus +* Description : Checks whether the specified RCC interrupt has occurred or not. +* Input : - RCC_IT: specifies the RCC interrupt source to check. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - RCC_IT_LSIRDY: LSI ready interrupt +* - RCC_IT_LSERDY: LSE ready interrupt +* - RCC_IT_HSIRDY: HSI ready interrupt +* - RCC_IT_HSERDY: HSE ready interrupt +* - RCC_IT_PLLRDY: PLL ready interrupt +* - RCC_IT_CSS: Clock Security System interrupt +* Output : None +* Return : The new state of RCC_IT (SET or RESET). +*******************************************************************************/ +ITStatus RCC_GetITStatus(u8 RCC_IT) +{ + ITStatus bitstatus = RESET; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_GET_IT(RCC_IT)); + + /* Check the status of the specified RCC interrupt */ + if ((RCC->CIR & RCC_IT) != (u32)RESET) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + + /* Return the RCC_IT status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RCC_ClearITPendingBit +* Description : Clears the RCC’s interrupt pending bits. +* Input : - RCC_IT: specifies the interrupt pending bit to clear. +* This parameter can be any combination of the following values: +* - RCC_IT_LSIRDY: LSI ready interrupt +* - RCC_IT_LSERDY: LSE ready interrupt +* - RCC_IT_HSIRDY: HSI ready interrupt +* - RCC_IT_HSERDY: HSE ready interrupt +* - RCC_IT_PLLRDY: PLL ready interrupt +* - RCC_IT_CSS: Clock Security System interrupt +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void RCC_ClearITPendingBit(u8 RCC_IT) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_CLEAR_IT(RCC_IT)); + + /* Perform Byte access to RCC_CIR[23:16] bits to clear the selected interrupt + pending bits */ + *(vu8 *) CIR_BYTE3_ADDRESS = RCC_IT; +} + +/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_rtc.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_rtc.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..55a8bea --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_rtc.c @@ -0,0 +1,320 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ******************** +* File Name : stm32f10x_rtc.c +* Author : MCD Application Team +* Version : V2.0.2 +* Date : 07/11/2008 +* Description : This file provides all the RTC firmware functions. +******************************************************************************** +* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS +* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME. +* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, +* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE +* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING +* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS. +*******************************************************************************/ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32f10x_rtc.h" + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#define CRL_CNF_Set ((u16)0x0010) /* Configuration Flag Enable Mask */ +#define CRL_CNF_Reset ((u16)0xFFEF) /* Configuration Flag Disable Mask */ +#define RTC_LSB_Mask ((u32)0x0000FFFF) /* RTC LSB Mask */ +#define PRLH_MSB_Mask ((u32)0x000F0000) /* RTC Prescaler MSB Mask */ + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RTC_ITConfig +* Description : Enables or disables the specified RTC interrupts. +* Input : - RTC_IT: specifies the RTC interrupts sources to be enabled +* or disabled. +* This parameter can be any combination of the following values: +* - RTC_IT_OW: Overflow interrupt +* - RTC_IT_ALR: Alarm interrupt +* - RTC_IT_SEC: Second interrupt +* - NewState: new state of the specified RTC interrupts. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void RTC_ITConfig(u16 RTC_IT, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RTC_IT(RTC_IT)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + RTC->CRH |= RTC_IT; + } + else + { + RTC->CRH &= (u16)~RTC_IT; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RTC_EnterConfigMode +* Description : Enters the RTC configuration mode. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void RTC_EnterConfigMode(void) +{ + /* Set the CNF flag to enter in the Configuration Mode */ + RTC->CRL |= CRL_CNF_Set; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RTC_ExitConfigMode +* Description : Exits from the RTC configuration mode. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void RTC_ExitConfigMode(void) +{ + /* Reset the CNF flag to exit from the Configuration Mode */ + RTC->CRL &= CRL_CNF_Reset; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RTC_GetCounter +* Description : Gets the RTC counter value. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : RTC counter value. +*******************************************************************************/ +u32 RTC_GetCounter(void) +{ + u16 tmp = 0; + tmp = RTC->CNTL; + + return (((u32)RTC->CNTH << 16 ) | tmp) ; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RTC_SetCounter +* Description : Sets the RTC counter value. +* Input : - CounterValue: RTC counter new value. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void RTC_SetCounter(u32 CounterValue) +{ + RTC_EnterConfigMode(); + + /* Set RTC COUNTER MSB word */ + RTC->CNTH = CounterValue >> 16; + /* Set RTC COUNTER LSB word */ + RTC->CNTL = (CounterValue & RTC_LSB_Mask); + + RTC_ExitConfigMode(); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RTC_SetPrescaler +* Description : Sets the RTC prescaler value. +* Input : - PrescalerValue: RTC prescaler new value. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void RTC_SetPrescaler(u32 PrescalerValue) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RTC_PRESCALER(PrescalerValue)); + + RTC_EnterConfigMode(); + + /* Set RTC PRESCALER MSB word */ + RTC->PRLH = (PrescalerValue & PRLH_MSB_Mask) >> 16; + /* Set RTC PRESCALER LSB word */ + RTC->PRLL = (PrescalerValue & RTC_LSB_Mask); + + RTC_ExitConfigMode(); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RTC_SetAlarm +* Description : Sets the RTC alarm value. +* Input : - AlarmValue: RTC alarm new value. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void RTC_SetAlarm(u32 AlarmValue) +{ + RTC_EnterConfigMode(); + + /* Set the ALARM MSB word */ + RTC->ALRH = AlarmValue >> 16; + /* Set the ALARM LSB word */ + RTC->ALRL = (AlarmValue & RTC_LSB_Mask); + + RTC_ExitConfigMode(); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RTC_GetDivider +* Description : Gets the RTC divider value. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : RTC Divider value. +*******************************************************************************/ +u32 RTC_GetDivider(void) +{ + u32 tmp = 0x00; + + tmp = ((u32)RTC->DIVH & (u32)0x000F) << 16; + tmp |= RTC->DIVL; + + return tmp; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RTC_WaitForLastTask +* Description : Waits until last write operation on RTC registers has finished. +* This function must be called before any write to RTC registers. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void RTC_WaitForLastTask(void) +{ + /* Loop until RTOFF flag is set */ + while ((RTC->CRL & RTC_FLAG_RTOFF) == (u16)RESET) + { + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RTC_WaitForSynchro +* Description : Waits until the RTC registers (RTC_CNT, RTC_ALR and RTC_PRL) +* are synchronized with RTC APB clock. +* This function must be called before any read operation after +* an APB reset or an APB clock stop. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void RTC_WaitForSynchro(void) +{ + /* Clear RSF flag */ + RTC->CRL &= (u16)~RTC_FLAG_RSF; + + /* Loop until RSF flag is set */ + while ((RTC->CRL & RTC_FLAG_RSF) == (u16)RESET) + { + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RTC_GetFlagStatus +* Description : Checks whether the specified RTC flag is set or not. +* Input : - RTC_FLAG: specifies the flag to check. +* This parameter can be one the following values: +* - RTC_FLAG_RTOFF: RTC Operation OFF flag +* - RTC_FLAG_RSF: Registers Synchronized flag +* - RTC_FLAG_OW: Overflow flag +* - RTC_FLAG_ALR: Alarm flag +* - RTC_FLAG_SEC: Second flag +* Output : None +* Return : The new state of RTC_FLAG (SET or RESET). +*******************************************************************************/ +FlagStatus RTC_GetFlagStatus(u16 RTC_FLAG) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RTC_GET_FLAG(RTC_FLAG)); + + if ((RTC->CRL & RTC_FLAG) != (u16)RESET) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + return bitstatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RTC_ClearFlag +* Description : Clears the RTC’s pending flags. +* Input : - RTC_FLAG: specifies the flag to clear. +* This parameter can be any combination of the following values: +* - RTC_FLAG_RSF: Registers Synchronized flag. This flag +* is cleared only after an APB reset or an APB Clock stop. +* - RTC_FLAG_OW: Overflow flag +* - RTC_FLAG_ALR: Alarm flag +* - RTC_FLAG_SEC: Second flag +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void RTC_ClearFlag(u16 RTC_FLAG) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RTC_CLEAR_FLAG(RTC_FLAG)); + + /* Clear the coressponding RTC flag */ + RTC->CRL &= (u16)~RTC_FLAG; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RTC_GetITStatus +* Description : Checks whether the specified RTC interrupt has occured or not. +* Input : - RTC_IT: specifies the RTC interrupts sources to check. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - RTC_IT_OW: Overflow interrupt +* - RTC_IT_ALR: Alarm interrupt +* - RTC_IT_SEC: Second interrupt +* Output : None +* Return : The new state of the RTC_IT (SET or RESET). +*******************************************************************************/ +ITStatus RTC_GetITStatus(u16 RTC_IT) +{ + ITStatus bitstatus = RESET; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RTC_GET_IT(RTC_IT)); + + bitstatus = (ITStatus)(RTC->CRL & RTC_IT); + + if (((RTC->CRH & RTC_IT) != (u16)RESET) && (bitstatus != (u16)RESET)) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + return bitstatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : RTC_ClearITPendingBit +* Description : Clears the RTC’s interrupt pending bits. +* Input : - RTC_IT: specifies the interrupt pending bit to clear. +* This parameter can be any combination of the following values: +* - RTC_IT_OW: Overflow interrupt +* - RTC_IT_ALR: Alarm interrupt +* - RTC_IT_SEC: Second interrupt +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void RTC_ClearITPendingBit(u16 RTC_IT) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RTC_IT(RTC_IT)); + + /* Clear the coressponding RTC pending bit */ + RTC->CRL &= (u16)~RTC_IT; +} + +/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_sdio.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_sdio.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b7da816 --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_sdio.c @@ -0,0 +1,832 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ******************** +* File Name : stm32f10x_sdio.c +* Author : MCD Application Team +* Version : V2.0.2 +* Date : 07/11/2008 +* Description : This file provides all the SDIO firmware functions. +******************************************************************************** +* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS +* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME. +* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, +* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE +* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING +* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS. +*******************************************************************************/ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32f10x_sdio.h" +#include "stm32f10x_rcc.h" + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* ------------ SDIO registers bit address in the alias region ----------- */ +#define SDIO_OFFSET (SDIO_BASE - PERIPH_BASE) + +/* --- CLKCR Register ---*/ +/* Alias word address of CLKEN bit */ +#define CLKCR_OFFSET (SDIO_OFFSET + 0x04) +#define CLKEN_BitNumber 0x08 +#define CLKCR_CLKEN_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CLKCR_OFFSET * 32) + (CLKEN_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* --- CMD Register ---*/ +/* Alias word address of SDIOSUSPEND bit */ +#define CMD_OFFSET (SDIO_OFFSET + 0x0C) +#define SDIOSUSPEND_BitNumber 0x0B +#define CMD_SDIOSUSPEND_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CMD_OFFSET * 32) + (SDIOSUSPEND_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* Alias word address of ENCMDCOMPL bit */ +#define ENCMDCOMPL_BitNumber 0x0C +#define CMD_ENCMDCOMPL_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CMD_OFFSET * 32) + (ENCMDCOMPL_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* Alias word address of NIEN bit */ +#define NIEN_BitNumber 0x0D +#define CMD_NIEN_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CMD_OFFSET * 32) + (NIEN_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* Alias word address of ATACMD bit */ +#define ATACMD_BitNumber 0x0E +#define CMD_ATACMD_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CMD_OFFSET * 32) + (ATACMD_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* --- DCTRL Register ---*/ +/* Alias word address of DMAEN bit */ +#define DCTRL_OFFSET (SDIO_OFFSET + 0x2C) +#define DMAEN_BitNumber 0x03 +#define DCTRL_DMAEN_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (DCTRL_OFFSET * 32) + (DMAEN_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* Alias word address of RWSTART bit */ +#define RWSTART_BitNumber 0x08 +#define DCTRL_RWSTART_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (DCTRL_OFFSET * 32) + (RWSTART_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* Alias word address of RWSTOP bit */ +#define RWSTOP_BitNumber 0x09 +#define DCTRL_RWSTOP_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (DCTRL_OFFSET * 32) + (RWSTOP_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* Alias word address of RWMOD bit */ +#define RWMOD_BitNumber 0x0A +#define DCTRL_RWMOD_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (DCTRL_OFFSET * 32) + (RWMOD_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* Alias word address of SDIOEN bit */ +#define SDIOEN_BitNumber 0x0B +#define DCTRL_SDIOEN_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (DCTRL_OFFSET * 32) + (SDIOEN_BitNumber * 4)) + + +/* ---------------------- SDIO registers bit mask ------------------------ */ +/* --- CLKCR Register ---*/ +/* CLKCR register clear mask */ +#define CLKCR_CLEAR_MASK ((u32)0xFFFF8100) + +/* --- PWRCTRL Register ---*/ +/* SDIO PWRCTRL Mask */ +#define PWR_PWRCTRL_MASK ((u32)0xFFFFFFFC) + +/* --- DCTRL Register ---*/ +/* SDIO DCTRL Clear Mask */ +#define DCTRL_CLEAR_MASK ((u32)0xFFFFFF08) + +/* --- CMD Register ---*/ +/* CMD Register clear mask */ +#define CMD_CLEAR_MASK ((u32)0xFFFFF800) + +/* SDIO RESP Registers Address */ +#define SDIO_RESP_ADDR ((u32)(SDIO_BASE + 0x14)) + +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SDIO_DeInit +* Description : Deinitializes the SDIO peripheral registers to their default +* reset values. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void SDIO_DeInit(void) +{ + SDIO->POWER = 0x00000000; + SDIO->CLKCR = 0x00000000; + SDIO->ARG = 0x00000000; + SDIO->CMD = 0x00000000; + SDIO->DTIMER = 0x00000000; + SDIO->DLEN = 0x00000000; + SDIO->DCTRL = 0x00000000; + SDIO->ICR = 0x00C007FF; + SDIO->MASK = 0x00000000; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SDIO_Init +* Description : Initializes the SDIO peripheral according to the specified +* parameters in the SDIO_InitStruct. +* Input : SDIO_InitStruct : pointer to a SDIO_InitTypeDef structure +* that contains the configuration information for the SDIO +* peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void SDIO_Init(SDIO_InitTypeDef* SDIO_InitStruct) +{ + u32 tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SDIO_CLOCK_EDGE(SDIO_InitStruct->SDIO_ClockEdge)); + assert_param(IS_SDIO_CLOCK_BYPASS(SDIO_InitStruct->SDIO_ClockBypass)); + assert_param(IS_SDIO_CLOCK_POWER_SAVE(SDIO_InitStruct->SDIO_ClockPowerSave)); + assert_param(IS_SDIO_BUS_WIDE(SDIO_InitStruct->SDIO_BusWide)); + assert_param(IS_SDIO_HARDWARE_FLOW_CONTROL(SDIO_InitStruct->SDIO_HardwareFlowControl)); + +/*---------------------------- SDIO CLKCR Configuration ------------------------*/ + /* Get the SDIO CLKCR value */ + tmpreg = SDIO->CLKCR; + + /* Clear CLKDIV, PWRSAV, BYPASS, WIDBUS, NEGEDGE, HWFC_EN bits */ + tmpreg &= CLKCR_CLEAR_MASK; + + /* Set CLKDIV bits according to SDIO_ClockDiv value */ + /* Set PWRSAV bit according to SDIO_ClockPowerSave value */ + /* Set BYPASS bit according to SDIO_ClockBypass value */ + /* Set WIDBUS bits according to SDIO_BusWide value */ + /* Set NEGEDGE bits according to SDIO_ClockEdge value */ + /* Set HWFC_EN bits according to SDIO_HardwareFlowControl value */ + tmpreg |= (SDIO_InitStruct->SDIO_ClockDiv | SDIO_InitStruct->SDIO_ClockPowerSave | + SDIO_InitStruct->SDIO_ClockBypass | SDIO_InitStruct->SDIO_BusWide | + SDIO_InitStruct->SDIO_ClockEdge | SDIO_InitStruct->SDIO_HardwareFlowControl); + + /* Write to SDIO CLKCR */ + SDIO->CLKCR = tmpreg; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SDIO_StructInit +* Description : Fills each SDIO_InitStruct member with its default value. +* Input : SDIO_InitStruct: pointer to an SDIO_InitTypeDef structure which +* will be initialized. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void SDIO_StructInit(SDIO_InitTypeDef* SDIO_InitStruct) +{ + /* SDIO_InitStruct members default value */ + SDIO_InitStruct->SDIO_ClockDiv = 0x00; + SDIO_InitStruct->SDIO_ClockEdge = SDIO_ClockEdge_Rising; + SDIO_InitStruct->SDIO_ClockBypass = SDIO_ClockBypass_Disable; + SDIO_InitStruct->SDIO_ClockPowerSave = SDIO_ClockPowerSave_Disable; + SDIO_InitStruct->SDIO_BusWide = SDIO_BusWide_1b; + SDIO_InitStruct->SDIO_HardwareFlowControl = SDIO_HardwareFlowControl_Disable; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SDIO_ClockCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the SDIO Clock. +* Input : NewState: new state of the SDIO Clock. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void SDIO_ClockCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + *(vu32 *) CLKCR_CLKEN_BB = (u32)NewState; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SDIO_SetPowerState +* Description : Sets the power status of the controller. +* Input : SDIO_PowerState: new state of the Power state. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - SDIO_PowerState_OFF +* - SDIO_PowerState_ON +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void SDIO_SetPowerState(u32 SDIO_PowerState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SDIO_POWER_STATE(SDIO_PowerState)); + + SDIO->POWER &= PWR_PWRCTRL_MASK; + SDIO->POWER |= SDIO_PowerState; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SDIO_GetPowerState +* Description : Gets the power status of the controller. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : Power status of the controller. The returned value can +* be one of the following: +* - 0x00: Power OFF +* - 0x02: Power UP +* - 0x03: Power ON +*******************************************************************************/ +u32 SDIO_GetPowerState(void) +{ + return (SDIO->POWER & (~PWR_PWRCTRL_MASK)); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SDIO_ITConfig +* Description : Enables or disables the SDIO interrupts. +* Input : - SDIO_IT: specifies the SDIO interrupt sources to be +* enabled or disabled. +* This parameter can be one or a combination of the following +* values: +* - SDIO_IT_CCRCFAIL: Command response received (CRC check +* failed) interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_DCRCFAIL: Data block sent/received (CRC check +* failed) interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_CTIMEOUT: Command response timeout interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_DTIMEOUT: Data timeout interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_TXUNDERR: Transmit FIFO underrun error interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_RXOVERR: Received FIFO overrun error interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_CMDREND: Command response received (CRC check +* passed) interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_CMDSENT: Command sent (no response required) +* interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_DATAEND: Data end (data counter, SDIDCOUNT, is +* zero) interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_STBITERR: Start bit not detected on all data +* signals in wide bus mode interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_DBCKEND: Data block sent/received (CRC check +* passed) interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_CMDACT: Command transfer in progress interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_TXACT: Data transmit in progress interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_RXACT: Data receive in progress interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_TXFIFOHE: Transmit FIFO Half Empty interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_RXFIFOHF: Receive FIFO Half Full interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_TXFIFOF: Transmit FIFO full interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_RXFIFOF: Receive FIFO full interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_TXFIFOE: Transmit FIFO empty interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_RXFIFOE: Receive FIFO empty interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_TXDAVL: Data available in transmit FIFO interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_RXDAVL: Data available in receive FIFO interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_SDIOIT: SD I/O interrupt received interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_CEATAEND: CE-ATA command completion signal +* received for CMD61 interrupt +* - NewState: new state of the specified SDIO interrupts. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void SDIO_ITConfig(u32 SDIO_IT, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SDIO_IT(SDIO_IT)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the SDIO interrupts */ + SDIO->MASK |= SDIO_IT; + } + else + { + /* Disable the SDIO interrupts */ + SDIO->MASK &= ~SDIO_IT; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SDIO_DMACmd +* Description : Enables or disables the SDIO DMA request. +* Input : NewState: new state of the selected SDIO DMA request. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void SDIO_DMACmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + *(vu32 *) DCTRL_DMAEN_BB = (u32)NewState; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SDIO_SendCommand +* Description : Initializes the SDIO Command according to the specified +* parameters in the SDIO_CmdInitStruct and send the command. +* Input : SDIO_CmdInitStruct : pointer to a SDIO_CmdInitTypeDef +* structure that contains the configuration information +* for the SDIO command. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void SDIO_SendCommand(SDIO_CmdInitTypeDef *SDIO_CmdInitStruct) +{ + u32 tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SDIO_CMD_INDEX(SDIO_CmdInitStruct->SDIO_CmdIndex)); + assert_param(IS_SDIO_RESPONSE(SDIO_CmdInitStruct->SDIO_Response)); + assert_param(IS_SDIO_WAIT(SDIO_CmdInitStruct->SDIO_Wait)); + assert_param(IS_SDIO_CPSM(SDIO_CmdInitStruct->SDIO_CPSM)); + +/*---------------------------- SDIO ARG Configuration ------------------------*/ + /* Set the SDIO Argument value */ + SDIO->ARG = SDIO_CmdInitStruct->SDIO_Argument; + +/*---------------------------- SDIO CMD Configuration ------------------------*/ + /* Get the SDIO CMD value */ + tmpreg = SDIO->CMD; + + /* Clear CMDINDEX, WAITRESP, WAITINT, WAITPEND, CPSMEN bits */ + tmpreg &= CMD_CLEAR_MASK; + /* Set CMDINDEX bits according to SDIO_CmdIndex value */ + /* Set WAITRESP bits according to SDIO_Response value */ + /* Set WAITINT and WAITPEND bits according to SDIO_Wait value */ + /* Set CPSMEN bits according to SDIO_CPSM value */ + tmpreg |= (u32)SDIO_CmdInitStruct->SDIO_CmdIndex | SDIO_CmdInitStruct->SDIO_Response + | SDIO_CmdInitStruct->SDIO_Wait | SDIO_CmdInitStruct->SDIO_CPSM; + + /* Write to SDIO CMD */ + SDIO->CMD = tmpreg; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SDIO_CmdStructInit +* Description : Fills each SDIO_CmdInitStruct member with its default value. +* Input : SDIO_CmdInitStruct: pointer to an SDIO_CmdInitTypeDef +* structure which will be initialized. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void SDIO_CmdStructInit(SDIO_CmdInitTypeDef* SDIO_CmdInitStruct) +{ + /* SDIO_CmdInitStruct members default value */ + SDIO_CmdInitStruct->SDIO_Argument = 0x00; + SDIO_CmdInitStruct->SDIO_CmdIndex = 0x00; + SDIO_CmdInitStruct->SDIO_Response = SDIO_Response_No; + SDIO_CmdInitStruct->SDIO_Wait = SDIO_Wait_No; + SDIO_CmdInitStruct->SDIO_CPSM = SDIO_CPSM_Disable; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SDIO_GetCommandResponse +* Description : Returns command index of last command for which response +* received. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : Returns the command index of the last command response received. +*******************************************************************************/ +u8 SDIO_GetCommandResponse(void) +{ + return (u8)(SDIO->RESPCMD); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SDIO_GetResponse +* Description : Returns response received from the card for the last command. +* Input : - SDIO_RESP: Specifies the SDIO response register. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - SDIO_RESP1: Response Register 1 +* - SDIO_RESP2: Response Register 2 +* - SDIO_RESP3: Response Register 3 +* - SDIO_RESP4: Response Register 4 +* Output : None +* Return : The Corresponding response register value. +*******************************************************************************/ +u32 SDIO_GetResponse(u32 SDIO_RESP) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SDIO_RESP(SDIO_RESP)); + + return (*(vu32 *)(SDIO_RESP_ADDR + SDIO_RESP)); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SDIO_DataConfig +* Description : Initializes the SDIO data path according to the specified +* parameters in the SDIO_DataInitStruct. +* Input : SDIO_DataInitStruct : pointer to a SDIO_DataInitTypeDef +* structure that contains the configuration information +* for the SDIO command. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void SDIO_DataConfig(SDIO_DataInitTypeDef* SDIO_DataInitStruct) +{ + u32 tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SDIO_DATA_LENGTH(SDIO_DataInitStruct->SDIO_DataLength)); + assert_param(IS_SDIO_BLOCK_SIZE(SDIO_DataInitStruct->SDIO_DataBlockSize)); + assert_param(IS_SDIO_TRANSFER_DIR(SDIO_DataInitStruct->SDIO_TransferDir)); + assert_param(IS_SDIO_TRANSFER_MODE(SDIO_DataInitStruct->SDIO_TransferMode)); + assert_param(IS_SDIO_DPSM(SDIO_DataInitStruct->SDIO_DPSM)); + +/*---------------------------- SDIO DTIMER Configuration ---------------------*/ + /* Set the SDIO Data TimeOut value */ + SDIO->DTIMER = SDIO_DataInitStruct->SDIO_DataTimeOut; + +/*---------------------------- SDIO DLEN Configuration -----------------------*/ + /* Set the SDIO DataLength value */ + SDIO->DLEN = SDIO_DataInitStruct->SDIO_DataLength; + +/*---------------------------- SDIO DCTRL Configuration ----------------------*/ + /* Get the SDIO DCTRL value */ + tmpreg = SDIO->DCTRL; + + /* Clear DEN, DTMODE, DTDIR and DBCKSIZE bits */ + tmpreg &= DCTRL_CLEAR_MASK; + /* Set DEN bit according to SDIO_DPSM value */ + /* Set DTMODE bit according to SDIO_TransferMode value */ + /* Set DTDIR bit according to SDIO_TransferDir value */ + /* Set DBCKSIZE bits according to SDIO_DataBlockSize value */ + tmpreg |= (u32)SDIO_DataInitStruct->SDIO_DataBlockSize | SDIO_DataInitStruct->SDIO_TransferDir + | SDIO_DataInitStruct->SDIO_TransferMode | SDIO_DataInitStruct->SDIO_DPSM; + + /* Write to SDIO DCTRL */ + SDIO->DCTRL = tmpreg; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SDIO_DataStructInit +* Description : Fills each SDIO_DataInitStruct member with its default value. +* Input : SDIO_DataInitStruct: pointer to an SDIO_DataInitTypeDef +* structure which will be initialized. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void SDIO_DataStructInit(SDIO_DataInitTypeDef* SDIO_DataInitStruct) +{ + /* SDIO_DataInitStruct members default value */ + SDIO_DataInitStruct->SDIO_DataTimeOut = 0xFFFFFFFF; + SDIO_DataInitStruct->SDIO_DataLength = 0x00; + SDIO_DataInitStruct->SDIO_DataBlockSize = SDIO_DataBlockSize_1b; + SDIO_DataInitStruct->SDIO_TransferDir = SDIO_TransferDir_ToCard; + SDIO_DataInitStruct->SDIO_TransferMode = SDIO_TransferMode_Block; + SDIO_DataInitStruct->SDIO_DPSM = SDIO_DPSM_Disable; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SDIO_GetDataCounter +* Description : Returns number of remaining data bytes to be transferred. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : Number of remaining data bytes to be transferred +*******************************************************************************/ +u32 SDIO_GetDataCounter(void) +{ + return SDIO->DCOUNT; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SDIO_ReadData +* Description : Read one data word from Rx FIFO. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : Data received +*******************************************************************************/ +u32 SDIO_ReadData(void) +{ + return SDIO->FIFO; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SDIO_WriteData +* Description : Write one data word to Tx FIFO. +* Input : Data: 32-bit data word to write. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void SDIO_WriteData(u32 Data) +{ + SDIO->FIFO = Data; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SDIO_GetFIFOCount +* Description : Returns the number of words left to be written to or read +* from FIFO. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : Remaining number of words. +*******************************************************************************/ +u32 SDIO_GetFIFOCount(void) +{ + return SDIO->FIFOCNT; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SDIO_StartSDIOReadWait +* Description : Starts the SD I/O Read Wait operation. +* Input : NewState: new state of the Start SDIO Read Wait operation. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void SDIO_StartSDIOReadWait(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + *(vu32 *) DCTRL_RWSTART_BB = (u32) NewState; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SDIO_StopSDIOReadWait +* Description : Stops the SD I/O Read Wait operation. +* Input : NewState: new state of the Stop SDIO Read Wait operation. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void SDIO_StopSDIOReadWait(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + *(vu32 *) DCTRL_RWSTOP_BB = (u32) NewState; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SDIO_SetSDIOReadWaitMode +* Description : Sets one of the two options of inserting read wait interval. +* Input : SDIOReadWaitMode: SD I/O Read Wait operation mode. +* This parametre can be: +* - SDIO_ReadWaitMode_CLK: Read Wait control by stopping SDIOCLK +* - SDIO_ReadWaitMode_DATA2: Read Wait control using SDIO_DATA2 +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void SDIO_SetSDIOReadWaitMode(u32 SDIO_ReadWaitMode) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SDIO_READWAIT_MODE(SDIO_ReadWaitMode)); + + *(vu32 *) DCTRL_RWMOD_BB = SDIO_ReadWaitMode; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SDIO_SetSDIOOperation +* Description : Enables or disables the SD I/O Mode Operation. +* Input : NewState: new state of SDIO specific operation. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void SDIO_SetSDIOOperation(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + *(vu32 *) DCTRL_SDIOEN_BB = (u32)NewState; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SDIO_SendSDIOSuspendCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the SD I/O Mode suspend command sending. +* Input : NewState: new state of the SD I/O Mode suspend command. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void SDIO_SendSDIOSuspendCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + *(vu32 *) CMD_SDIOSUSPEND_BB = (u32)NewState; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SDIO_CommandCompletionCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the command completion signal. +* Input : NewState: new state of command completion signal. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void SDIO_CommandCompletionCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + *(vu32 *) CMD_ENCMDCOMPL_BB = (u32)NewState; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SDIO_CEATAITCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the CE-ATA interrupt. +* Input : NewState: new state of CE-ATA interrupt. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void SDIO_CEATAITCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + *(vu32 *) CMD_NIEN_BB = (u32)((~((u32)NewState)) & ((u32)0x1)); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SDIO_SendCEATACmd +* Description : Sends CE-ATA command (CMD61). +* Input : NewState: new state of CE-ATA command. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void SDIO_SendCEATACmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + *(vu32 *) CMD_ATACMD_BB = (u32)NewState; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SDIO_GetFlagStatus +* Description : Checks whether the specified SDIO flag is set or not. +* Input : SDIO_FLAG: specifies the flag to check. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - SDIO_FLAG_CCRCFAIL: Command response received (CRC check +* failed) +* - SDIO_FLAG_DCRCFAIL: Data block sent/received (CRC check +* failed) +* - SDIO_FLAG_CTIMEOUT: Command response timeout +* - SDIO_FLAG_DTIMEOUT: Data timeou +* - SDIO_FLAG_TXUNDERR: Transmit FIFO underrun error +* - SDIO_FLAG_RXOVERR: Received FIFO overrun error +* - SDIO_FLAG_CMDREND: Command response received (CRC check +* passed) +* - SDIO_FLAG_CMDSENT: Command sent (no response required) +* - SDIO_FLAG_DATAEND: Data end (data counter, SDIDCOUNT, is +* zero) +* - SDIO_FLAG_STBITERR: Start bit not detected on all data +* signals in wide bus mode +* - SDIO_FLAG_DBCKEND: Data block sent/received (CRC check +* passed) +* - SDIO_FLAG_CMDACT: Command transfer in progress +* - SDIO_FLAG_TXACT: Data transmit in progress +* - SDIO_FLAG_RXACT: Data receive in progress +* - SDIO_FLAG_TXFIFOHE: Transmit FIFO Half Empty +* - SDIO_FLAG_RXFIFOHF: Receive FIFO Half Full +* - SDIO_FLAG_TXFIFOF: Transmit FIFO full +* - SDIO_FLAG_RXFIFOF: Receive FIFO full +* - SDIO_FLAG_TXFIFOE: Transmit FIFO empty +* - SDIO_FLAG_RXFIFOE: Receive FIFO empty +* - SDIO_FLAG_TXDAVL: Data available in transmit FIFO +* - SDIO_FLAG_RXDAVL: Data available in receive FIFO +* - SDIO_FLAG_SDIOIT: SD I/O interrupt received +* - SDIO_FLAG_CEATAEND: CE-ATA command completion signal +* received for CMD61 +* Output : None +* Return : The new state of SDIO_FLAG (SET or RESET). +*******************************************************************************/ +FlagStatus SDIO_GetFlagStatus(u32 SDIO_FLAG) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SDIO_FLAG(SDIO_FLAG)); + + if ((SDIO->STA & SDIO_FLAG) != (u32)RESET) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + return bitstatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SDIO_ClearFlag +* Description : Clears the SDIO's pending flags. +* Input : SDIO_FLAG: specifies the flag to clear. +* This parameter can be one or a combination of the following +* values: +* - SDIO_FLAG_CCRCFAIL: Command response received (CRC check +* failed) +* - SDIO_FLAG_DCRCFAIL: Data block sent/received (CRC check +* failed) +* - SDIO_FLAG_CTIMEOUT: Command response timeout +* - SDIO_FLAG_DTIMEOUT: Data timeou +* - SDIO_FLAG_TXUNDERR: Transmit FIFO underrun error +* - SDIO_FLAG_RXOVERR: Received FIFO overrun error +* - SDIO_FLAG_CMDREND: Command response received (CRC check +* passed) +* - SDIO_FLAG_CMDSENT: Command sent (no response required) +* - SDIO_FLAG_DATAEND: Data end (data counter, SDIDCOUNT, is +* zero) +* - SDIO_FLAG_STBITERR: Start bit not detected on all data +* signals in wide bus mode +* - SDIO_FLAG_DBCKEND: Data block sent/received (CRC check +* passed) +* - SDIO_FLAG_SDIOIT: SD I/O interrupt received +* - SDIO_FLAG_CEATAEND: CE-ATA command completion signal +* received for CMD61 +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void SDIO_ClearFlag(u32 SDIO_FLAG) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SDIO_CLEAR_FLAG(SDIO_FLAG)); + + SDIO->ICR = SDIO_FLAG; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SDIO_GetITStatus +* Description : Checks whether the specified SDIO interrupt has occurred or not. +* Input : SDIO_IT: specifies the SDIO interrupt source to check. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - SDIO_IT_CCRCFAIL: Command response received (CRC check +* failed) interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_DCRCFAIL: Data block sent/received (CRC check +* failed) interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_CTIMEOUT: Command response timeout interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_DTIMEOUT: Data timeout interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_TXUNDERR: Transmit FIFO underrun error interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_RXOVERR: Received FIFO overrun error interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_CMDREND: Command response received (CRC check +* passed) interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_CMDSENT: Command sent (no response required) +* interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_DATAEND: Data end (data counter, SDIDCOUNT, is +* zero) interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_STBITERR: Start bit not detected on all data +* signals in wide bus mode interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_DBCKEND: Data block sent/received (CRC check +* passed) interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_CMDACT: Command transfer in progress interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_TXACT: Data transmit in progress interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_RXACT: Data receive in progress interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_TXFIFOHE: Transmit FIFO Half Empty interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_RXFIFOHF: Receive FIFO Half Full interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_TXFIFOF: Transmit FIFO full interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_RXFIFOF: Receive FIFO full interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_TXFIFOE: Transmit FIFO empty interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_RXFIFOE: Receive FIFO empty interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_TXDAVL: Data available in transmit FIFO interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_RXDAVL: Data available in receive FIFO interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_SDIOIT: SD I/O interrupt received interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_CEATAEND: CE-ATA command completion signal +* received for CMD61 interrupt +* Output : None +* Return : The new state of SDIO_IT (SET or RESET). +*******************************************************************************/ +ITStatus SDIO_GetITStatus(u32 SDIO_IT) +{ + ITStatus bitstatus = RESET; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SDIO_GET_IT(SDIO_IT)); + + if ((SDIO->STA & SDIO_IT) != (u32)RESET) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + return bitstatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SDIO_ClearITPendingBit +* Description : Clears the SDIO’s interrupt pending bits. +* Input : SDIO_IT: specifies the interrupt pending bit to clear. +* This parameter can be one or a combination of the following +* values: +* - SDIO_IT_CCRCFAIL: Command response received (CRC check +* failed) interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_DCRCFAIL: Data block sent/received (CRC check +* failed) interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_CTIMEOUT: Command response timeout interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_DTIMEOUT: Data timeout interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_TXUNDERR: Transmit FIFO underrun error interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_RXOVERR: Received FIFO overrun error interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_CMDREND: Command response received (CRC check +* passed) interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_CMDSENT: Command sent (no response required) +* interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_DATAEND: Data end (data counter, SDIDCOUNT, is +* zero) interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_STBITERR: Start bit not detected on all data +* signals in wide bus mode interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_SDIOIT: SD I/O interrupt received interrupt +* - SDIO_IT_CEATAEND: CE-ATA command completion signal +* received for CMD61 +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void SDIO_ClearITPendingBit(u32 SDIO_IT) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SDIO_CLEAR_IT(SDIO_IT)); + + SDIO->ICR = SDIO_IT; +} + +/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_spi.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_spi.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d914c09 --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_spi.c @@ -0,0 +1,863 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ******************** +* File Name : stm32f10x_spi.c +* Author : MCD Application Team +* Version : V2.0.2 +* Date : 07/11/2008 +* Description : This file provides all the SPI firmware functions. +******************************************************************************** +* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS +* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME. +* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, +* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE +* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING +* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS. +*******************************************************************************/ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32f10x_spi.h" +#include "stm32f10x_rcc.h" + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* SPI SPE mask */ +#define CR1_SPE_Set ((u16)0x0040) +#define CR1_SPE_Reset ((u16)0xFFBF) + +/* I2S I2SE mask */ +#define I2SCFGR_I2SE_Set ((u16)0x0400) +#define I2SCFGR_I2SE_Reset ((u16)0xFBFF) + +/* SPI CRCNext mask */ +#define CR1_CRCNext_Set ((u16)0x1000) + +/* SPI CRCEN mask */ +#define CR1_CRCEN_Set ((u16)0x2000) +#define CR1_CRCEN_Reset ((u16)0xDFFF) + +/* SPI SSOE mask */ +#define CR2_SSOE_Set ((u16)0x0004) +#define CR2_SSOE_Reset ((u16)0xFFFB) + +/* SPI registers Masks */ +#define CR1_CLEAR_Mask ((u16)0x3040) +#define I2SCFGR_CLEAR_Mask ((u16)0xF040) + +/* SPI or I2S mode selection masks */ +#define SPI_Mode_Select ((u16)0xF7FF) +#define I2S_Mode_Select ((u16)0x0800) + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SPI_I2S_DeInit +* Description : Deinitializes the SPIx peripheral registers to their default +* reset values (Affects also the I2Ss). +* Input : - SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void SPI_I2S_DeInit(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx)); + + switch (*(u32*)&SPIx) + { + case SPI1_BASE: + /* Enable SPI1 reset state */ + RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_SPI1, ENABLE); + /* Release SPI1 from reset state */ + RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_SPI1, DISABLE); + break; + + case SPI2_BASE: + /* Enable SPI2 reset state */ + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_SPI2, ENABLE); + /* Release SPI2 from reset state */ + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_SPI2, DISABLE); + break; + + case SPI3_BASE: + /* Enable SPI3 reset state */ + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_SPI3, ENABLE); + /* Release SPI3 from reset state */ + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_SPI3, DISABLE); + break; + + default: + break; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SPI_Init +* Description : Initializes the SPIx peripheral according to the specified +* parameters in the SPI_InitStruct. +* Input : - SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral. +* - SPI_InitStruct: pointer to a SPI_InitTypeDef structure that +* contains the configuration information for the specified +* SPI peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : None +******************************************************************************/ +void SPI_Init(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, SPI_InitTypeDef* SPI_InitStruct) +{ + u16 tmpreg = 0; + + /* check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx)); + + /* Check the SPI parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_DIRECTION_MODE(SPI_InitStruct->SPI_Direction)); + assert_param(IS_SPI_MODE(SPI_InitStruct->SPI_Mode)); + assert_param(IS_SPI_DATASIZE(SPI_InitStruct->SPI_DataSize)); + assert_param(IS_SPI_CPOL(SPI_InitStruct->SPI_CPOL)); + assert_param(IS_SPI_CPHA(SPI_InitStruct->SPI_CPHA)); + assert_param(IS_SPI_NSS(SPI_InitStruct->SPI_NSS)); + assert_param(IS_SPI_BAUDRATE_PRESCALER(SPI_InitStruct->SPI_BaudRatePrescaler)); + assert_param(IS_SPI_FIRST_BIT(SPI_InitStruct->SPI_FirstBit)); + assert_param(IS_SPI_CRC_POLYNOMIAL(SPI_InitStruct->SPI_CRCPolynomial)); + +/*---------------------------- SPIx CR1 Configuration ------------------------*/ + /* Get the SPIx CR1 value */ + tmpreg = SPIx->CR1; + /* Clear BIDIMode, BIDIOE, RxONLY, SSM, SSI, LSBFirst, BR, MSTR, CPOL and CPHA bits */ + tmpreg &= CR1_CLEAR_Mask; + /* Configure SPIx: direction, NSS management, first transmitted bit, BaudRate prescaler + master/salve mode, CPOL and CPHA */ + /* Set BIDImode, BIDIOE and RxONLY bits according to SPI_Direction value */ + /* Set SSM, SSI and MSTR bits according to SPI_Mode and SPI_NSS values */ + /* Set LSBFirst bit according to SPI_FirstBit value */ + /* Set BR bits according to SPI_BaudRatePrescaler value */ + /* Set CPOL bit according to SPI_CPOL value */ + /* Set CPHA bit according to SPI_CPHA value */ + tmpreg |= (u16)((u32)SPI_InitStruct->SPI_Direction | SPI_InitStruct->SPI_Mode | + SPI_InitStruct->SPI_DataSize | SPI_InitStruct->SPI_CPOL | + SPI_InitStruct->SPI_CPHA | SPI_InitStruct->SPI_NSS | + SPI_InitStruct->SPI_BaudRatePrescaler | SPI_InitStruct->SPI_FirstBit); + /* Write to SPIx CR1 */ + SPIx->CR1 = tmpreg; + + /* Activate the SPI mode (Reset I2SMOD bit in I2SCFGR register) */ + SPIx->I2SCFGR &= SPI_Mode_Select; + +/*---------------------------- SPIx CRCPOLY Configuration --------------------*/ + /* Write to SPIx CRCPOLY */ + SPIx->CRCPR = SPI_InitStruct->SPI_CRCPolynomial; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : I2S_Init +* Description : Initializes the SPIx peripheral according to the specified +* parameters in the I2S_InitStruct. +* Input : - SPIx: where x can be 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral +* (configured in I2S mode). +* - I2S_InitStruct: pointer to an I2S_InitTypeDef structure that +* contains the configuration information for the specified +* SPI peripheral configured in I2S mode. +* Output : None +* Return : None +******************************************************************************/ +void I2S_Init(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, I2S_InitTypeDef* I2S_InitStruct) +{ + u16 tmpreg = 0, i2sdiv = 2, i2sodd = 0, packetlength = 1; + u32 tmp = 0; + RCC_ClocksTypeDef RCC_Clocks; + + /* Check the I2S parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_23_PERIPH(SPIx)); + assert_param(IS_I2S_MODE(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_Mode)); + assert_param(IS_I2S_STANDARD(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_Standard)); + assert_param(IS_I2S_DATA_FORMAT(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_DataFormat)); + assert_param(IS_I2S_MCLK_OUTPUT(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_MCLKOutput)); + assert_param(IS_I2S_AUDIO_FREQ(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_AudioFreq)); + assert_param(IS_I2S_CPOL(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_CPOL)); + +/*----------------------- SPIx I2SCFGR & I2SPR Configuration -----------------*/ + + /* Clear I2SMOD, I2SE, I2SCFG, PCMSYNC, I2SSTD, CKPOL, DATLEN and CHLEN bits */ + SPIx->I2SCFGR &= I2SCFGR_CLEAR_Mask; + SPIx->I2SPR = 0x0002; + + /* Get the I2SCFGR register value */ + tmpreg = SPIx->I2SCFGR; + + /* If the default value has to be written, reinitialize i2sdiv and i2sodd*/ + if(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_AudioFreq == I2S_AudioFreq_Default) + { + i2sodd = (u16)0; + i2sdiv = (u16)2; + } + /* If the requested audio frequency is not the default, compute the prescaler */ + else + { + /* Check the frame length (For the Prescaler computing) */ + if(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_DataFormat == I2S_DataFormat_16b) + { + /* Packet length is 16 bits */ + packetlength = 1; + } + else + { + /* Packet length is 32 bits */ + packetlength = 2; + } + /* Get System Clock frequency */ + RCC_GetClocksFreq(&RCC_Clocks); + + /* Compute the Real divider depending on the MCLK output state with a flaoting point */ + if(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_MCLKOutput == I2S_MCLKOutput_Enable) + { + /* MCLK output is enabled */ + tmp = (u16)(((10 * RCC_Clocks.SYSCLK_Frequency) / (256 * I2S_InitStruct->I2S_AudioFreq)) + 5); + } + else + { + /* MCLK output is disabled */ + tmp = (u16)(((10 * RCC_Clocks.SYSCLK_Frequency) / (32 * packetlength * I2S_InitStruct->I2S_AudioFreq)) + 5); + } + + /* Remove the flaoting point */ + tmp = tmp/10; + + /* Check the parity of the divider */ + i2sodd = (u16)(tmp & (u16)0x0001); + + /* Compute the i2sdiv prescaler */ + i2sdiv = (u16)((tmp - i2sodd) / 2); + + /* Get the Mask for the Odd bit (SPI_I2SPR[8]) register */ + i2sodd = (u16) (i2sodd << 8); + } + + /* Test if the divider is 1 or 0 */ + if ((i2sdiv < 2) || (i2sdiv > 0xFF)) + { + /* Set the default values */ + i2sdiv = 2; + i2sodd = 0; + } + + /* Write to SPIx I2SPR register the computed value */ + SPIx->I2SPR = (u16)(i2sdiv | i2sodd | I2S_InitStruct->I2S_MCLKOutput); + + /* Configure the I2S with the SPI_InitStruct values */ + tmpreg |= (u16)(I2S_Mode_Select | I2S_InitStruct->I2S_Mode | \ + I2S_InitStruct->I2S_Standard | I2S_InitStruct->I2S_DataFormat | \ + I2S_InitStruct->I2S_CPOL); + + /* Write to SPIx I2SCFGR */ + SPIx->I2SCFGR = tmpreg; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SPI_StructInit +* Description : Fills each SPI_InitStruct member with its default value. +* Input : - SPI_InitStruct : pointer to a SPI_InitTypeDef structure +* which will be initialized. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void SPI_StructInit(SPI_InitTypeDef* SPI_InitStruct) +{ +/*--------------- Reset SPI init structure parameters values -----------------*/ + /* Initialize the SPI_Direction member */ + SPI_InitStruct->SPI_Direction = SPI_Direction_2Lines_FullDuplex; + + /* initialize the SPI_Mode member */ + SPI_InitStruct->SPI_Mode = SPI_Mode_Slave; + + /* initialize the SPI_DataSize member */ + SPI_InitStruct->SPI_DataSize = SPI_DataSize_8b; + + /* Initialize the SPI_CPOL member */ + SPI_InitStruct->SPI_CPOL = SPI_CPOL_Low; + + /* Initialize the SPI_CPHA member */ + SPI_InitStruct->SPI_CPHA = SPI_CPHA_1Edge; + + /* Initialize the SPI_NSS member */ + SPI_InitStruct->SPI_NSS = SPI_NSS_Hard; + + /* Initialize the SPI_BaudRatePrescaler member */ + SPI_InitStruct->SPI_BaudRatePrescaler = SPI_BaudRatePrescaler_2; + + /* Initialize the SPI_FirstBit member */ + SPI_InitStruct->SPI_FirstBit = SPI_FirstBit_MSB; + + /* Initialize the SPI_CRCPolynomial member */ + SPI_InitStruct->SPI_CRCPolynomial = 7; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : I2S_StructInit +* Description : Fills each I2S_InitStruct member with its default value. +* Input : - I2S_InitStruct : pointer to a I2S_InitTypeDef structure +* which will be initialized. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void I2S_StructInit(I2S_InitTypeDef* I2S_InitStruct) +{ +/*--------------- Reset I2S init structure parameters values -----------------*/ + /* Initialize the I2S_Mode member */ + I2S_InitStruct->I2S_Mode = I2S_Mode_SlaveTx; + + /* Initialize the I2S_Standard member */ + I2S_InitStruct->I2S_Standard = I2S_Standard_Phillips; + + /* Initialize the I2S_DataFormat member */ + I2S_InitStruct->I2S_DataFormat = I2S_DataFormat_16b; + + /* Initialize the I2S_MCLKOutput member */ + I2S_InitStruct->I2S_MCLKOutput = I2S_MCLKOutput_Disable; + + /* Initialize the I2S_AudioFreq member */ + I2S_InitStruct->I2S_AudioFreq = I2S_AudioFreq_Default; + + /* Initialize the I2S_CPOL member */ + I2S_InitStruct->I2S_CPOL = I2S_CPOL_Low; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SPI_Cmd +* Description : Enables or disables the specified SPI peripheral. +* Input : - SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral. +* - NewState: new state of the SPIx peripheral. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void SPI_Cmd(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected SPI peripheral */ + SPIx->CR1 |= CR1_SPE_Set; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected SPI peripheral */ + SPIx->CR1 &= CR1_SPE_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : I2S_Cmd +* Description : Enables or disables the specified SPI peripheral (in I2S mode). +* Input : - SPIx: where x can be 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral. +* - NewState: new state of the SPIx peripheral. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void I2S_Cmd(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_23_PERIPH(SPIx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected SPI peripheral (in I2S mode) */ + SPIx->I2SCFGR |= I2SCFGR_I2SE_Set; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected SPI peripheral (in I2S mode) */ + SPIx->I2SCFGR &= I2SCFGR_I2SE_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SPI_I2S_ITConfig +* Description : Enables or disables the specified SPI/I2S interrupts. +* Input : - SPIx: where x can be : +* - 1, 2 or 3 in SPI mode +* - 2 or 3 in I2S mode +* - SPI_I2S_IT: specifies the SPI/I2S interrupt source to be +* enabled or disabled. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - SPI_I2S_IT_TXE: Tx buffer empty interrupt mask +* - SPI_I2S_IT_RXNE: Rx buffer not empty interrupt mask +* - SPI_I2S_IT_ERR: Error interrupt mask +* - NewState: new state of the specified SPI/I2S interrupt. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void SPI_I2S_ITConfig(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, u8 SPI_I2S_IT, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + u16 itpos = 0, itmask = 0 ; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + assert_param(IS_SPI_I2S_CONFIG_IT(SPI_I2S_IT)); + + /* Get the SPI/I2S IT index */ + itpos = SPI_I2S_IT >> 4; + /* Set the IT mask */ + itmask = (u16)((u16)1 << itpos); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected SPI/I2S interrupt */ + SPIx->CR2 |= itmask; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected SPI/I2S interrupt */ + SPIx->CR2 &= (u16)~itmask; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SPI_I2S_DMACmd +* Description : Enables or disables the SPIx/I2Sx DMA interface. +* Input : - SPIx: where x can be : +* - 1, 2 or 3 in SPI mode +* - 2 or 3 in I2S mode +* - SPI_I2S_DMAReq: specifies the SPI/I2S DMA transfer request +* to be enabled or disabled. +* This parameter can be any combination of the following values: +* - SPI_I2S_DMAReq_Tx: Tx buffer DMA transfer request +* - SPI_I2S_DMAReq_Rx: Rx buffer DMA transfer request +* - NewState: new state of the selected SPI/I2S DMA transfer +* request. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void SPI_I2S_DMACmd(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, u16 SPI_I2S_DMAReq, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + assert_param(IS_SPI_I2S_DMAREQ(SPI_I2S_DMAReq)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected SPI/I2S DMA requests */ + SPIx->CR2 |= SPI_I2S_DMAReq; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected SPI/I2S DMA requests */ + SPIx->CR2 &= (u16)~SPI_I2S_DMAReq; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SPI_I2S_SendData +* Description : Transmits a Data through the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral. +* Input : - SPIx: where x can be : +* - 1, 2 or 3 in SPI mode +* - 2 or 3 in I2S mode +* - Data : Data to be transmitted.. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void SPI_I2S_SendData(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, u16 Data) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx)); + + /* Write in the DR register the data to be sent */ + SPIx->DR = Data; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SPI_I2S_ReceiveData +* Description : Returns the most recent received data by the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral. +* Input : - SPIx: where x can be : +* - 1, 2 or 3 in SPI mode +* - 2 or 3 in I2S mode +* Output : None +* Return : The value of the received data. +*******************************************************************************/ +u16 SPI_I2S_ReceiveData(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx)); + + /* Return the data in the DR register */ + return SPIx->DR; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SPI_NSSInternalSoftwareConfig +* Description : Configures internally by software the NSS pin for the selected +* SPI. +* Input : - SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral. +* - SPI_NSSInternalSoft: specifies the SPI NSS internal state. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - SPI_NSSInternalSoft_Set: Set NSS pin internally +* - SPI_NSSInternalSoft_Reset: Reset NSS pin internally +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void SPI_NSSInternalSoftwareConfig(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, u16 SPI_NSSInternalSoft) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx)); + assert_param(IS_SPI_NSS_INTERNAL(SPI_NSSInternalSoft)); + + if (SPI_NSSInternalSoft != SPI_NSSInternalSoft_Reset) + { + /* Set NSS pin internally by software */ + SPIx->CR1 |= SPI_NSSInternalSoft_Set; + } + else + { + /* Reset NSS pin internally by software */ + SPIx->CR1 &= SPI_NSSInternalSoft_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SPI_SSOutputCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the SS output for the selected SPI. +* Input : - SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral. +* - NewState: new state of the SPIx SS output. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void SPI_SSOutputCmd(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected SPI SS output */ + SPIx->CR2 |= CR2_SSOE_Set; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected SPI SS output */ + SPIx->CR2 &= CR2_SSOE_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SPI_DataSizeConfig +* Description : Configures the data size for the selected SPI. +* Input : - SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral. +* - SPI_DataSize: specifies the SPI data size. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - SPI_DataSize_16b: Set data frame format to 16bit +* - SPI_DataSize_8b: Set data frame format to 8bit +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void SPI_DataSizeConfig(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, u16 SPI_DataSize) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx)); + assert_param(IS_SPI_DATASIZE(SPI_DataSize)); + + /* Clear DFF bit */ + SPIx->CR1 &= (u16)~SPI_DataSize_16b; + /* Set new DFF bit value */ + SPIx->CR1 |= SPI_DataSize; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SPI_TransmitCRC +* Description : Transmit the SPIx CRC value. +* Input : - SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void SPI_TransmitCRC(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx)); + + /* Enable the selected SPI CRC transmission */ + SPIx->CR1 |= CR1_CRCNext_Set; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SPI_CalculateCRC +* Description : Enables or disables the CRC value calculation of the +* transfered bytes. +* Input : - SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral. +* - NewState: new state of the SPIx CRC value calculation. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void SPI_CalculateCRC(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected SPI CRC calculation */ + SPIx->CR1 |= CR1_CRCEN_Set; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected SPI CRC calculation */ + SPIx->CR1 &= CR1_CRCEN_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SPI_GetCRC +* Description : Returns the transmit or the receive CRC register value for +* the specified SPI. +* Input : - SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral. +* - SPI_CRC: specifies the CRC register to be read. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - SPI_CRC_Tx: Selects Tx CRC register +* - SPI_CRC_Rx: Selects Rx CRC register +* Output : None +* Return : The selected CRC register value.. +*******************************************************************************/ +u16 SPI_GetCRC(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, u8 SPI_CRC) +{ + u16 crcreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx)); + assert_param(IS_SPI_CRC(SPI_CRC)); + + if (SPI_CRC != SPI_CRC_Rx) + { + /* Get the Tx CRC register */ + crcreg = SPIx->TXCRCR; + } + else + { + /* Get the Rx CRC register */ + crcreg = SPIx->RXCRCR; + } + + /* Return the selected CRC register */ + return crcreg; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SPI_GetCRCPolynomial +* Description : Returns the CRC Polynomial register value for the specified SPI. +* Input : - SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : The CRC Polynomial register value. +*******************************************************************************/ +u16 SPI_GetCRCPolynomial(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx)); + + /* Return the CRC polynomial register */ + return SPIx->CRCPR; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SPI_BiDirectionalLineConfig +* Description : Selects the data transfer direction in bi-directional mode +* for the specified SPI. +* Input : - SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral. +* - SPI_Direction: specifies the data transfer direction in +* bi-directional mode. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - SPI_Direction_Tx: Selects Tx transmission direction +* - SPI_Direction_Rx: Selects Rx receive direction +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void SPI_BiDirectionalLineConfig(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, u16 SPI_Direction) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx)); + assert_param(IS_SPI_DIRECTION(SPI_Direction)); + + if (SPI_Direction == SPI_Direction_Tx) + { + /* Set the Tx only mode */ + SPIx->CR1 |= SPI_Direction_Tx; + } + else + { + /* Set the Rx only mode */ + SPIx->CR1 &= SPI_Direction_Rx; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SPI_I2S_GetFlagStatus +* Description : Checks whether the specified SPI/I2S flag is set or not. +* Input : - SPIx: where x can be : +* - 1, 2 or 3 in SPI mode +* - 2 or 3 in I2S mode +* - SPI_I2S_FLAG: specifies the SPI/I2S flag to check. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - SPI_I2S_FLAG_TXE: Transmit buffer empty flag. +* - SPI_I2S_FLAG_RXNE: Receive buffer not empty flag. +* - SPI_I2S_FLAG_BSY: Busy flag. +* - SPI_I2S_FLAG_OVR: Overrun flag. +* - SPI_FLAG_MODF: Mode Fault flag. +* - SPI_FLAG_CRCERR: CRC Error flag. +* - I2S_FLAG_UDR: Underrun Error flag. +* - I2S_FLAG_CHSIDE: Channel Side flag. +* Output : None +* Return : The new state of SPI_I2S_FLAG (SET or RESET). +*******************************************************************************/ +FlagStatus SPI_I2S_GetFlagStatus(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, u16 SPI_I2S_FLAG) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx)); + assert_param(IS_SPI_I2S_GET_FLAG(SPI_I2S_FLAG)); + + /* Check the status of the specified SPI/I2S flag */ + if ((SPIx->SR & SPI_I2S_FLAG) != (u16)RESET) + { + /* SPI_I2S_FLAG is set */ + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* SPI_I2S_FLAG is reset */ + bitstatus = RESET; + } + /* Return the SPI_I2S_FLAG status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SPI_I2S_ClearFlag +* Description : Clears the SPIx CRC Error (CRCERR) flag. +* Input : - SPIx: where x can be : +* - 1, 2 or 3 in SPI mode +* - SPI_I2S_FLAG: specifies the SPI flag to clear. +* This function clears only CRCERR flag. +* Notes: +* - OVR (OverRun error) flag is cleared by software +* sequence: a read operation to SPI_DR register +* (SPI_I2S_ReceiveData()) followed by a read operation +* to SPI_SR register (SPI_I2S_GetFlagStatus()). +* - UDR (UnderRun error) flag is cleared by a read +* operation to SPI_SR register (SPI_I2S_GetFlagStatus()). +* - MODF (Mode Fault) flag is cleared by software sequence: +* a read/write operation to SPI_SR register +* (SPI_I2S_GetFlagStatus()) followed by a write +* operation to SPI_CR1 register (SPI_Cmd() to enable +* the SPI). +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void SPI_I2S_ClearFlag(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, u16 SPI_I2S_FLAG) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx)); + assert_param(IS_SPI_I2S_CLEAR_FLAG(SPI_I2S_FLAG)); + + /* Clear the selected SPI CRC Error (CRCERR) flag */ + SPIx->SR = (u16)~SPI_I2S_FLAG; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SPI_I2S_GetITStatus +* Description : Checks whether the specified SPI/I2S interrupt has occurred or not. +* Input : - SPIx: where x can be : +* - 1, 2 or 3 in SPI mode +* - 2 or 3 in I2S mode +* - SPI_I2S_IT: specifies the SPI/I2S interrupt source to check. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - SPI_I2S_IT_TXE: Transmit buffer empty interrupt. +* - SPI_I2S_IT_RXNE: Receive buffer not empty interrupt. +* - SPI_I2S_IT_OVR: Overrun interrupt. +* - SPI_IT_MODF: Mode Fault interrupt. +* - SPI_IT_CRCERR: CRC Error interrupt. +* - I2S_IT_UDR: Underrun Error interrupt. +* Output : None +* Return : The new state of SPI_I2S_IT (SET or RESET). +*******************************************************************************/ +ITStatus SPI_I2S_GetITStatus(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, u8 SPI_I2S_IT) +{ + ITStatus bitstatus = RESET; + u16 itpos = 0, itmask = 0, enablestatus = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx)); + assert_param(IS_SPI_I2S_GET_IT(SPI_I2S_IT)); + + /* Get the SPI/I2S IT index */ + itpos = (u16)((u16)0x01 << (SPI_I2S_IT & (u8)0x0F)); + + /* Get the SPI/I2S IT mask */ + itmask = SPI_I2S_IT >> 4; + /* Set the IT mask */ + itmask = (u16)((u16)0x01 << itmask); + /* Get the SPI_I2S_IT enable bit status */ + enablestatus = (SPIx->CR2 & itmask) ; + + /* Check the status of the specified SPI/I2S interrupt */ + if (((SPIx->SR & itpos) != (u16)RESET) && enablestatus) + { + /* SPI_I2S_IT is set */ + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* SPI_I2S_IT is reset */ + bitstatus = RESET; + } + /* Return the SPI_I2S_IT status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SPI_I2S_ClearITPendingBit +* Description : Clears the SPIx CRC Error (CRCERR) interrupt pending bit. +* Input : - SPIx: where x can be : +* - 1, 2 or 3 in SPI mode +* - SPI_I2S_IT: specifies the SPI interrupt pending bit to clear. +* This function clears only CRCERR intetrrupt pending bit. +* Notes: +* - OVR (OverRun Error) interrupt pending bit is cleared +* by software sequence: a read operation to SPI_DR +* register (SPI_I2S_ReceiveData()) followed by a read +* operation to SPI_SR register (SPI_I2S_GetITStatus()). +* - UDR (UnderRun Error) interrupt pending bit is cleared +* by a read operation to SPI_SR register +* (SPI_I2S_GetITStatus()). +* - MODF (Mode Fault) interrupt pending bit is cleared by +* software sequence: a read/write operation to SPI_SR +* register (SPI_I2S_GetITStatus()) followed by a write +* operation to SPI_CR1 register (SPI_Cmd() to enable the +* SPI). +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void SPI_I2S_ClearITPendingBit(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, u8 SPI_I2S_IT) +{ + u16 itpos = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx)); + assert_param(IS_SPI_I2S_CLEAR_IT(SPI_I2S_IT)); + + /* Get the SPI IT index */ + itpos = (u16)((u16)0x01 << (SPI_I2S_IT & (u8)0x0F)); + /* Clear the selected SPI CRC Error (CRCERR) interrupt pending bit */ + SPIx->SR = (u16)~itpos; +} + +/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_systick.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_systick.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..53deb76 --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_systick.c @@ -0,0 +1,181 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ******************** +* File Name : stm32f10x_systick.c +* Author : MCD Application Team +* Version : V2.0.2 +* Date : 07/11/2008 +* Description : This file provides all the SysTick firmware functions. +******************************************************************************** +* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS +* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME. +* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, +* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE +* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING +* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS. +*******************************************************************************/ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32f10x_systick.h" + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* ---------------------- SysTick registers bit mask -------------------- */ +/* CTRL TICKINT Mask */ +#define CTRL_TICKINT_Set ((u32)0x00000002) +#define CTRL_TICKINT_Reset ((u32)0xFFFFFFFD) + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SysTick_CLKSourceConfig +* Description : Configures the SysTick clock source. +* Input : - SysTick_CLKSource: specifies the SysTick clock source. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - SysTick_CLKSource_HCLK_Div8: AHB clock divided by 8 +* selected as SysTick clock source. +* - SysTick_CLKSource_HCLK: AHB clock selected as +* SysTick clock source. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void SysTick_CLKSourceConfig(u32 SysTick_CLKSource) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SYSTICK_CLK_SOURCE(SysTick_CLKSource)); + + if (SysTick_CLKSource == SysTick_CLKSource_HCLK) + { + SysTick->CTRL |= SysTick_CLKSource_HCLK; + } + else + { + SysTick->CTRL &= SysTick_CLKSource_HCLK_Div8; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SysTick_SetReload +* Description : Sets SysTick Reload value. +* Input : - Reload: SysTick Reload new value. +* This parameter must be a number between 1 and 0xFFFFFF. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void SysTick_SetReload(u32 Reload) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SYSTICK_RELOAD(Reload)); + + SysTick->LOAD = Reload; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SysTick_CounterCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the SysTick counter. +* Input : - SysTick_Counter: new state of the SysTick counter. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - SysTick_Counter_Disable: Disable counter +* - SysTick_Counter_Enable: Enable counter +* - SysTick_Counter_Clear: Clear counter value to 0 +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void SysTick_CounterCmd(u32 SysTick_Counter) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SYSTICK_COUNTER(SysTick_Counter)); + + if (SysTick_Counter == SysTick_Counter_Enable) + { + SysTick->CTRL |= SysTick_Counter_Enable; + } + else if (SysTick_Counter == SysTick_Counter_Disable) + { + SysTick->CTRL &= SysTick_Counter_Disable; + } + else /* SysTick_Counter == SysTick_Counter_Clear */ + { + SysTick->VAL = SysTick_Counter_Clear; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SysTick_ITConfig +* Description : Enables or disables the SysTick Interrupt. +* Input : - NewState: new state of the SysTick Interrupt. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void SysTick_ITConfig(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + SysTick->CTRL |= CTRL_TICKINT_Set; + } + else + { + SysTick->CTRL &= CTRL_TICKINT_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SysTick_GetCounter +* Description : Gets SysTick counter value. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : SysTick current value +*******************************************************************************/ +u32 SysTick_GetCounter(void) +{ + return(SysTick->VAL); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : SysTick_GetFlagStatus +* Description : Checks whether the specified SysTick flag is set or not. +* Input : - SysTick_FLAG: specifies the flag to check. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - SysTick_FLAG_COUNT +* - SysTick_FLAG_SKEW +* - SysTick_FLAG_NOREF +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +FlagStatus SysTick_GetFlagStatus(u8 SysTick_FLAG) +{ + u32 statusreg = 0, tmp = 0 ; + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SYSTICK_FLAG(SysTick_FLAG)); + + /* Get the SysTick register index */ + tmp = SysTick_FLAG >> 3; + + if (tmp == 2) /* The flag to check is in CTRL register */ + { + statusreg = SysTick->CTRL; + } + else /* The flag to check is in CALIB register */ + { + statusreg = SysTick->CALIB; + } + + if ((statusreg & ((u32)1 << SysTick_FLAG)) != (u32)RESET) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + return bitstatus; +} + +/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_tim.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_tim.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ca971e2 --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_tim.c @@ -0,0 +1,3219 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ******************** +* File Name : stm32f10x_tim.c +* Author : MCD Application Team +* Version : V2.0.2 +* Date : 07/11/2008 +* Description : This file provides all the TIM firmware functions. +******************************************************************************** +* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS +* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME. +* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, +* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE +* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING +* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS. +*******************************************************************************/ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32f10x_tim.h" +#include "stm32f10x_rcc.h" + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* ---------------------- TIM registers bit mask ------------------------ */ +#define CR1_CEN_Set ((u16)0x0001) +#define CR1_CEN_Reset ((u16)0x03FE) +#define CR1_UDIS_Set ((u16)0x0002) +#define CR1_UDIS_Reset ((u16)0x03FD) +#define CR1_URS_Set ((u16)0x0004) +#define CR1_URS_Reset ((u16)0x03FB) +#define CR1_OPM_Reset ((u16)0x03F7) +#define CR1_CounterMode_Mask ((u16)0x038F) +#define CR1_ARPE_Set ((u16)0x0080) +#define CR1_ARPE_Reset ((u16)0x037F) +#define CR1_CKD_Mask ((u16)0x00FF) + +#define CR2_CCPC_Set ((u16)0x0001) +#define CR2_CCPC_Reset ((u16)0xFFFE) +#define CR2_CCUS_Set ((u16)0x0004) +#define CR2_CCUS_Reset ((u16)0xFFFB) +#define CR2_CCDS_Set ((u16)0x0008) +#define CR2_CCDS_Reset ((u16)0xFFF7) +#define CR2_MMS_Mask ((u16)0xFF8F) +#define CR2_TI1S_Set ((u16)0x0080) +#define CR2_TI1S_Reset ((u16)0xFF7F) +#define CR2_OIS1_Reset ((u16)0x7EFF) +#define CR2_OIS1N_Reset ((u16)0x7DFF) +#define CR2_OIS2_Reset ((u16)0x7BFF) +#define CR2_OIS2N_Reset ((u16)0x77FF) +#define CR2_OIS3_Reset ((u16)0x6FFF) +#define CR2_OIS3N_Reset ((u16)0x5FFF) +#define CR2_OIS4_Reset ((u16)0x3FFF) + +#define SMCR_SMS_Mask ((u16)0xFFF8) +#define SMCR_ETR_Mask ((u16)0x00FF) +#define SMCR_TS_Mask ((u16)0xFF8F) +#define SMCR_MSM_Reset ((u16)0xFF7F) +#define SMCR_ECE_Set ((u16)0x4000) + +#define CCMR_CC13S_Mask ((u16)0xFFFC) +#define CCMR_CC24S_Mask ((u16)0xFCFF) +#define CCMR_TI13Direct_Set ((u16)0x0001) +#define CCMR_TI24Direct_Set ((u16)0x0100) +#define CCMR_OC13FE_Reset ((u16)0xFFFB) +#define CCMR_OC24FE_Reset ((u16)0xFBFF) +#define CCMR_OC13PE_Reset ((u16)0xFFF7) +#define CCMR_OC24PE_Reset ((u16)0xF7FF) +#define CCMR_OC13M_Mask ((u16)0xFF8F) +#define CCMR_OC24M_Mask ((u16)0x8FFF) + +#define CCMR_OC13CE_Reset ((u16)0xFF7F) +#define CCMR_OC24CE_Reset ((u16)0x7FFF) + +#define CCMR_IC13PSC_Mask ((u16)0xFFF3) +#define CCMR_IC24PSC_Mask ((u16)0xF3FF) +#define CCMR_IC13F_Mask ((u16)0xFF0F) +#define CCMR_IC24F_Mask ((u16)0x0FFF) + +#define CCMR_Offset ((u16)0x0018) +#define CCER_CCE_Set ((u16)0x0001) +#define CCER_CCNE_Set ((u16)0x0004) + +#define CCER_CC1P_Reset ((u16)0xFFFD) +#define CCER_CC2P_Reset ((u16)0xFFDF) +#define CCER_CC3P_Reset ((u16)0xFDFF) +#define CCER_CC4P_Reset ((u16)0xDFFF) + +#define CCER_CC1NP_Reset ((u16)0xFFF7) +#define CCER_CC2NP_Reset ((u16)0xFF7F) +#define CCER_CC3NP_Reset ((u16)0xF7FF) + +#define CCER_CC1E_Set ((u16)0x0001) +#define CCER_CC1E_Reset ((u16)0xFFFE) + +#define CCER_CC1NE_Reset ((u16)0xFFFB) + +#define CCER_CC2E_Set ((u16)0x0010) +#define CCER_CC2E_Reset ((u16)0xFFEF) + +#define CCER_CC2NE_Reset ((u16)0xFFBF) + +#define CCER_CC3E_Set ((u16)0x0100) +#define CCER_CC3E_Reset ((u16)0xFEFF) + +#define CCER_CC3NE_Reset ((u16)0xFBFF) + +#define CCER_CC4E_Set ((u16)0x1000) +#define CCER_CC4E_Reset ((u16)0xEFFF) + +#define BDTR_MOE_Set ((u16)0x8000) +#define BDTR_MOE_Reset ((u16)0x7FFF) + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +static void TI1_Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_ICPolarity, u16 TIM_ICSelection, + u16 TIM_ICFilter); +static void TI2_Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_ICPolarity, u16 TIM_ICSelection, + u16 TIM_ICFilter); +static void TI3_Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_ICPolarity, u16 TIM_ICSelection, + u16 TIM_ICFilter); +static void TI4_Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_ICPolarity, u16 TIM_ICSelection, + u16 TIM_ICFilter); +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_DeInit +* Description : Deinitializes the TIMx peripheral registers to their default +* reset values. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 to 8 to select the TIM peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_DeInit(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx)); + + switch (*(u32*)&TIMx) + { + case TIM1_BASE: + RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_TIM1, ENABLE); + RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_TIM1, DISABLE); + break; + + case TIM2_BASE: + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_TIM2, ENABLE); + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_TIM2, DISABLE); + break; + + case TIM3_BASE: + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_TIM3, ENABLE); + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_TIM3, DISABLE); + break; + + case TIM4_BASE: + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_TIM4, ENABLE); + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_TIM4, DISABLE); + break; + + case TIM5_BASE: + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_TIM5, ENABLE); + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_TIM5, DISABLE); + break; + + case TIM6_BASE: + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_TIM6, ENABLE); + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_TIM6, DISABLE); + break; + + case TIM7_BASE: + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_TIM7, ENABLE); + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_TIM7, DISABLE); + break; + + case TIM8_BASE: + RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_TIM8, ENABLE); + RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_TIM8, DISABLE); + break; + + default: + break; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_TimeBaseInit +* Description : Initializes the TIMx Time Base Unit peripheral according to +* the specified parameters in the TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct: pointer to a TIM_TimeBaseInitTypeDef +* structure that contains the configuration information for +* the specified TIM peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_TimeBaseInit(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, TIM_TimeBaseInitTypeDef* TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_COUNTER_MODE(TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct->TIM_CounterMode)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_CKD_DIV(TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct->TIM_ClockDivision)); + + /* Select the Counter Mode and set the clock division */ + TIMx->CR1 &= CR1_CKD_Mask & CR1_CounterMode_Mask; + TIMx->CR1 |= (u32)TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct->TIM_ClockDivision | + TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct->TIM_CounterMode; + /* Set the Autoreload value */ + TIMx->ARR = TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct->TIM_Period ; + + /* Set the Prescaler value */ + TIMx->PSC = TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct->TIM_Prescaler; + + /* Generate an update event to reload the Prescaler value immediatly */ + TIMx->EGR = TIM_PSCReloadMode_Immediate; + + if (((*(u32*)&TIMx) == TIM1_BASE) || ((*(u32*)&TIMx) == TIM8_BASE)) + { + /* Set the Repetition Counter value */ + TIMx->RCR = TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct->TIM_RepetitionCounter; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_OC1Init +* Description : Initializes the TIMx Channel1 according to the specified +* parameters in the TIM_OCInitStruct. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_OCInitStruct: pointer to a TIM_OCInitTypeDef structure +* that contains the configuration information for the specified +* TIM peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_OC1Init(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, TIM_OCInitTypeDef* TIM_OCInitStruct) +{ + u16 tmpccmrx = 0, tmpccer = 0, tmpcr2 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_MODE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCMode)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OUTPUT_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputState)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_POLARITY(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCPolarity)); + + /* Disable the Channel 1: Reset the CC1E Bit */ + TIMx->CCER &= CCER_CC1E_Reset; + + /* Get the TIMx CCER register value */ + tmpccer = TIMx->CCER; + + /* Get the TIMx CR2 register value */ + tmpcr2 = TIMx->CR2; + + /* Get the TIMx CCMR1 register value */ + tmpccmrx = TIMx->CCMR1; + + /* Reset the Output Compare Mode Bits */ + tmpccmrx &= CCMR_OC13M_Mask; + + /* Select the Output Compare Mode */ + tmpccmrx |= TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCMode; + + /* Reset the Output Polarity level */ + tmpccer &= CCER_CC1P_Reset; + + /* Set the Output Compare Polarity */ + tmpccer |= TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCPolarity; + + /* Set the Output State */ + tmpccer |= TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputState; + + /* Set the Capture Compare Register value */ + TIMx->CCR1 = TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_Pulse; + + if((*(u32*)&TIMx == TIM1_BASE) || (*(u32*)&TIMx == TIM8_BASE)) + { + assert_param(IS_TIM_OUTPUTN_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputNState)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OCN_POLARITY(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNPolarity)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OCNIDLE_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNIdleState)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OCIDLE_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCIdleState)); + + /* Reset the Output N Polarity level */ + tmpccer &= CCER_CC1NP_Reset; + + /* Set the Output N Polarity */ + tmpccer |= TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNPolarity; + + /* Reset the Output N State */ + tmpccer &= CCER_CC1NE_Reset; + + /* Set the Output N State */ + tmpccer |= TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputNState; + + /* Reset the Ouput Compare and Output Compare N IDLE State */ + tmpcr2 &= CR2_OIS1_Reset; + tmpcr2 &= CR2_OIS1N_Reset; + + /* Set the Output Idle state */ + tmpcr2 |= TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCIdleState; + + /* Set the Output N Idle state */ + tmpcr2 |= TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNIdleState; + } + /* Write to TIMx CR2 */ + TIMx->CR2 = tmpcr2; + + /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 */ + TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmrx; + + /* Write to TIMx CCER */ + TIMx->CCER = tmpccer; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_OC2Init +* Description : Initializes the TIMx Channel2 according to the specified +* parameters in the TIM_OCInitStruct. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_OCInitStruct: pointer to a TIM_OCInitTypeDef structure +* that contains the configuration information for the specified +* TIM peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_OC2Init(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, TIM_OCInitTypeDef* TIM_OCInitStruct) +{ + u16 tmpccmrx = 0, tmpccer = 0, tmpcr2 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_MODE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCMode)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OUTPUT_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputState)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_POLARITY(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCPolarity)); + + /* Disable the Channel 2: Reset the CC2E Bit */ + TIMx->CCER &= CCER_CC2E_Reset; + + /* Get the TIMx CCER register value */ + tmpccer = TIMx->CCER; + + /* Get the TIMx CR2 register value */ + tmpcr2 = TIMx->CR2; + + /* Get the TIMx CCMR1 register value */ + tmpccmrx = TIMx->CCMR1; + + /* Reset the Output Compare Mode Bits */ + tmpccmrx &= CCMR_OC24M_Mask; + + /* Select the Output Compare Mode */ + tmpccmrx |= (u16)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCMode << 8); + + /* Reset the Output Polarity level */ + tmpccer &= CCER_CC2P_Reset; + + /* Set the Output Compare Polarity */ + tmpccer |= (u16)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCPolarity << 4); + + /* Set the Output State */ + tmpccer |= (u16)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputState << 4); + + /* Set the Capture Compare Register value */ + TIMx->CCR2 = TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_Pulse; + + if((*(u32*)&TIMx == TIM1_BASE) || (*(u32*)&TIMx == TIM8_BASE)) + { + assert_param(IS_TIM_OUTPUTN_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputNState)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OCN_POLARITY(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNPolarity)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OCNIDLE_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNIdleState)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OCIDLE_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCIdleState)); + + /* Reset the Output N Polarity level */ + tmpccer &= CCER_CC2NP_Reset; + + /* Set the Output N Polarity */ + tmpccer |= (u16)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNPolarity << 4); + + /* Reset the Output N State */ + tmpccer &= CCER_CC2NE_Reset; + + /* Set the Output N State */ + tmpccer |= (u16)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputNState << 4); + + /* Reset the Ouput Compare and Output Compare N IDLE State */ + tmpcr2 &= CR2_OIS2_Reset; + tmpcr2 &= CR2_OIS2N_Reset; + + /* Set the Output Idle state */ + tmpcr2 |= (u16)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCIdleState << 2); + + /* Set the Output N Idle state */ + tmpcr2 |= (u16)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNIdleState << 2); + } + + /* Write to TIMx CR2 */ + TIMx->CR2 = tmpcr2; + + /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 */ + TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmrx; + + /* Write to TIMx CCER */ + TIMx->CCER = tmpccer; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_OC3Init +* Description : Initializes the TIMx Channel3 according to the specified +* parameters in the TIM_OCInitStruct. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_OCInitStruct: pointer to a TIM_OCInitTypeDef structure +* that contains the configuration information for the specified +* TIM peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_OC3Init(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, TIM_OCInitTypeDef* TIM_OCInitStruct) +{ + u16 tmpccmrx = 0, tmpccer = 0, tmpcr2 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_MODE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCMode)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OUTPUT_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputState)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_POLARITY(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCPolarity)); + + /* Disable the Channel 2: Reset the CC2E Bit */ + TIMx->CCER &= CCER_CC3E_Reset; + + /* Get the TIMx CCER register value */ + tmpccer = TIMx->CCER; + + /* Get the TIMx CR2 register value */ + tmpcr2 = TIMx->CR2; + + /* Get the TIMx CCMR2 register value */ + tmpccmrx = TIMx->CCMR2; + + /* Reset the Output Compare Mode Bits */ + tmpccmrx &= CCMR_OC13M_Mask; + + /* Select the Output Compare Mode */ + tmpccmrx |= TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCMode; + + /* Reset the Output Polarity level */ + tmpccer &= CCER_CC3P_Reset; + + /* Set the Output Compare Polarity */ + tmpccer |= (u16)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCPolarity << 8); + + /* Set the Output State */ + tmpccer |= (u16)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputState << 8); + + /* Set the Capture Compare Register value */ + TIMx->CCR3 = TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_Pulse; + + if((*(u32*)&TIMx == TIM1_BASE) || (*(u32*)&TIMx == TIM8_BASE)) + { + assert_param(IS_TIM_OUTPUTN_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputNState)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OCN_POLARITY(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNPolarity)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OCNIDLE_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNIdleState)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OCIDLE_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCIdleState)); + + /* Reset the Output N Polarity level */ + tmpccer &= CCER_CC3NP_Reset; + + /* Set the Output N Polarity */ + tmpccer |= (u16)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNPolarity << 8); + + /* Reset the Output N State */ + tmpccer &= CCER_CC3NE_Reset; + + /* Set the Output N State */ + tmpccer |= (u16)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputNState << 8); + + /* Reset the Ouput Compare and Output Compare N IDLE State */ + tmpcr2 &= CR2_OIS3_Reset; + tmpcr2 &= CR2_OIS3N_Reset; + + /* Set the Output Idle state */ + tmpcr2 |= (u16)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCIdleState << 4); + + /* Set the Output N Idle state */ + tmpcr2 |= (u16)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNIdleState << 4); + } + + /* Write to TIMx CR2 */ + TIMx->CR2 = tmpcr2; + + /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 */ + TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmrx; + + /* Write to TIMx CCER */ + TIMx->CCER = tmpccer; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_OC4Init +* Description : Initializes the TIMx Channel4 according to the specified +* parameters in the TIM_OCInitStruct. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_OCInitStruct: pointer to a TIM_OCInitTypeDef structure +* that contains the configuration information for the specified +* TIM peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_OC4Init(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, TIM_OCInitTypeDef* TIM_OCInitStruct) +{ + u16 tmpccmrx = 0, tmpccer = 0, tmpcr2 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_MODE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCMode)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OUTPUT_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputState)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_POLARITY(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCPolarity)); + + /* Disable the Channel 2: Reset the CC4E Bit */ + TIMx->CCER &= CCER_CC4E_Reset; + + /* Get the TIMx CCER register value */ + tmpccer = TIMx->CCER; + + /* Get the TIMx CR2 register value */ + tmpcr2 = TIMx->CR2; + + /* Get the TIMx CCMR2 register value */ + tmpccmrx = TIMx->CCMR2; + + /* Reset the Output Compare Mode Bits */ + tmpccmrx &= CCMR_OC24M_Mask; + + /* Select the Output Compare Mode */ + tmpccmrx |= (u16)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCMode << 8); + + /* Reset the Output Polarity level */ + tmpccer &= CCER_CC4P_Reset; + + /* Set the Output Compare Polarity */ + tmpccer |= (u16)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCPolarity << 12); + + /* Set the Output State */ + tmpccer |= (u16)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputState << 12); + + /* Set the Capture Compare Register value */ + TIMx->CCR4 = TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_Pulse; + + if((*(u32*)&TIMx == TIM1_BASE) || (*(u32*)&TIMx == TIM8_BASE)) + { + assert_param(IS_TIM_OCIDLE_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCIdleState)); + + /* Reset the Ouput Compare IDLE State */ + tmpcr2 &= CR2_OIS4_Reset; + + /* Set the Output Idle state */ + tmpcr2 |= (u16)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCIdleState << 6); + } + + /* Write to TIMx CR2 */ + TIMx->CR2 = tmpcr2; + + /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 */ + TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmrx; + + /* Write to TIMx CCER */ + TIMx->CCER = tmpccer; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_ICInit +* Description : Initializes the TIM peripheral according to the specified +* parameters in the TIM_ICInitStruct. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_ICInitStruct: pointer to a TIM_ICInitTypeDef structure +* that contains the configuration information for the specified +* TIM peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_ICInit(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, TIM_ICInitTypeDef* TIM_ICInitStruct) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_CHANNEL(TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_Channel)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_POLARITY(TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPolarity)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_SELECTION(TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICSelection)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_PRESCALER(TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPrescaler)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_FILTER(TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICFilter)); + + if (TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_Channel == TIM_Channel_1) + { + /* TI1 Configuration */ + TI1_Config(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPolarity, + TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICSelection, + TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICFilter); + + /* Set the Input Capture Prescaler value */ + TIM_SetIC1Prescaler(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPrescaler); + } + else if (TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_Channel == TIM_Channel_2) + { + /* TI2 Configuration */ + TI2_Config(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPolarity, + TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICSelection, + TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICFilter); + + /* Set the Input Capture Prescaler value */ + TIM_SetIC2Prescaler(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPrescaler); + } + else if (TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_Channel == TIM_Channel_3) + { + /* TI3 Configuration */ + TI3_Config(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPolarity, + TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICSelection, + TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICFilter); + + /* Set the Input Capture Prescaler value */ + TIM_SetIC3Prescaler(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPrescaler); + } + else + { + /* TI4 Configuration */ + TI4_Config(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPolarity, + TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICSelection, + TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICFilter); + + /* Set the Input Capture Prescaler value */ + TIM_SetIC4Prescaler(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPrescaler); + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_PWMIConfig +* Description : Configures the TIM peripheral according to the specified +* parameters in the TIM_ICInitStruct to measure an external PWM +* signal. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_ICInitStruct: pointer to a TIM_ICInitTypeDef structure +* that contains the configuration information for the specified +* TIM peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_PWMIConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, TIM_ICInitTypeDef* TIM_ICInitStruct) +{ + u16 icoppositepolarity = TIM_ICPolarity_Rising; + u16 icoppositeselection = TIM_ICSelection_DirectTI; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + + /* Select the Opposite Input Polarity */ + if (TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPolarity == TIM_ICPolarity_Rising) + { + icoppositepolarity = TIM_ICPolarity_Falling; + } + else + { + icoppositepolarity = TIM_ICPolarity_Rising; + } + + /* Select the Opposite Input */ + if (TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICSelection == TIM_ICSelection_DirectTI) + { + icoppositeselection = TIM_ICSelection_IndirectTI; + } + else + { + icoppositeselection = TIM_ICSelection_DirectTI; + } + + if (TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_Channel == TIM_Channel_1) + { + /* TI1 Configuration */ + TI1_Config(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPolarity, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICSelection, + TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICFilter); + + /* Set the Input Capture Prescaler value */ + TIM_SetIC1Prescaler(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPrescaler); + + /* TI2 Configuration */ + TI2_Config(TIMx, icoppositepolarity, icoppositeselection, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICFilter); + + /* Set the Input Capture Prescaler value */ + TIM_SetIC2Prescaler(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPrescaler); + } + else + { + /* TI2 Configuration */ + TI2_Config(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPolarity, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICSelection, + TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICFilter); + + /* Set the Input Capture Prescaler value */ + TIM_SetIC2Prescaler(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPrescaler); + + /* TI1 Configuration */ + TI1_Config(TIMx, icoppositepolarity, icoppositeselection, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICFilter); + + /* Set the Input Capture Prescaler value */ + TIM_SetIC1Prescaler(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPrescaler); + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_BDTRConfig +* Description : Configures the: Break feature, dead time, Lock level, the OSSI, +* the OSSR State and the AOE(automatic output enable). +* Input :- TIMx: where x can be 1 or 8 to select the TIM +* - TIM_BDTRInitStruct: pointer to a TIM_BDTRInitTypeDef +* structure that contains the BDTR Register configuration +* information for the TIM peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_BDTRConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, TIM_BDTRInitTypeDef *TIM_BDTRInitStruct) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_18_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OSSR_STATE(TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_OSSRState)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OSSI_STATE(TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_OSSIState)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_LOCK_LEVEL(TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_LOCKLevel)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_BREAK_STATE(TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_Break)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_BREAK_POLARITY(TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_BreakPolarity)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_AUTOMATIC_OUTPUT_STATE(TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_AutomaticOutput)); + + /* Set the Lock level, the Break enable Bit and the Ploarity, the OSSR State, + the OSSI State, the dead time value and the Automatic Output Enable Bit */ + + TIMx->BDTR = (u32)TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_OSSRState | TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_OSSIState | + TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_LOCKLevel | TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_DeadTime | + TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_Break | TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_BreakPolarity | + TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_AutomaticOutput; + +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_TimeBaseStructInit +* Description : Fills each TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct member with its default value. +* Input : - TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct : pointer to a TIM_TimeBaseInitTypeDef +* structure which will be initialized. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_TimeBaseStructInit(TIM_TimeBaseInitTypeDef* TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct) +{ + /* Set the default configuration */ + TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct->TIM_Period = 0xFFFF; + TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct->TIM_Prescaler = 0x0000; + TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct->TIM_ClockDivision = TIM_CKD_DIV1; + TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct->TIM_CounterMode = TIM_CounterMode_Up; + TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct->TIM_RepetitionCounter = 0x0000; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_OCStructInit +* Description : Fills each TIM_OCInitStruct member with its default value. +* Input : - TIM_OCInitStruct : pointer to a TIM_OCInitTypeDef structure +* which will be initialized. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_OCStructInit(TIM_OCInitTypeDef* TIM_OCInitStruct) +{ + /* Set the default configuration */ + TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCMode = TIM_OCMode_Timing; + TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputState = TIM_OutputState_Disable; + TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputNState = TIM_OutputNState_Disable; + TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_Pulse = 0x0000; + TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCPolarity = TIM_OCPolarity_High; + TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNPolarity = TIM_OCPolarity_High; + TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCIdleState = TIM_OCIdleState_Reset; + TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNIdleState = TIM_OCNIdleState_Reset; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_ICStructInit +* Description : Fills each TIM_ICInitStruct member with its default value. +* Input : - TIM_ICInitStruct : pointer to a TIM_ICInitTypeDef structure +* which will be initialized. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_ICStructInit(TIM_ICInitTypeDef* TIM_ICInitStruct) +{ + /* Set the default configuration */ + TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_Channel = TIM_Channel_1; + TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPolarity = TIM_ICPolarity_Rising; + TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICSelection = TIM_ICSelection_DirectTI; + TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPrescaler = TIM_ICPSC_DIV1; + TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICFilter = 0x00; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_BDTRStructInit +* Description : Fills each TIM_BDTRInitStruct member with its default value. +* Input : - TIM_BDTRInitStruct : pointer to a TIM_BDTRInitTypeDef +* structure which will be initialized. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_BDTRStructInit(TIM_BDTRInitTypeDef* TIM_BDTRInitStruct) +{ + /* Set the default configuration */ + TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_OSSRState = TIM_OSSRState_Disable; + TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_OSSIState = TIM_OSSIState_Disable; + TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_LOCKLevel = TIM_LOCKLevel_OFF; + TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_DeadTime = 0x00; + TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_Break = TIM_Break_Disable; + TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_BreakPolarity = TIM_BreakPolarity_Low; + TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_AutomaticOutput = TIM_AutomaticOutput_Disable; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_Cmd +* Description : Enables or disables the specified TIM peripheral. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 to 8 to select the TIMx peripheral. +* - NewState: new state of the TIMx peripheral. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_Cmd(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the TIM Counter */ + TIMx->CR1 |= CR1_CEN_Set; + } + else + { + /* Disable the TIM Counter */ + TIMx->CR1 &= CR1_CEN_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_CtrlPWMOutputs +* Description : Enables or disables the TIM peripheral Main Outputs. +* Input :- TIMx: where x can be 1 or 8 to select the TIMx peripheral. +* - NewState: new state of the TIM peripheral Main Outputs. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_CtrlPWMOutputs(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_18_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the TIM Main Output */ + TIMx->BDTR |= BDTR_MOE_Set; + } + else + { + /* Disable the TIM Main Output */ + TIMx->BDTR &= BDTR_MOE_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_ITConfig +* Description : Enables or disables the specified TIM interrupts. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 to 8 to select the TIMx peripheral. +* - TIM_IT: specifies the TIM interrupts sources to be enabled +* or disabled. +* This parameter can be any combination of the following values: +* - TIM_IT_Update: TIM update Interrupt source +* - TIM_IT_CC1: TIM Capture Compare 1 Interrupt source +* - TIM_IT_CC2: TIM Capture Compare 2 Interrupt source +* - TIM_IT_CC3: TIM Capture Compare 3 Interrupt source +* - TIM_IT_CC4: TIM Capture Compare 4 Interrupt source +* - TIM_IT_COM: TIM Commutation Interrupt source +* - TIM_IT_Trigger: TIM Trigger Interrupt source +* - TIM_IT_Break: TIM Break Interrupt source +* - NewState: new state of the TIM interrupts. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_ITConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_IT, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_IT(TIM_IT)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_PERIPH_IT((TIMx), (TIM_IT))); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the Interrupt sources */ + TIMx->DIER |= TIM_IT; + } + else + { + /* Disable the Interrupt sources */ + TIMx->DIER &= (u16)~TIM_IT; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_GenerateEvent +* Description : Configures the TIMx event to be generate by software. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 to 8 to select the TIM peripheral. +* - TIM_EventSource: specifies the event source. +* This parameter can be one or more of the following values: +* - TIM_EventSource_Update: Timer update Event source +* - TIM_EventSource_CC1: Timer Capture Compare 1 Event source +* - TIM_EventSource_CC2: Timer Capture Compare 2 Event source +* - TIM_EventSource_CC3: Timer Capture Compare 3 Event source +* - TIM_EventSource_CC4: Timer Capture Compare 4 Event source +* - TIM_EventSource_Trigger: Timer Trigger Event source +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_GenerateEvent(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_EventSource) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_EVENT_SOURCE(TIM_EventSource)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_PERIPH_EVENT((TIMx), (TIM_EventSource))); + + /* Set the event sources */ + TIMx->EGR = TIM_EventSource; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_DMAConfig +* Description : Configures the TIMx’s DMA interface. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_DMABase: DMA Base address. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_DMABase_CR, TIM_DMABase_CR2, TIM_DMABase_SMCR, +* TIM_DMABase_DIER, TIM1_DMABase_SR, TIM_DMABase_EGR, +* TIM_DMABase_CCMR1, TIM_DMABase_CCMR2, TIM_DMABase_CCER, +* TIM_DMABase_CNT, TIM_DMABase_PSC, TIM_DMABase_ARR, +* TIM_DMABase_RCR, TIM_DMABase_CCR1, TIM_DMABase_CCR2, +* TIM_DMABase_CCR3, TIM_DMABase_CCR4, TIM_DMABase_BDTR, +* TIM_DMABase_DCR. +* - TIM_DMABurstLength: DMA Burst length. +* This parameter can be one value between: +* TIM_DMABurstLength_1Byte and TIM_DMABurstLength_18Bytes. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_DMAConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_DMABase, u16 TIM_DMABurstLength) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_DMA_BASE(TIM_DMABase)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_DMA_LENGTH(TIM_DMABurstLength)); + + /* Set the DMA Base and the DMA Burst Length */ + TIMx->DCR = TIM_DMABase | TIM_DMABurstLength; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_DMACmd +* Description : Enables or disables the TIMx’s DMA Requests. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 to 8 to select the TIM peripheral. +* - TIM_DMASources: specifies the DMA Request sources. +* This parameter can be any combination of the following values: +* - TIM_DMA_Update: TIM update Interrupt source +* - TIM_DMA_CC1: TIM Capture Compare 1 DMA source +* - TIM_DMA_CC2: TIM Capture Compare 2 DMA source +* - TIM_DMA_CC3: TIM Capture Compare 3 DMA source +* - TIM_DMA_CC4: TIM Capture Compare 4 DMA source +* - TIM_DMA_COM: TIM Commutation DMA source +* - TIM_DMA_Trigger: TIM Trigger DMA source +* - NewState: new state of the DMA Request sources. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_DMACmd(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_DMASource, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_DMA_SOURCE(TIM_DMASource)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_PERIPH_DMA(TIMx, TIM_DMASource)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the DMA sources */ + TIMx->DIER |= TIM_DMASource; + } + else + { + /* Disable the DMA sources */ + TIMx->DIER &= (u16)~TIM_DMASource; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_InternalClockConfig +* Description : Configures the TIMx interrnal Clock +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_InternalClockConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + + /* Disable slave mode to clock the prescaler directly with the internal clock */ + TIMx->SMCR &= SMCR_SMS_Mask; +} +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_ITRxExternalClockConfig +* Description : Configures the TIMx Internal Trigger as External Clock +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_ITRSource: Trigger source. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_TS_ITR0: Internal Trigger 0 +* - TIM_TS_ITR1: Internal Trigger 1 +* - TIM_TS_ITR2: Internal Trigger 2 +* - TIM_TS_ITR3: Internal Trigger 3 +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_ITRxExternalClockConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_InputTriggerSource) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_INTERNAL_TRIGGER_SELECTION(TIM_InputTriggerSource)); + + /* Select the Internal Trigger */ + TIM_SelectInputTrigger(TIMx, TIM_InputTriggerSource); + + /* Select the External clock mode1 */ + TIMx->SMCR |= TIM_SlaveMode_External1; +} +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_TIxExternalClockConfig +* Description : Configures the TIMx Trigger as External Clock +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_TIxExternalCLKSource: Trigger source. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_TIxExternalCLK1Source_TI1ED: TI1 Edge Detector +* - TIM_TIxExternalCLK1Source_TI1: Filtered Timer Input 1 +* - TIM_TIxExternalCLK1Source_TI2: Filtered Timer Input 2 +* - TIM_ICPolarity: specifies the TIx Polarity. +* This parameter can be: +* - TIM_ICPolarity_Rising +* - TIM_ICPolarity_Falling +* - ICFilter : specifies the filter value. +* This parameter must be a value between 0x0 and 0xF. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_TIxExternalClockConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_TIxExternalCLKSource, + u16 TIM_ICPolarity, u16 ICFilter) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_TIXCLK_SOURCE(TIM_TIxExternalCLKSource)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_POLARITY(TIM_ICPolarity)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_FILTER(ICFilter)); + + /* Configure the Timer Input Clock Source */ + if (TIM_TIxExternalCLKSource == TIM_TIxExternalCLK1Source_TI2) + { + TI2_Config(TIMx, TIM_ICPolarity, TIM_ICSelection_DirectTI, ICFilter); + } + else + { + TI1_Config(TIMx, TIM_ICPolarity, TIM_ICSelection_DirectTI, ICFilter); + } + + /* Select the Trigger source */ + TIM_SelectInputTrigger(TIMx, TIM_TIxExternalCLKSource); + + /* Select the External clock mode1 */ + TIMx->SMCR |= TIM_SlaveMode_External1; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_ETRClockMode1Config +* Description : Configures the External clock Mode1 +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler: The external Trigger Prescaler. +* It can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_ExtTRGPSC_OFF +* - TIM_ExtTRGPSC_DIV2 +* - TIM_ExtTRGPSC_DIV4 +* - TIM_ExtTRGPSC_DIV8. +* - TIM_ExtTRGPolarity: The external Trigger Polarity. +* It can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_ExtTRGPolarity_Inverted +* - TIM_ExtTRGPolarity_NonInverted +* - ExtTRGFilter: External Trigger Filter. +* This parameter must be a value between 0x00 and 0x0F +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_ETRClockMode1Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler, u16 TIM_ExtTRGPolarity, + u16 ExtTRGFilter) +{ + u16 tmpsmcr = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_EXT_PRESCALER(TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_EXT_POLARITY(TIM_ExtTRGPolarity)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_EXT_FILTER(ExtTRGFilter)); + + /* Configure the ETR Clock source */ + TIM_ETRConfig(TIMx, TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler, TIM_ExtTRGPolarity, ExtTRGFilter); + + /* Get the TIMx SMCR register value */ + tmpsmcr = TIMx->SMCR; + + /* Reset the SMS Bits */ + tmpsmcr &= SMCR_SMS_Mask; + /* Select the External clock mode1 */ + tmpsmcr |= TIM_SlaveMode_External1; + + /* Select the Trigger selection : ETRF */ + tmpsmcr &= SMCR_TS_Mask; + tmpsmcr |= TIM_TS_ETRF; + + /* Write to TIMx SMCR */ + TIMx->SMCR = tmpsmcr; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_ETRClockMode2Config +* Description : Configures the External clock Mode2 +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler: The external Trigger Prescaler. +* It can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_ExtTRGPSC_OFF +* - TIM_ExtTRGPSC_DIV2 +* - TIM_ExtTRGPSC_DIV4 +* - TIM_ExtTRGPSC_DIV8 +* - TIM_ExtTRGPolarity: The external Trigger Polarity. +* It can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_ExtTRGPolarity_Inverted +* - TIM_ExtTRGPolarity_NonInverted +* - ExtTRGFilter: External Trigger Filter. +* This parameter must be a value between 0x00 and 0x0F +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_ETRClockMode2Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler, + u16 TIM_ExtTRGPolarity, u16 ExtTRGFilter) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_EXT_PRESCALER(TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_EXT_POLARITY(TIM_ExtTRGPolarity)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_EXT_FILTER(ExtTRGFilter)); + + /* Configure the ETR Clock source */ + TIM_ETRConfig(TIMx, TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler, TIM_ExtTRGPolarity, ExtTRGFilter); + + /* Enable the External clock mode2 */ + TIMx->SMCR |= SMCR_ECE_Set; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_ETRConfig +* Description : Configures the TIMx External Trigger (ETR). +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler: The external Trigger Prescaler. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_ExtTRGPSC_OFF +* - TIM_ExtTRGPSC_DIV2 +* - TIM_ExtTRGPSC_DIV4 +* - TIM_ExtTRGPSC_DIV8 +* - TIM_ExtTRGPolarity: The external Trigger Polarity. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_ExtTRGPolarity_Inverted +* - TIM_ExtTRGPolarity_NonInverted +* - ExtTRGFilter: External Trigger Filter. +* This parameter must be a value between 0x00 and 0x0F. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_ETRConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler, u16 TIM_ExtTRGPolarity, + u16 ExtTRGFilter) +{ + u16 tmpsmcr = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_EXT_PRESCALER(TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_EXT_POLARITY(TIM_ExtTRGPolarity)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_EXT_FILTER(ExtTRGFilter)); + + tmpsmcr = TIMx->SMCR; + + /* Reset the ETR Bits */ + tmpsmcr &= SMCR_ETR_Mask; + + /* Set the Prescaler, the Filter value and the Polarity */ + tmpsmcr |= TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler | TIM_ExtTRGPolarity | (u16)(ExtTRGFilter << 8); + + /* Write to TIMx SMCR */ + TIMx->SMCR = tmpsmcr; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_PrescalerConfig +* Description : Configures the TIMx Prescaler. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 to 8 to select the TIM peripheral. +* - Prescaler: specifies the Prescaler Register value +* - TIM_PSCReloadMode: specifies the TIM Prescaler Reload mode +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_PSCReloadMode_Update: The Prescaler is loaded at +* the update event. +* - TIM_PSCReloadMode_Immediate: The Prescaler is loaded +* immediatly. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_PrescalerConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 Prescaler, u16 TIM_PSCReloadMode) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_PRESCALER_RELOAD(TIM_PSCReloadMode)); + + /* Set the Prescaler value */ + TIMx->PSC = Prescaler; + + /* Set or reset the UG Bit */ + TIMx->EGR = TIM_PSCReloadMode; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_CounterModeConfig +* Description : Specifies the TIMx Counter Mode to be used. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_CounterMode: specifies the Counter Mode to be used +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_CounterMode_Up: TIM Up Counting Mode +* - TIM_CounterMode_Down: TIM Down Counting Mode +* - TIM_CounterMode_CenterAligned1: TIM Center Aligned Mode1 +* - TIM_CounterMode_CenterAligned2: TIM Center Aligned Mode2 +* - TIM_CounterMode_CenterAligned3: TIM Center Aligned Mode3 +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_CounterModeConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_CounterMode) +{ + u16 tmpcr1 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_COUNTER_MODE(TIM_CounterMode)); + + tmpcr1 = TIMx->CR1; + + /* Reset the CMS and DIR Bits */ + tmpcr1 &= CR1_CounterMode_Mask; + + /* Set the Counter Mode */ + tmpcr1 |= TIM_CounterMode; + + /* Write to TIMx CR1 register */ + TIMx->CR1 = tmpcr1; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_SelectInputTrigger +* Description : Selects the Input Trigger source +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_InputTriggerSource: The Input Trigger source. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_TS_ITR0: Internal Trigger 0 +* - TIM_TS_ITR1: Internal Trigger 1 +* - TIM_TS_ITR2: Internal Trigger 2 +* - TIM_TS_ITR3: Internal Trigger 3 +* - TIM_TS_TI1F_ED: TI1 Edge Detector +* - TIM_TS_TI1FP1: Filtered Timer Input 1 +* - TIM_TS_TI2FP2: Filtered Timer Input 2 +* - TIM_TS_ETRF: External Trigger input +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_SelectInputTrigger(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_InputTriggerSource) +{ + u16 tmpsmcr = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_TRIGGER_SELECTION(TIM_InputTriggerSource)); + + /* Get the TIMx SMCR register value */ + tmpsmcr = TIMx->SMCR; + + /* Reset the TS Bits */ + tmpsmcr &= SMCR_TS_Mask; + + /* Set the Input Trigger source */ + tmpsmcr |= TIM_InputTriggerSource; + + /* Write to TIMx SMCR */ + TIMx->SMCR = tmpsmcr; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_EncoderInterfaceConfig +* Description : Configures the TIMx Encoder Interface. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_EncoderMode: specifies the TIMx Encoder Mode. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_EncoderMode_TI1: Counter counts on TI1FP1 edge +* depending on TI2FP2 level. +* - TIM_EncoderMode_TI2: Counter counts on TI2FP2 edge +* depending on TI1FP1 level. +* - TIM_EncoderMode_TI12: Counter counts on both TI1FP1 and +* TI2FP2 edges depending on the level of the other input. +* - TIM_IC1Polarity: specifies the IC1 Polarity +* This parmeter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_ICPolarity_Falling: IC Falling edge. +* - TIM_ICPolarity_Rising: IC Rising edge. +* - TIM_IC2Polarity: specifies the IC2 Polarity +* This parmeter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_ICPolarity_Falling: IC Falling edge. +* - TIM_ICPolarity_Rising: IC Rising edge. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_EncoderInterfaceConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_EncoderMode, + u16 TIM_IC1Polarity, u16 TIM_IC2Polarity) +{ + u16 tmpsmcr = 0; + u16 tmpccmr1 = 0; + u16 tmpccer = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_ENCODER_MODE(TIM_EncoderMode)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_POLARITY(TIM_IC1Polarity)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_POLARITY(TIM_IC2Polarity)); + + /* Get the TIMx SMCR register value */ + tmpsmcr = TIMx->SMCR; + + /* Get the TIMx CCMR1 register value */ + tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1; + + /* Get the TIMx CCER register value */ + tmpccer = TIMx->CCER; + + /* Set the encoder Mode */ + tmpsmcr &= SMCR_SMS_Mask; + tmpsmcr |= TIM_EncoderMode; + + /* Select the Capture Compare 1 and the Capture Compare 2 as input */ + tmpccmr1 &= CCMR_CC13S_Mask & CCMR_CC24S_Mask; + tmpccmr1 |= CCMR_TI13Direct_Set | CCMR_TI24Direct_Set; + + /* Set the TI1 and the TI2 Polarities */ + tmpccer &= CCER_CC1P_Reset & CCER_CC2P_Reset; + tmpccer |= (TIM_IC1Polarity | (u16)(TIM_IC2Polarity << 4)); + + /* Write to TIMx SMCR */ + TIMx->SMCR = tmpsmcr; + + /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 */ + TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1; + + /* Write to TIMx CCER */ + TIMx->CCER = tmpccer; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_ForcedOC1Config +* Description : Forces the TIMx output 1 waveform to active or inactive level. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_ForcedAction: specifies the forced Action to be set to +* the output waveform. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_ForcedAction_Active: Force active level on OC1REF +* - TIM_ForcedAction_InActive: Force inactive level on +* OC1REF. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_ForcedOC1Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_ForcedAction) +{ + u16 tmpccmr1 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_FORCED_ACTION(TIM_ForcedAction)); + + tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1; + + /* Reset the OC1M Bits */ + tmpccmr1 &= CCMR_OC13M_Mask; + + /* Configure The Forced output Mode */ + tmpccmr1 |= TIM_ForcedAction; + + /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 register */ + TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_ForcedOC2Config +* Description : Forces the TIMx output 2 waveform to active or inactive level. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_ForcedAction: specifies the forced Action to be set to +* the output waveform. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_ForcedAction_Active: Force active level on OC2REF +* - TIM_ForcedAction_InActive: Force inactive level on +* OC2REF. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_ForcedOC2Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_ForcedAction) +{ + u16 tmpccmr1 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_FORCED_ACTION(TIM_ForcedAction)); + + tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1; + + /* Reset the OC2M Bits */ + tmpccmr1 &= CCMR_OC24M_Mask; + + /* Configure The Forced output Mode */ + tmpccmr1 |= (u16)(TIM_ForcedAction << 8); + + /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 register */ + TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_ForcedOC3Config +* Description : Forces the TIMx output 3 waveform to active or inactive level. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_ForcedAction: specifies the forced Action to be set to +* the output waveform. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_ForcedAction_Active: Force active level on OC3REF +* - TIM_ForcedAction_InActive: Force inactive level on +* OC3REF. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_ForcedOC3Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_ForcedAction) +{ + u16 tmpccmr2 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_FORCED_ACTION(TIM_ForcedAction)); + + tmpccmr2 = TIMx->CCMR2; + + /* Reset the OC1M Bits */ + tmpccmr2 &= CCMR_OC13M_Mask; + + /* Configure The Forced output Mode */ + tmpccmr2 |= TIM_ForcedAction; + + /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 register */ + TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmr2; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_ForcedOC4Config +* Description : Forces the TIMx output 4 waveform to active or inactive level. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_ForcedAction: specifies the forced Action to be set to +* the output waveform. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_ForcedAction_Active: Force active level on OC4REF +* - TIM_ForcedAction_InActive: Force inactive level on +* OC4REF. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_ForcedOC4Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_ForcedAction) +{ + u16 tmpccmr2 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_FORCED_ACTION(TIM_ForcedAction)); + tmpccmr2 = TIMx->CCMR2; + + /* Reset the OC2M Bits */ + tmpccmr2 &= CCMR_OC24M_Mask; + + /* Configure The Forced output Mode */ + tmpccmr2 |= (u16)(TIM_ForcedAction << 8); + + /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 register */ + TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmr2; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_ARRPreloadConfig +* Description : Enables or disables TIMx peripheral Preload register on ARR. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - NewState: new state of the TIMx peripheral Preload register +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_ARRPreloadConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Set the ARR Preload Bit */ + TIMx->CR1 |= CR1_ARPE_Set; + } + else + { + /* Reset the ARR Preload Bit */ + TIMx->CR1 &= CR1_ARPE_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_SelectCOM +* Description : Selects the TIM peripheral Commutation event. +* Input :- TIMx: where x can be 1 or 8 to select the TIMx peripheral +* - NewState: new state of the Commutation event. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_SelectCOM(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_18_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Set the COM Bit */ + TIMx->CR2 |= CR2_CCUS_Set; + } + else + { + /* Reset the COM Bit */ + TIMx->CR2 &= CR2_CCUS_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_SelectCCDMA +* Description : Selects the TIMx peripheral Capture Compare DMA source. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - NewState: new state of the Capture Compare DMA source +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_SelectCCDMA(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Set the CCDS Bit */ + TIMx->CR2 |= CR2_CCDS_Set; + } + else + { + /* Reset the CCDS Bit */ + TIMx->CR2 &= CR2_CCDS_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_CCPreloadControl +* Description : Sets or Resets the TIM peripheral Capture Compare Preload +* Control bit. +* Input :- TIMx: where x can be 1 or 8 to select the TIMx peripheral +* - NewState: new state of the Capture Compare Preload Control bit +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_CCPreloadControl(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_18_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Set the CCPC Bit */ + TIMx->CR2 |= CR2_CCPC_Set; + } + else + { + /* Reset the CCPC Bit */ + TIMx->CR2 &= CR2_CCPC_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_OC1PreloadConfig +* Description : Enables or disables the TIMx peripheral Preload register on CCR1. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_OCPreload: new state of the TIMx peripheral Preload +* register +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_OCPreload_Enable +* - TIM_OCPreload_Disable +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_OC1PreloadConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_OCPreload) +{ + u16 tmpccmr1 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OCPRELOAD_STATE(TIM_OCPreload)); + + tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1; + + /* Reset the OC1PE Bit */ + tmpccmr1 &= CCMR_OC13PE_Reset; + + /* Enable or Disable the Output Compare Preload feature */ + tmpccmr1 |= TIM_OCPreload; + + /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 register */ + TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_OC2PreloadConfig +* Description : Enables or disables the TIMx peripheral Preload register on CCR2. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_OCPreload: new state of the TIMx peripheral Preload +* register +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_OCPreload_Enable +* - TIM_OCPreload_Disable +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_OC2PreloadConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_OCPreload) +{ + u16 tmpccmr1 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OCPRELOAD_STATE(TIM_OCPreload)); + + tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1; + + /* Reset the OC2PE Bit */ + tmpccmr1 &= CCMR_OC24PE_Reset; + + /* Enable or Disable the Output Compare Preload feature */ + tmpccmr1 |= (u16)(TIM_OCPreload << 8); + + /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 register */ + TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_OC3PreloadConfig +* Description : Enables or disables the TIMx peripheral Preload register on CCR3. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_OCPreload: new state of the TIMx peripheral Preload +* register +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_OCPreload_Enable +* - TIM_OCPreload_Disable +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_OC3PreloadConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_OCPreload) +{ + u16 tmpccmr2 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OCPRELOAD_STATE(TIM_OCPreload)); + + tmpccmr2 = TIMx->CCMR2; + + /* Reset the OC3PE Bit */ + tmpccmr2 &= CCMR_OC13PE_Reset; + + /* Enable or Disable the Output Compare Preload feature */ + tmpccmr2 |= TIM_OCPreload; + + /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 register */ + TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmr2; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_OC4PreloadConfig +* Description : Enables or disables the TIMx peripheral Preload register on CCR4. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_OCPreload: new state of the TIMx peripheral Preload +* register +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_OCPreload_Enable +* - TIM_OCPreload_Disable +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_OC4PreloadConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_OCPreload) +{ + u16 tmpccmr2 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OCPRELOAD_STATE(TIM_OCPreload)); + + tmpccmr2 = TIMx->CCMR2; + + /* Reset the OC4PE Bit */ + tmpccmr2 &= CCMR_OC24PE_Reset; + + /* Enable or Disable the Output Compare Preload feature */ + tmpccmr2 |= (u16)(TIM_OCPreload << 8); + + /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 register */ + TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmr2; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_OC1FastConfig +* Description : Configures the TIMx Output Compare 1 Fast feature. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_OCFast: new state of the Output Compare Fast Enable Bit. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_OCFast_Enable: TIM output compare fast enable +* - TIM_OCFast_Disable: TIM output compare fast disable +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_OC1FastConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_OCFast) +{ + u16 tmpccmr1 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OCFAST_STATE(TIM_OCFast)); + + /* Get the TIMx CCMR1 register value */ + tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1; + + /* Reset the OC1FE Bit */ + tmpccmr1 &= CCMR_OC13FE_Reset; + + /* Enable or Disable the Output Compare Fast Bit */ + tmpccmr1 |= TIM_OCFast; + + /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 */ + TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_OC2FastConfig +* Description : Configures the TIMx Output Compare 2 Fast feature. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_OCFast: new state of the Output Compare Fast Enable Bit. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_OCFast_Enable: TIM output compare fast enable +* - TIM_OCFast_Disable: TIM output compare fast disable +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_OC2FastConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_OCFast) +{ + u16 tmpccmr1 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OCFAST_STATE(TIM_OCFast)); + + /* Get the TIMx CCMR1 register value */ + tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1; + + /* Reset the OC2FE Bit */ + tmpccmr1 &= CCMR_OC24FE_Reset; + + /* Enable or Disable the Output Compare Fast Bit */ + tmpccmr1 |= (u16)(TIM_OCFast << 8); + + /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 */ + TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_OC3FastConfig +* Description : Configures the TIMx Output Compare 3 Fast feature. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_OCFast: new state of the Output Compare Fast Enable Bit. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_OCFast_Enable: TIM output compare fast enable +* - TIM_OCFast_Disable: TIM output compare fast disable +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_OC3FastConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_OCFast) +{ + u16 tmpccmr2 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OCFAST_STATE(TIM_OCFast)); + + /* Get the TIMx CCMR2 register value */ + tmpccmr2 = TIMx->CCMR2; + + /* Reset the OC3FE Bit */ + tmpccmr2 &= CCMR_OC13FE_Reset; + + /* Enable or Disable the Output Compare Fast Bit */ + tmpccmr2 |= TIM_OCFast; + + /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 */ + TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmr2; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_OC4FastConfig +* Description : Configures the TIMx Output Compare 4 Fast feature. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_OCFast: new state of the Output Compare Fast Enable Bit. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_OCFast_Enable: TIM output compare fast enable +* - TIM_OCFast_Disable: TIM output compare fast disable +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_OC4FastConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_OCFast) +{ + u16 tmpccmr2 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OCFAST_STATE(TIM_OCFast)); + + /* Get the TIMx CCMR2 register value */ + tmpccmr2 = TIMx->CCMR2; + + /* Reset the OC4FE Bit */ + tmpccmr2 &= CCMR_OC24FE_Reset; + + /* Enable or Disable the Output Compare Fast Bit */ + tmpccmr2 |= (u16)(TIM_OCFast << 8); + + /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 */ + TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmr2; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_ClearOC1Ref +* Description : Clears or safeguards the OCREF1 signal on an external event +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_OCClear: new state of the Output Compare Clear Enable Bit. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_OCClear_Enable: TIM Output clear enable +* - TIM_OCClear_Disable: TIM Output clear disable +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_ClearOC1Ref(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_OCClear) +{ + u16 tmpccmr1 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OCCLEAR_STATE(TIM_OCClear)); + + tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1; + + /* Reset the OC1CE Bit */ + tmpccmr1 &= CCMR_OC13CE_Reset; + + /* Enable or Disable the Output Compare Clear Bit */ + tmpccmr1 |= TIM_OCClear; + + /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 register */ + TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_ClearOC2Ref +* Description : Clears or safeguards the OCREF2 signal on an external event +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_OCClear: new state of the Output Compare Clear Enable Bit. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_OCClear_Enable: TIM Output clear enable +* - TIM_OCClear_Disable: TIM Output clear disable +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_ClearOC2Ref(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_OCClear) +{ + u16 tmpccmr1 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OCCLEAR_STATE(TIM_OCClear)); + + tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1; + + /* Reset the OC2CE Bit */ + tmpccmr1 &= CCMR_OC24CE_Reset; + + /* Enable or Disable the Output Compare Clear Bit */ + tmpccmr1 |= (u16)(TIM_OCClear << 8); + + /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 register */ + TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_ClearOC3Ref +* Description : Clears or safeguards the OCREF3 signal on an external event +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_OCClear: new state of the Output Compare Clear Enable Bit. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_OCClear_Enable: TIM Output clear enable +* - TIM_OCClear_Disable: TIM Output clear disable +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_ClearOC3Ref(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_OCClear) +{ + u16 tmpccmr2 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OCCLEAR_STATE(TIM_OCClear)); + + tmpccmr2 = TIMx->CCMR2; + + /* Reset the OC3CE Bit */ + tmpccmr2 &= CCMR_OC13CE_Reset; + + /* Enable or Disable the Output Compare Clear Bit */ + tmpccmr2 |= TIM_OCClear; + + /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 register */ + TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmr2; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_ClearOC4Ref +* Description : Clears or safeguards the OCREF4 signal on an external event +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_OCClear: new state of the Output Compare Clear Enable Bit. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_OCClear_Enable: TIM Output clear enable +* - TIM_OCClear_Disable: TIM Output clear disable +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_ClearOC4Ref(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_OCClear) +{ + u16 tmpccmr2 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OCCLEAR_STATE(TIM_OCClear)); + + tmpccmr2 = TIMx->CCMR2; + + /* Reset the OC4CE Bit */ + tmpccmr2 &= CCMR_OC24CE_Reset; + + /* Enable or Disable the Output Compare Clear Bit */ + tmpccmr2 |= (u16)(TIM_OCClear << 8); + + /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 register */ + TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmr2; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_OC1PolarityConfig +* Description : Configures the TIMx channel 1 polarity. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_OCPolarity: specifies the OC1 Polarity +* This parmeter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_OCPolarity_High: Output Compare active high +* - TIM_OCPolarity_Low: Output Compare active low +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_OC1PolarityConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_OCPolarity) +{ + u16 tmpccer = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_POLARITY(TIM_OCPolarity)); + + tmpccer = TIMx->CCER; + + /* Set or Reset the CC1P Bit */ + tmpccer &= CCER_CC1P_Reset; + tmpccer |= TIM_OCPolarity; + + /* Write to TIMx CCER register */ + TIMx->CCER = tmpccer; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_OC1NPolarityConfig +* Description : Configures the TIMx Channel 1N polarity. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 or 8 to select the TIM peripheral. +* - TIM_OCNPolarity: specifies the OC1N Polarity +* This parmeter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_OCNPolarity_High: Output Compare active high +* - TIM_OCNPolarity_Low: Output Compare active low +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_OC1NPolarityConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_OCNPolarity) +{ + u16 tmpccer = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_18_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OCN_POLARITY(TIM_OCNPolarity)); + + tmpccer = TIMx->CCER; + + /* Set or Reset the CC1NP Bit */ + tmpccer &= CCER_CC1NP_Reset; + tmpccer |= TIM_OCNPolarity; + + /* Write to TIMx CCER register */ + TIMx->CCER = tmpccer; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_OC2PolarityConfig +* Description : Configures the TIMx channel 2 polarity. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_OCPolarity: specifies the OC2 Polarity +* This parmeter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_OCPolarity_High: Output Compare active high +* - TIM_OCPolarity_Low: Output Compare active low +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_OC2PolarityConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_OCPolarity) +{ + u16 tmpccer = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_POLARITY(TIM_OCPolarity)); + + tmpccer = TIMx->CCER; + + /* Set or Reset the CC2P Bit */ + tmpccer &= CCER_CC2P_Reset; + tmpccer |= (u16)(TIM_OCPolarity << 4); + + /* Write to TIMx CCER register */ + TIMx->CCER = tmpccer; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_OC2NPolarityConfig +* Description : Configures the TIMx Channel 2N polarity. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 or 8 to select the TIM peripheral. +* - TIM_OCNPolarity: specifies the OC2N Polarity +* This parmeter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_OCNPolarity_High: Output Compare active high +* - TIM_OCNPolarity_Low: Output Compare active low +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_OC2NPolarityConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_OCNPolarity) +{ + u16 tmpccer = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_18_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OCN_POLARITY(TIM_OCNPolarity)); + + tmpccer = TIMx->CCER; + + /* Set or Reset the CC2NP Bit */ + tmpccer &= CCER_CC2NP_Reset; + tmpccer |= (u16)(TIM_OCNPolarity << 4); + + /* Write to TIMx CCER register */ + TIMx->CCER = tmpccer; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_OC3PolarityConfig +* Description : Configures the TIMx channel 3 polarity. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_OCPolarity: specifies the OC3 Polarity +* This parmeter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_OCPolarity_High: Output Compare active high +* - TIM_OCPolarity_Low: Output Compare active low +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_OC3PolarityConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_OCPolarity) +{ + u16 tmpccer = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_POLARITY(TIM_OCPolarity)); + + tmpccer = TIMx->CCER; + + /* Set or Reset the CC3P Bit */ + tmpccer &= CCER_CC3P_Reset; + tmpccer |= (u16)(TIM_OCPolarity << 8); + + /* Write to TIMx CCER register */ + TIMx->CCER = tmpccer; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_OC3NPolarityConfig +* Description : Configures the TIMx Channel 3N polarity. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 or 8 to select the TIM peripheral. +* - TIM_OCNPolarity: specifies the OC3N Polarity +* This parmeter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_OCNPolarity_High: Output Compare active high +* - TIM_OCNPolarity_Low: Output Compare active low +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_OC3NPolarityConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_OCNPolarity) +{ + u16 tmpccer = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_18_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OCN_POLARITY(TIM_OCNPolarity)); + + tmpccer = TIMx->CCER; + + /* Set or Reset the CC3NP Bit */ + tmpccer &= CCER_CC3NP_Reset; + tmpccer |= (u16)(TIM_OCNPolarity << 8); + + /* Write to TIMx CCER register */ + TIMx->CCER = tmpccer; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_OC4PolarityConfig +* Description : Configures the TIMx channel 4 polarity. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_OCPolarity: specifies the OC4 Polarity +* This parmeter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_OCPolarity_High: Output Compare active high +* - TIM_OCPolarity_Low: Output Compare active low +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_OC4PolarityConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_OCPolarity) +{ + u16 tmpccer = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_POLARITY(TIM_OCPolarity)); + + tmpccer = TIMx->CCER; + + /* Set or Reset the CC4P Bit */ + tmpccer &= CCER_CC4P_Reset; + tmpccer |= (u16)(TIM_OCPolarity << 12); + + /* Write to TIMx CCER register */ + TIMx->CCER = tmpccer; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_CCxCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the TIM Capture Compare Channel x. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_Channel: specifies the TIM Channel +* This parmeter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_Channel_1: TIM Channel 1 +* - TIM_Channel_2: TIM Channel 2 +* - TIM_Channel_3: TIM Channel 3 +* - TIM_Channel_4: TIM Channel 4 +* - TIM_CCx: specifies the TIM Channel CCxE bit new state. +* This parameter can be: TIM_CCx_Enable or TIM_CCx_Disable. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_CCxCmd(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_Channel, u16 TIM_CCx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_CHANNEL(TIM_Channel)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_CCX(TIM_CCx)); + + /* Reset the CCxE Bit */ + TIMx->CCER &= (u16)(~((u16)(CCER_CCE_Set << TIM_Channel))); + + /* Set or reset the CCxE Bit */ + TIMx->CCER |= (u16)(TIM_CCx << TIM_Channel); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_CCxNCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the TIM Capture Compare Channel xN. +* Input :- TIMx: where x can be 1 or 8 to select the TIM peripheral. +* - TIM_Channel: specifies the TIM Channel +* This parmeter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_Channel_1: TIM Channel 1 +* - TIM_Channel_2: TIM Channel 2 +* - TIM_Channel_3: TIM Channel 3 +* - TIM_CCx: specifies the TIM Channel CCxNE bit new state. +* This parameter can be: TIM_CCxN_Enable or TIM_CCxN_Disable. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_CCxNCmd(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_Channel, u16 TIM_CCxN) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_18_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_COMPLEMENTARY_CHANNEL(TIM_Channel)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_CCXN(TIM_CCxN)); + + /* Reset the CCxNE Bit */ + TIMx->CCER &= (u16)(~((u16)(CCER_CCNE_Set << TIM_Channel))); + + /* Set or reset the CCxNE Bit */ + TIMx->CCER |= (u16)(TIM_CCxN << TIM_Channel); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_SelectOCxM +* Description : Selects the TIM Ouput Compare Mode. +* This function disables the selected channel before changing +* the Ouput Compare Mode. User has to enable this channel using +* TIM_CCxCmd and TIM_CCxNCmd functions. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_Channel: specifies the TIM Channel +* This parmeter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_Channel_1: TIM Channel 1 +* - TIM_Channel_2: TIM Channel 2 +* - TIM_Channel_3: TIM Channel 3 +* - TIM_Channel_4: TIM Channel 4 +* - TIM_OCMode: specifies the TIM Output Compare Mode. +* This paramter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_OCMode_Timing +* - TIM_OCMode_Active +* - TIM_OCMode_Toggle +* - TIM_OCMode_PWM1 +* - TIM_OCMode_PWM2 +* - TIM_ForcedAction_Active +* - TIM_ForcedAction_InActive +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_SelectOCxM(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_Channel, u16 TIM_OCMode) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_CHANNEL(TIM_Channel)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OCM(TIM_OCMode)); + + /* Disable the Channel: Reset the CCxE Bit */ + TIMx->CCER &= (u16)(~((u16)(CCER_CCE_Set << TIM_Channel))); + + if((TIM_Channel == TIM_Channel_1) ||(TIM_Channel == TIM_Channel_3)) + { + /* Reset the OCxM bits in the CCMRx register */ + *((vu32 *)((*(u32*)&TIMx) + CCMR_Offset + (TIM_Channel>>1))) &= CCMR_OC13M_Mask; + + /* Configure the OCxM bits in the CCMRx register */ + *((vu32 *)((*(u32*)&TIMx) + CCMR_Offset + (TIM_Channel>>1))) = TIM_OCMode; + + } + else + { + /* Reset the OCxM bits in the CCMRx register */ + *((vu32 *)((*(u32*)&TIMx) + CCMR_Offset + ((u16)(TIM_Channel - 4)>> 1))) &= CCMR_OC24M_Mask; + + /* Configure the OCxM bits in the CCMRx register */ + *((vu32 *)((*(u32*)&TIMx) + CCMR_Offset + ((u16)(TIM_Channel - 4)>> 1))) = (u16)(TIM_OCMode << 8); + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_UpdateDisableConfig +* Description : Enables or Disables the TIMx Update event. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 to 8 to select the TIM peripheral. +* - NewState: new state of the TIMx UDIS bit +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_UpdateDisableConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Set the Update Disable Bit */ + TIMx->CR1 |= CR1_UDIS_Set; + } + else + { + /* Reset the Update Disable Bit */ + TIMx->CR1 &= CR1_UDIS_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_UpdateRequestConfig +* Description : Configures the TIMx Update Request Interrupt source. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 to 8 to select the TIM peripheral. +* - TIM_UpdateSource: specifies the Update source. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_UpdateSource_Regular +* - TIM_UpdateSource_Global +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_UpdateRequestConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_UpdateSource) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_UPDATE_SOURCE(TIM_UpdateSource)); + + if (TIM_UpdateSource != TIM_UpdateSource_Global) + { + /* Set the URS Bit */ + TIMx->CR1 |= CR1_URS_Set; + } + else + { + /* Reset the URS Bit */ + TIMx->CR1 &= CR1_URS_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_SelectHallSensor +* Description : Enables or disables the TIMx’s Hall sensor interface. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM peripheral. +* - NewState: new state of the TIMx Hall sensor interface. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_SelectHallSensor(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Set the TI1S Bit */ + TIMx->CR2 |= CR2_TI1S_Set; + } + else + { + /* Reset the TI1S Bit */ + TIMx->CR2 &= CR2_TI1S_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_SelectOnePulseMode +* Description : Selects the TIMx’s One Pulse Mode. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 to 8 to select the TIM peripheral. +* - TIM_OPMode: specifies the OPM Mode to be used. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_OPMode_Single +* - TIM_OPMode_Repetitive +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_SelectOnePulseMode(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_OPMode) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_OPM_MODE(TIM_OPMode)); + + /* Reset the OPM Bit */ + TIMx->CR1 &= CR1_OPM_Reset; + + /* Configure the OPM Mode */ + TIMx->CR1 |= TIM_OPMode; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_SelectOutputTrigger +* Description : Selects the TIMx Trigger Output Mode. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 to 8 to select the TIM peripheral. +* - TIM_TRGOSource: specifies the Trigger Output source. +* This paramter can be as follow: +* 1/ For TIM1 to TIM8: +* - TIM_TRGOSource_Reset +* - TIM_TRGOSource_Enable +* - TIM_TRGOSource_Update +* 2/ These parameters are available for all TIMx except +* TIM6 and TIM7: +* - TIM_TRGOSource_OC1 +* - TIM_TRGOSource_OC1Ref +* - TIM_TRGOSource_OC2Ref +* - TIM_TRGOSource_OC3Ref +* - TIM_TRGOSource_OC4Ref +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_SelectOutputTrigger(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_TRGOSource) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_TRGO_SOURCE(TIM_TRGOSource)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_PERIPH_TRGO(TIMx, TIM_TRGOSource)); + + /* Reset the MMS Bits */ + TIMx->CR2 &= CR2_MMS_Mask; + + /* Select the TRGO source */ + TIMx->CR2 |= TIM_TRGOSource; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_SelectSlaveMode +* Description : Selects the TIMx Slave Mode. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_SlaveMode: specifies the Timer Slave Mode. +* This paramter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_SlaveMode_Reset +* - TIM_SlaveMode_Gated +* - TIM_SlaveMode_Trigger +* - TIM_SlaveMode_External1 +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_SelectSlaveMode(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_SlaveMode) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_SLAVE_MODE(TIM_SlaveMode)); + + /* Reset the SMS Bits */ + TIMx->SMCR &= SMCR_SMS_Mask; + + /* Select the Slave Mode */ + TIMx->SMCR |= TIM_SlaveMode; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_SelectMasterSlaveMode +* Description : Sets or Resets the TIMx Master/Slave Mode. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_MasterSlaveMode: specifies the Timer Master Slave Mode. +* This paramter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_MasterSlaveMode_Enable: synchronization between the +* current timer and its slaves (through TRGO). +* - TIM_MasterSlaveMode_Disable: No action +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_SelectMasterSlaveMode(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_MasterSlaveMode) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_MSM_STATE(TIM_MasterSlaveMode)); + + /* Reset the MSM Bit */ + TIMx->SMCR &= SMCR_MSM_Reset; + + /* Set or Reset the MSM Bit */ + TIMx->SMCR |= TIM_MasterSlaveMode; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_SetCounter +* Description : Sets the TIMx Counter Register value +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 to 8 to select the TIM peripheral. +* - Counter: specifies the Counter register new value. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_SetCounter(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 Counter) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx)); + + /* Set the Counter Register value */ + TIMx->CNT = Counter; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_SetAutoreload +* Description : Sets the TIMx Autoreload Register value +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 to 8 to select the TIM peripheral. +* - Autoreload: specifies the Autoreload register new value. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_SetAutoreload(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 Autoreload) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx)); + + /* Set the Autoreload Register value */ + TIMx->ARR = Autoreload; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_SetCompare1 +* Description : Sets the TIMx Capture Compare1 Register value +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - Compare1: specifies the Capture Compare1 register new value. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_SetCompare1(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 Compare1) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + + /* Set the Capture Compare1 Register value */ + TIMx->CCR1 = Compare1; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_SetCompare2 +* Description : Sets the TIMx Capture Compare2 Register value +* Input : TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - Compare2: specifies the Capture Compare2 register new value. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_SetCompare2(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 Compare2) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + + /* Set the Capture Compare2 Register value */ + TIMx->CCR2 = Compare2; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_SetCompare3 +* Description : Sets the TIMx Capture Compare3 Register value +* Input : TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - Compare3: specifies the Capture Compare3 register new value. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_SetCompare3(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 Compare3) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + + /* Set the Capture Compare3 Register value */ + TIMx->CCR3 = Compare3; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_SetCompare4 +* Description : Sets the TIMx Capture Compare4 Register value +* Input : TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - Compare4: specifies the Capture Compare4 register new value. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_SetCompare4(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 Compare4) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + + /* Set the Capture Compare4 Register value */ + TIMx->CCR4 = Compare4; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_SetIC1Prescaler +* Description : Sets the TIMx Input Capture 1 prescaler. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_ICPSC: specifies the Input Capture1 prescaler +* new value. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_ICPSC_DIV1: no prescaler +* - TIM_ICPSC_DIV2: capture is done once every 2 events +* - TIM_ICPSC_DIV4: capture is done once every 4 events +* - TIM_ICPSC_DIV8: capture is done once every 8 events +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_SetIC1Prescaler(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_ICPSC) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_PRESCALER(TIM_ICPSC)); + + /* Reset the IC1PSC Bits */ + TIMx->CCMR1 &= CCMR_IC13PSC_Mask; + + /* Set the IC1PSC value */ + TIMx->CCMR1 |= TIM_ICPSC; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_SetIC2Prescaler +* Description : Sets the TIMx Input Capture 2 prescaler. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_ICPSC: specifies the Input Capture2 prescaler +* new value. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_ICPSC_DIV1: no prescaler +* - TIM_ICPSC_DIV2: capture is done once every 2 events +* - TIM_ICPSC_DIV4: capture is done once every 4 events +* - TIM_ICPSC_DIV8: capture is done once every 8 events +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_SetIC2Prescaler(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_ICPSC) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_PRESCALER(TIM_ICPSC)); + + /* Reset the IC2PSC Bits */ + TIMx->CCMR1 &= CCMR_IC24PSC_Mask; + + /* Set the IC2PSC value */ + TIMx->CCMR1 |= (u16)(TIM_ICPSC << 8); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_SetIC3Prescaler +* Description : Sets the TIMx Input Capture 3 prescaler. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_ICPSC: specifies the Input Capture3 prescaler +* new value. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_ICPSC_DIV1: no prescaler +* - TIM_ICPSC_DIV2: capture is done once every 2 events +* - TIM_ICPSC_DIV4: capture is done once every 4 events +* - TIM_ICPSC_DIV8: capture is done once every 8 events +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_SetIC3Prescaler(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_ICPSC) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_PRESCALER(TIM_ICPSC)); + + /* Reset the IC3PSC Bits */ + TIMx->CCMR2 &= CCMR_IC13PSC_Mask; + + /* Set the IC3PSC value */ + TIMx->CCMR2 |= TIM_ICPSC; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_SetIC4Prescaler +* Description : Sets the TIMx Input Capture 4 prescaler. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_ICPSC: specifies the Input Capture4 prescaler +* new value. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_ICPSC_DIV1: no prescaler +* - TIM_ICPSC_DIV2: capture is done once every 2 events +* - TIM_ICPSC_DIV4: capture is done once every 4 events +* - TIM_ICPSC_DIV8: capture is done once every 8 events +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_SetIC4Prescaler(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_ICPSC) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_PRESCALER(TIM_ICPSC)); + + /* Reset the IC4PSC Bits */ + TIMx->CCMR2 &= CCMR_IC24PSC_Mask; + + /* Set the IC4PSC value */ + TIMx->CCMR2 |= (u16)(TIM_ICPSC << 8); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_SetClockDivision +* Description : Sets the TIMx Clock Division value. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_CKD: specifies the clock division value. +* This parameter can be one of the following value: +* - TIM_CKD_DIV1: TDTS = Tck_tim +* - TIM_CKD_DIV2: TDTS = 2*Tck_tim +* - TIM_CKD_DIV4: TDTS = 4*Tck_tim +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_SetClockDivision(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_CKD) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_CKD_DIV(TIM_CKD)); + + /* Reset the CKD Bits */ + TIMx->CR1 &= CR1_CKD_Mask; + + /* Set the CKD value */ + TIMx->CR1 |= TIM_CKD; +} +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_GetCapture1 +* Description : Gets the TIMx Input Capture 1 value. +* Input : TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : Capture Compare 1 Register value. +*******************************************************************************/ +u16 TIM_GetCapture1(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + + /* Get the Capture 1 Register value */ + return TIMx->CCR1; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_GetCapture2 +* Description : Gets the TIMx Input Capture 2 value. +* Input : TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : Capture Compare 2 Register value. +*******************************************************************************/ +u16 TIM_GetCapture2(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + + /* Get the Capture 2 Register value */ + return TIMx->CCR2; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_GetCapture3 +* Description : Gets the TIMx Input Capture 3 value. +* Input : TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : Capture Compare 3 Register value. +*******************************************************************************/ +u16 TIM_GetCapture3(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + + /* Get the Capture 3 Register value */ + return TIMx->CCR3; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_GetCapture4 +* Description : Gets the TIMx Input Capture 4 value. +* Input : TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : Capture Compare 4 Register value. +*******************************************************************************/ +u16 TIM_GetCapture4(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_123458_PERIPH(TIMx)); + + /* Get the Capture 4 Register value */ + return TIMx->CCR4; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_GetCounter +* Description : Gets the TIMx Counter value. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 to 8 to select the TIM peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : Counter Register value. +*******************************************************************************/ +u16 TIM_GetCounter(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx)); + + /* Get the Counter Register value */ + return TIMx->CNT; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_GetPrescaler +* Description : Gets the TIMx Prescaler value. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 to 8 to select the TIM peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : Prescaler Register value. +*******************************************************************************/ +u16 TIM_GetPrescaler(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx)); + + /* Get the Prescaler Register value */ + return TIMx->PSC; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_GetFlagStatus +* Description : Checks whether the specified TIM flag is set or not. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 to 8 to select the TIM peripheral. +* - TIM_FLAG: specifies the flag to check. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_FLAG_Update: TIM update Flag +* - TIM_FLAG_CC1: TIM Capture Compare 1 Flag +* - TIM_FLAG_CC2: TIM Capture Compare 2 Flag +* - TIM_FLAG_CC3: TIM Capture Compare 3 Flag +* - TIM_FLAG_CC4: TIM Capture Compare 4 Flag +* - TIM_FLAG_COM: TIM Commutation Flag +* - TIM_FLAG_Trigger: TIM Trigger Flag +* - TIM_FLAG_Break: TIM Break Flag +* - TIM_FLAG_CC1OF: TIM Capture Compare 1 overcapture Flag +* - TIM_FLAG_CC2OF: TIM Capture Compare 2 overcapture Flag +* - TIM_FLAG_CC3OF: TIM Capture Compare 3 overcapture Flag +* - TIM_FLAG_CC4OF: TIM Capture Compare 4 overcapture Flag +* Output : None +* Return : The new state of TIM_FLAG (SET or RESET). +*******************************************************************************/ +FlagStatus TIM_GetFlagStatus(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_FLAG) +{ + ITStatus bitstatus = RESET; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_GET_FLAG(TIM_FLAG)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_PERIPH_FLAG(TIMx, TIM_FLAG)); + + if ((TIMx->SR & TIM_FLAG) != (u16)RESET) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + return bitstatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_ClearFlag +* Description : Clears the TIMx's pending flags. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 to 8 to select the TIM peripheral. +* - TIM_FLAG: specifies the flag bit to clear. +* This parameter can be any combination of the following values: +* - TIM_FLAG_Update: TIM update Flag +* - TIM_FLAG_CC1: TIM Capture Compare 1 Flag +* - TIM_FLAG_CC2: TIM Capture Compare 2 Flag +* - TIM_FLAG_CC3: TIM Capture Compare 3 Flag +* - TIM_FLAG_CC4: TIM Capture Compare 4 Flag +* - TIM_FLAG_COM: TIM Commutation Flag +* - TIM_FLAG_Trigger: TIM Trigger Flag +* - TIM_FLAG_Break: TIM Break Flag +* - TIM_FLAG_CC1OF: TIM Capture Compare 1 overcapture Flag +* - TIM_FLAG_CC2OF: TIM Capture Compare 2 overcapture Flag +* - TIM_FLAG_CC3OF: TIM Capture Compare 3 overcapture Flag +* - TIM_FLAG_CC4OF: TIM Capture Compare 4 overcapture Flag +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_ClearFlag(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_FLAG) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_CLEAR_FLAG(TIMx, TIM_FLAG)); + + /* Clear the flags */ + TIMx->SR = (u16)~TIM_FLAG; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_GetITStatus +* Description : Checks whether the TIM interrupt has occurred or not. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 to 8 to select the TIM peripheral. +* - TIM_IT: specifies the TIM interrupt source to check. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_IT_Update: TIM update Interrupt source +* - TIM_IT_CC1: TIM Capture Compare 1 Interrupt source +* - TIM_IT_CC2: TIM Capture Compare 2 Interrupt source +* - TIM_IT_CC3: TIM Capture Compare 3 Interrupt source +* - TIM_IT_CC4: TIM Capture Compare 4 Interrupt source +* - TIM_IT_COM: TIM Commutation Interrupt +* source +* - TIM_IT_Trigger: TIM Trigger Interrupt source +* - TIM_IT_Break: TIM Break Interrupt source +* Output : None +* Return : The new state of the TIM_IT(SET or RESET). +*******************************************************************************/ +ITStatus TIM_GetITStatus(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_IT) +{ + ITStatus bitstatus = RESET; + u16 itstatus = 0x0, itenable = 0x0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_GET_IT(TIM_IT)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_PERIPH_IT(TIMx, TIM_IT)); + + itstatus = TIMx->SR & TIM_IT; + + itenable = TIMx->DIER & TIM_IT; + + if ((itstatus != (u16)RESET) && (itenable != (u16)RESET)) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + return bitstatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TIM_ClearITPendingBit +* Description : Clears the TIMx's interrupt pending bits. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1 to 8 to select the TIM peripheral. +* - TIM_IT: specifies the pending bit to clear. +* This parameter can be any combination of the following values: +* - TIM_IT_Update: TIM1 update Interrupt source +* - TIM_IT_CC1: TIM Capture Compare 1 Interrupt source +* - TIM_IT_CC2: TIM Capture Compare 2 Interrupt source +* - TIM_IT_CC3: TIM Capture Compare 3 Interrupt source +* - TIM_IT_CC4: TIM Capture Compare 4 Interrupt source +* - TIM_IT_COM: TIM Commutation Interrupt +* source +* - TIM_IT_Trigger: TIM Trigger Interrupt source +* - TIM_IT_Break: TIM Break Interrupt source +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void TIM_ClearITPendingBit(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_IT) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx)); + assert_param(IS_TIM_PERIPH_IT(TIMx, TIM_IT)); + + /* Clear the IT pending Bit */ + TIMx->SR = (u16)~TIM_IT; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TI1_Config +* Description : Configure the TI1 as Input. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_ICPolarity : The Input Polarity. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_ICPolarity_Rising +* - TIM_ICPolarity_Falling +* - TIM_ICSelection: specifies the input to be used. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_ICSelection_DirectTI: TIM Input 1 is selected to +* be connected to IC1. +* - TIM_ICSelection_IndirectTI: TIM Input 1 is selected to +* be connected to IC2. +* - TIM_ICSelection_TRC: TIM Input 1 is selected to be +* connected to TRC. +* - TIM_ICFilter: Specifies the Input Capture Filter. +* This parameter must be a value between 0x00 and 0x0F. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +static void TI1_Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_ICPolarity, u16 TIM_ICSelection, + u16 TIM_ICFilter) +{ + u16 tmpccmr1 = 0, tmpccer = 0; + + /* Disable the Channel 1: Reset the CC1E Bit */ + TIMx->CCER &= CCER_CC1E_Reset; + + tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1; + tmpccer = TIMx->CCER; + + /* Select the Input and set the filter */ + tmpccmr1 &= CCMR_CC13S_Mask & CCMR_IC13F_Mask; + tmpccmr1 |= TIM_ICSelection | (u16)(TIM_ICFilter << 4); + + /* Select the Polarity and set the CC1E Bit */ + tmpccer &= CCER_CC1P_Reset; + tmpccer |= TIM_ICPolarity | CCER_CC1E_Set; + + /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 and CCER registers */ + TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1; + TIMx->CCER = tmpccer; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TI2_Config +* Description : Configure the TI2 as Input. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_ICPolarity : The Input Polarity. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_ICPolarity_Rising +* - TIM_ICPolarity_Falling +* - TIM_ICSelection: specifies the input to be used. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_ICSelection_DirectTI: TIM Input 2 is selected to +* be connected to IC2. +* - TIM_ICSelection_IndirectTI: TIM Input 2 is selected to +* be connected to IC1. +* - TIM_ICSelection_TRC: TIM Input 2 is selected to be +* connected to TRC. +* - TIM_ICFilter: Specifies the Input Capture Filter. +* This parameter must be a value between 0x00 and 0x0F. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +static void TI2_Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_ICPolarity, u16 TIM_ICSelection, + u16 TIM_ICFilter) +{ + u16 tmpccmr1 = 0, tmpccer = 0, tmp = 0; + + /* Disable the Channel 2: Reset the CC2E Bit */ + TIMx->CCER &= CCER_CC2E_Reset; + + tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1; + tmpccer = TIMx->CCER; + tmp = (u16)(TIM_ICPolarity << 4); + + /* Select the Input and set the filter */ + tmpccmr1 &= CCMR_CC24S_Mask & CCMR_IC24F_Mask; + tmpccmr1 |= (u16)(TIM_ICFilter << 12); + tmpccmr1 |= (u16)(TIM_ICSelection << 8); + + /* Select the Polarity and set the CC2E Bit */ + tmpccer &= CCER_CC2P_Reset; + tmpccer |= tmp | CCER_CC2E_Set; + + /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 and CCER registers */ + TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1 ; + TIMx->CCER = tmpccer; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TI3_Config +* Description : Configure the TI3 as Input. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_ICPolarity : The Input Polarity. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_ICPolarity_Rising +* - TIM_ICPolarity_Falling +* - TIM_ICSelection: specifies the input to be used. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_ICSelection_DirectTI: TIM Input 3 is selected to +* be connected to IC3. +* - TIM_ICSelection_IndirectTI: TIM Input 3 is selected to +* be connected to IC4. +* - TIM_ICSelection_TRC: TIM Input 3 is selected to be +* connected to TRC. +* - TIM_ICFilter: Specifies the Input Capture Filter. +* This parameter must be a value between 0x00 and 0x0F. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +static void TI3_Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_ICPolarity, u16 TIM_ICSelection, + u16 TIM_ICFilter) +{ + u16 tmpccmr2 = 0, tmpccer = 0, tmp = 0; + + /* Disable the Channel 3: Reset the CC3E Bit */ + TIMx->CCER &= CCER_CC3E_Reset; + + tmpccmr2 = TIMx->CCMR2; + tmpccer = TIMx->CCER; + tmp = (u16)(TIM_ICPolarity << 8); + + /* Select the Input and set the filter */ + tmpccmr2 &= CCMR_CC13S_Mask & CCMR_IC13F_Mask; + tmpccmr2 |= TIM_ICSelection | (u16)(TIM_ICFilter << 4); + + /* Select the Polarity and set the CC3E Bit */ + tmpccer &= CCER_CC3P_Reset; + tmpccer |= tmp | CCER_CC3E_Set; + + /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 and CCER registers */ + TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmr2; + TIMx->CCER = tmpccer; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : TI4_Config +* Description : Configure the TI1 as Input. +* Input : - TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 to select the TIM +* peripheral. +* - TIM_ICPolarity : The Input Polarity. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_ICPolarity_Rising +* - TIM_ICPolarity_Falling +* - TIM_ICSelection: specifies the input to be used. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - TIM_ICSelection_DirectTI: TIM Input 4 is selected to +* be connected to IC4. +* - TIM_ICSelection_IndirectTI: TIM Input 4 is selected to +* be connected to IC3. +* - TIM_ICSelection_TRC: TIM Input 4 is selected to be +* connected to TRC. +* - TIM_ICFilter: Specifies the Input Capture Filter. +* This parameter must be a value between 0x00 and 0x0F. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +static void TI4_Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, u16 TIM_ICPolarity, u16 TIM_ICSelection, + u16 TIM_ICFilter) +{ + u16 tmpccmr2 = 0, tmpccer = 0, tmp = 0; + + /* Disable the Channel 4: Reset the CC4E Bit */ + TIMx->CCER &= CCER_CC4E_Reset; + + tmpccmr2 = TIMx->CCMR2; + tmpccer = TIMx->CCER; + tmp = (u16)(TIM_ICPolarity << 12); + + /* Select the Input and set the filter */ + tmpccmr2 &= CCMR_CC24S_Mask & CCMR_IC24F_Mask; + tmpccmr2 |= (u16)(TIM_ICSelection << 8) | (u16)(TIM_ICFilter << 12); + + /* Select the Polarity and set the CC4E Bit */ + tmpccer &= CCER_CC4P_Reset; + tmpccer |= tmp | CCER_CC4E_Set; + + /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 and CCER registers */ + TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmr2; + TIMx->CCER = tmpccer ; +} + +/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_usart.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_usart.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..baf9c47 --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_usart.c @@ -0,0 +1,1001 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ******************** +* File Name : stm32f10x_usart.c +* Author : MCD Application Team +* Version : V2.0.2 +* Date : 07/11/2008 +* Description : This file provides all the USART firmware functions. +******************************************************************************** +* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS +* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME. +* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, +* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE +* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING +* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS. +*******************************************************************************/ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32f10x_usart.h" +#include "stm32f10x_rcc.h" + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* USART UE Mask */ +#define CR1_UE_Set ((u16)0x2000) /* USART Enable Mask */ +#define CR1_UE_Reset ((u16)0xDFFF) /* USART Disable Mask */ + +/* USART WakeUp Method */ +#define CR1_WAKE_Mask ((u16)0xF7FF) /* USART WakeUp Method Mask */ + +/* USART RWU Mask */ +#define CR1_RWU_Set ((u16)0x0002) /* USART mute mode Enable Mask */ +#define CR1_RWU_Reset ((u16)0xFFFD) /* USART mute mode Enable Mask */ + +#define CR1_SBK_Set ((u16)0x0001) /* USART Break Character send Mask */ + +#define CR1_CLEAR_Mask ((u16)0xE9F3) /* USART CR1 Mask */ + +#define CR2_Address_Mask ((u16)0xFFF0) /* USART address Mask */ + +/* USART LIN Mask */ +#define CR2_LINEN_Set ((u16)0x4000) /* USART LIN Enable Mask */ +#define CR2_LINEN_Reset ((u16)0xBFFF) /* USART LIN Disable Mask */ + +/* USART LIN Break detection */ +#define CR2_LBDL_Mask ((u16)0xFFDF) /* USART LIN Break detection Mask */ + +#define CR2_STOP_CLEAR_Mask ((u16)0xCFFF) /* USART CR2 STOP Bits Mask */ +#define CR2_CLOCK_CLEAR_Mask ((u16)0xF0FF) /* USART CR2 Clock Mask */ + +/* USART SC Mask */ +#define CR3_SCEN_Set ((u16)0x0020) /* USART SC Enable Mask */ +#define CR3_SCEN_Reset ((u16)0xFFDF) /* USART SC Disable Mask */ + +/* USART SC NACK Mask */ +#define CR3_NACK_Set ((u16)0x0010) /* USART SC NACK Enable Mask */ +#define CR3_NACK_Reset ((u16)0xFFEF) /* USART SC NACK Disable Mask */ + +/* USART Half-Duplex Mask */ +#define CR3_HDSEL_Set ((u16)0x0008) /* USART Half-Duplex Enable Mask */ +#define CR3_HDSEL_Reset ((u16)0xFFF7) /* USART Half-Duplex Disable Mask */ + +/* USART IrDA Mask */ +#define CR3_IRLP_Mask ((u16)0xFFFB) /* USART IrDA LowPower mode Mask */ + +#define CR3_CLEAR_Mask ((u16)0xFCFF) /* USART CR3 Mask */ + +/* USART IrDA Mask */ +#define CR3_IREN_Set ((u16)0x0002) /* USART IrDA Enable Mask */ +#define CR3_IREN_Reset ((u16)0xFFFD) /* USART IrDA Disable Mask */ + +#define GTPR_LSB_Mask ((u16)0x00FF) /* Guard Time Register LSB Mask */ +#define GTPR_MSB_Mask ((u16)0xFF00) /* Guard Time Register MSB Mask */ + +#define IT_Mask ((u16)0x001F) /* USART Interrupt Mask */ + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : USART_DeInit +* Description : Deinitializes the USARTx peripheral registers to their +* default reset values. +* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void USART_DeInit(USART_TypeDef* USARTx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + + switch (*(u32*)&USARTx) + { + case USART1_BASE: + RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_USART1, ENABLE); + RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_USART1, DISABLE); + break; + + case USART2_BASE: + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_USART2, ENABLE); + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_USART2, DISABLE); + break; + + case USART3_BASE: + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_USART3, ENABLE); + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_USART3, DISABLE); + break; + + case UART4_BASE: + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_UART4, ENABLE); + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_UART4, DISABLE); + break; + + case UART5_BASE: + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_UART5, ENABLE); + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_UART5, DISABLE); + break; + + default: + break; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : USART_Init +* Description : Initializes the USARTx peripheral according to the specified +* parameters in the USART_InitStruct . +* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. +* - USART_InitStruct: pointer to a USART_InitTypeDef structure +* that contains the configuration information for the +* specified USART peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void USART_Init(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, USART_InitTypeDef* USART_InitStruct) +{ + u32 tmpreg = 0x00, apbclock = 0x00; + u32 integerdivider = 0x00; + u32 fractionaldivider = 0x00; + u32 usartxbase = 0; + RCC_ClocksTypeDef RCC_ClocksStatus; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_USART_BAUDRATE(USART_InitStruct->USART_BaudRate)); + assert_param(IS_USART_WORD_LENGTH(USART_InitStruct->USART_WordLength)); + assert_param(IS_USART_STOPBITS(USART_InitStruct->USART_StopBits)); + assert_param(IS_USART_PARITY(USART_InitStruct->USART_Parity)); + assert_param(IS_USART_MODE(USART_InitStruct->USART_Mode)); + assert_param(IS_USART_HARDWARE_FLOW_CONTROL(USART_InitStruct->USART_HardwareFlowControl)); + /* The hardware flow control is available only for USART1, USART2 and USART3 */ + assert_param(IS_USART_PERIPH_HFC(USARTx, USART_InitStruct->USART_HardwareFlowControl)); + + usartxbase = (*(u32*)&USARTx); + +/*---------------------------- USART CR2 Configuration -----------------------*/ + tmpreg = USARTx->CR2; + /* Clear STOP[13:12] bits */ + tmpreg &= CR2_STOP_CLEAR_Mask; + + /* Configure the USART Stop Bits, Clock, CPOL, CPHA and LastBit ------------*/ + /* Set STOP[13:12] bits according to USART_StopBits value */ + tmpreg |= (u32)USART_InitStruct->USART_StopBits; + + /* Write to USART CR2 */ + USARTx->CR2 = (u16)tmpreg; + +/*---------------------------- USART CR1 Configuration -----------------------*/ + tmpreg = USARTx->CR1; + /* Clear M, PCE, PS, TE and RE bits */ + tmpreg &= CR1_CLEAR_Mask; + + /* Configure the USART Word Length, Parity and mode ----------------------- */ + /* Set the M bits according to USART_WordLength value */ + /* Set PCE and PS bits according to USART_Parity value */ + /* Set TE and RE bits according to USART_Mode value */ + tmpreg |= (u32)USART_InitStruct->USART_WordLength | USART_InitStruct->USART_Parity | + USART_InitStruct->USART_Mode; + + /* Write to USART CR1 */ + USARTx->CR1 = (u16)tmpreg; + +/*---------------------------- USART CR3 Configuration -----------------------*/ + tmpreg = USARTx->CR3; + /* Clear CTSE and RTSE bits */ + tmpreg &= CR3_CLEAR_Mask; + + /* Configure the USART HFC -------------------------------------------------*/ + /* Set CTSE and RTSE bits according to USART_HardwareFlowControl value */ + tmpreg |= USART_InitStruct->USART_HardwareFlowControl; + + /* Write to USART CR3 */ + USARTx->CR3 = (u16)tmpreg; + +/*---------------------------- USART BRR Configuration -----------------------*/ + /* Configure the USART Baud Rate -------------------------------------------*/ + RCC_GetClocksFreq(&RCC_ClocksStatus); + if (usartxbase == USART1_BASE) + { + apbclock = RCC_ClocksStatus.PCLK2_Frequency; + } + else + { + apbclock = RCC_ClocksStatus.PCLK1_Frequency; + } + + /* Determine the integer part */ + integerdivider = ((0x19 * apbclock) / (0x04 * (USART_InitStruct->USART_BaudRate))); + tmpreg = (integerdivider / 0x64) << 0x04; + + /* Determine the fractional part */ + fractionaldivider = integerdivider - (0x64 * (tmpreg >> 0x04)); + tmpreg |= ((((fractionaldivider * 0x10) + 0x32) / 0x64)) & ((u8)0x0F); + + /* Write to USART BRR */ + USARTx->BRR = (u16)tmpreg; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : USART_StructInit +* Description : Fills each USART_InitStruct member with its default value. +* Input : - USART_InitStruct: pointer to a USART_InitTypeDef structure +* which will be initialized. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void USART_StructInit(USART_InitTypeDef* USART_InitStruct) +{ + /* USART_InitStruct members default value */ + USART_InitStruct->USART_BaudRate = 9600; + USART_InitStruct->USART_WordLength = USART_WordLength_8b; + USART_InitStruct->USART_StopBits = USART_StopBits_1; + USART_InitStruct->USART_Parity = USART_Parity_No ; + USART_InitStruct->USART_Mode = USART_Mode_Rx | USART_Mode_Tx; + USART_InitStruct->USART_HardwareFlowControl = USART_HardwareFlowControl_None; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : USART_ClockInit +* Description : Initializes the USARTx peripheral Clock according to the +* specified parameters in the USART_ClockInitStruct . +* Input : - USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 to select the USART peripheral. +* Note: The Smart Card mode is not available for UART4 and UART5. +* - USART_ClockInitStruct: pointer to a USART_ClockInitTypeDef +* structure that contains the configuration information for +* the specified USART peripheral. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void USART_ClockInit(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, USART_ClockInitTypeDef* USART_ClockInitStruct) +{ + u32 tmpreg = 0x00; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_123_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_USART_CLOCK(USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_Clock)); + assert_param(IS_USART_CPOL(USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_CPOL)); + assert_param(IS_USART_CPHA(USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_CPHA)); + assert_param(IS_USART_LASTBIT(USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_LastBit)); + +/*---------------------------- USART CR2 Configuration -----------------------*/ + tmpreg = USARTx->CR2; + /* Clear CLKEN, CPOL, CPHA and LBCL bits */ + tmpreg &= CR2_CLOCK_CLEAR_Mask; + + /* Configure the USART Clock, CPOL, CPHA and LastBit ------------*/ + /* Set CLKEN bit according to USART_Clock value */ + /* Set CPOL bit according to USART_CPOL value */ + /* Set CPHA bit according to USART_CPHA value */ + /* Set LBCL bit according to USART_LastBit value */ + tmpreg |= (u32)USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_Clock | USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_CPOL | + USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_CPHA | USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_LastBit; + + /* Write to USART CR2 */ + USARTx->CR2 = (u16)tmpreg; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : USART_ClockStructInit +* Description : Fills each USART_ClockInitStruct member with its default value. +* Input : - USART_ClockInitStruct: pointer to a USART_ClockInitTypeDef +* structure which will be initialized. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void USART_ClockStructInit(USART_ClockInitTypeDef* USART_ClockInitStruct) +{ + /* USART_ClockInitStruct members default value */ + USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_Clock = USART_Clock_Disable; + USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_CPOL = USART_CPOL_Low; + USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_CPHA = USART_CPHA_1Edge; + USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_LastBit = USART_LastBit_Disable; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : USART_Cmd +* Description : Enables or disables the specified USART peripheral. +* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. +* : - NewState: new state of the USARTx peripheral. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void USART_Cmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected USART by setting the UE bit in the CR1 register */ + USARTx->CR1 |= CR1_UE_Set; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected USART by clearing the UE bit in the CR1 register */ + USARTx->CR1 &= CR1_UE_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : USART_ITConfig +* Description : Enables or disables the specified USART interrupts. +* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. +* - USART_IT: specifies the USART interrupt sources to be +* enabled or disabled. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - USART_IT_CTS: CTS change interrupt (not available for +* UART4 and UART5) +* - USART_IT_LBD: LIN Break detection interrupt +* - USART_IT_TXE: Tansmit Data Register empty interrupt +* - USART_IT_TC: Transmission complete interrupt +* - USART_IT_RXNE: Receive Data register not empty +* interrupt +* - USART_IT_IDLE: Idle line detection interrupt +* - USART_IT_PE: Parity Error interrupt +* - USART_IT_ERR: Error interrupt(Frame error, noise +* error, overrun error) +* - NewState: new state of the specified USARTx interrupts. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void USART_ITConfig(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, u16 USART_IT, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + u32 usartreg = 0x00, itpos = 0x00, itmask = 0x00; + u32 usartxbase = 0x00; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_USART_CONFIG_IT(USART_IT)); + assert_param(IS_USART_PERIPH_IT(USARTx, USART_IT)); /* The CTS interrupt is not available for UART4 and UART5 */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + usartxbase = (*(u32*)&(USARTx)); + + /* Get the USART register index */ + usartreg = (((u8)USART_IT) >> 0x05); + + /* Get the interrupt position */ + itpos = USART_IT & IT_Mask; + + itmask = (((u32)0x01) << itpos); + + if (usartreg == 0x01) /* The IT is in CR1 register */ + { + usartxbase += 0x0C; + } + else if (usartreg == 0x02) /* The IT is in CR2 register */ + { + usartxbase += 0x10; + } + else /* The IT is in CR3 register */ + { + usartxbase += 0x14; + } + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + *(vu32*)usartxbase |= itmask; + } + else + { + *(vu32*)usartxbase &= ~itmask; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : USART_DMACmd +* Description : Enables or disables the USART’s DMA interface. +* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - USART1, USART2, USART3 or UART4. +* Note: The DMA mode is not available for UART5. +* - USART_DMAReq: specifies the DMA request. +* This parameter can be any combination of the following values: +* - USART_DMAReq_Tx: USART DMA transmit request +* - USART_DMAReq_Rx: USART DMA receive request +* - NewState: new state of the DMA Request sources. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void USART_DMACmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, u16 USART_DMAReq, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_1234_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_USART_DMAREQ(USART_DMAReq)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the DMA transfer for selected requests by setting the DMAT and/or + DMAR bits in the USART CR3 register */ + USARTx->CR3 |= USART_DMAReq; + } + else + { + /* Disable the DMA transfer for selected requests by clearing the DMAT and/or + DMAR bits in the USART CR3 register */ + USARTx->CR3 &= (u16)~USART_DMAReq; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : USART_SetAddress +* Description : Sets the address of the USART node. +* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. +* - USART_Address: Indicates the address of the USART node. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void USART_SetAddress(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, u8 USART_Address) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_USART_ADDRESS(USART_Address)); + + /* Clear the USART address */ + USARTx->CR2 &= CR2_Address_Mask; + /* Set the USART address node */ + USARTx->CR2 |= USART_Address; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : USART_WakeUpConfig +* Description : Selects the USART WakeUp method. +* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. +* - USART_WakeUp: specifies the USART wakeup method. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - USART_WakeUp_IdleLine: WakeUp by an idle line detection +* - USART_WakeUp_AddressMark: WakeUp by an address mark +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void USART_WakeUpConfig(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, u16 USART_WakeUp) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_USART_WAKEUP(USART_WakeUp)); + + USARTx->CR1 &= CR1_WAKE_Mask; + USARTx->CR1 |= USART_WakeUp; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : USART_ReceiverWakeUpCmd +* Description : Determines if the USART is in mute mode or not. +* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. +* - NewState: new state of the USART mute mode. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void USART_ReceiverWakeUpCmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the USART mute mode by setting the RWU bit in the CR1 register */ + USARTx->CR1 |= CR1_RWU_Set; + } + else + { + /* Disable the USART mute mode by clearing the RWU bit in the CR1 register */ + USARTx->CR1 &= CR1_RWU_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : USART_LINBreakDetectLengthConfig +* Description : Sets the USART LIN Break detection length. +* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. +* - USART_LINBreakDetectLength: specifies the LIN break +* detection length. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - USART_LINBreakDetectLength_10b: 10-bit break detection +* - USART_LINBreakDetectLength_11b: 11-bit break detection +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void USART_LINBreakDetectLengthConfig(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, u16 USART_LINBreakDetectLength) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_USART_LIN_BREAK_DETECT_LENGTH(USART_LINBreakDetectLength)); + + USARTx->CR2 &= CR2_LBDL_Mask; + USARTx->CR2 |= USART_LINBreakDetectLength; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : USART_LINCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the USART’s LIN mode. +* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. +* - NewState: new state of the USART LIN mode. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void USART_LINCmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the LIN mode by setting the LINEN bit in the CR2 register */ + USARTx->CR2 |= CR2_LINEN_Set; + } + else + { + /* Disable the LIN mode by clearing the LINEN bit in the CR2 register */ + USARTx->CR2 &= CR2_LINEN_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : USART_SendData +* Description : Transmits single data through the USARTx peripheral. +* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. +* - Data: the data to transmit. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void USART_SendData(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, u16 Data) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_USART_DATA(Data)); + + /* Transmit Data */ + USARTx->DR = (Data & (u16)0x01FF); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : USART_ReceiveData +* Description : Returns the most recent received data by the USARTx peripheral. +* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. +* Output : None +* Return : The received data. +*******************************************************************************/ +u16 USART_ReceiveData(USART_TypeDef* USARTx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + + /* Receive Data */ + return (u16)(USARTx->DR & (u16)0x01FF); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : USART_SendBreak +* Description : Transmits break characters. +* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void USART_SendBreak(USART_TypeDef* USARTx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + + /* Send break characters */ + USARTx->CR1 |= CR1_SBK_Set; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : USART_SetGuardTime +* Description : Sets the specified USART guard time. +* Input : - USARTx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the USART +* peripheral. +* Note: The guard time bits are not available for UART4 and UART5. +* - USART_GuardTime: specifies the guard time. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void USART_SetGuardTime(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, u8 USART_GuardTime) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_123_PERIPH(USARTx)); + + /* Clear the USART Guard time */ + USARTx->GTPR &= GTPR_LSB_Mask; + /* Set the USART guard time */ + USARTx->GTPR |= (u16)((u16)USART_GuardTime << 0x08); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : USART_SetPrescaler +* Description : Sets the system clock prescaler. +* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. +* Note: The function is used for IrDA mode with UART4 and UART5. +* - USART_Prescaler: specifies the prescaler clock. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void USART_SetPrescaler(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, u8 USART_Prescaler) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + + /* Clear the USART prescaler */ + USARTx->GTPR &= GTPR_MSB_Mask; + /* Set the USART prescaler */ + USARTx->GTPR |= USART_Prescaler; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : USART_SmartCardCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the USART’s Smart Card mode. +* Input : - USARTx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the USART +* peripheral. +* Note: The Smart Card mode is not available for UART4 and UART5. +* - NewState: new state of the Smart Card mode. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void USART_SmartCardCmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_123_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the SC mode by setting the SCEN bit in the CR3 register */ + USARTx->CR3 |= CR3_SCEN_Set; + } + else + { + /* Disable the SC mode by clearing the SCEN bit in the CR3 register */ + USARTx->CR3 &= CR3_SCEN_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : USART_SmartCardNACKCmd +* Description : Enables or disables NACK transmission. +* Input : - USARTx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the USART +* peripheral. +* Note: The Smart Card mode is not available for UART4 and UART5. +* - NewState: new state of the NACK transmission. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void USART_SmartCardNACKCmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_123_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the NACK transmission by setting the NACK bit in the CR3 register */ + USARTx->CR3 |= CR3_NACK_Set; + } + else + { + /* Disable the NACK transmission by clearing the NACK bit in the CR3 register */ + USARTx->CR3 &= CR3_NACK_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : USART_HalfDuplexCmd +* Description : Enables or disables the USART’s Half Duplex communication. +* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. +* - NewState: new state of the USART Communication. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void USART_HalfDuplexCmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the Half-Duplex mode by setting the HDSEL bit in the CR3 register */ + USARTx->CR3 |= CR3_HDSEL_Set; + } + else + { + /* Disable the Half-Duplex mode by clearing the HDSEL bit in the CR3 register */ + USARTx->CR3 &= CR3_HDSEL_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : USART_IrDAConfig +* Description : Configures the USART’s IrDA interface. +* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. +* - USART_IrDAMode: specifies the IrDA mode. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - USART_IrDAMode_LowPower +* - USART_IrDAMode_Normal +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void USART_IrDAConfig(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, u16 USART_IrDAMode) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_USART_IRDA_MODE(USART_IrDAMode)); + + USARTx->CR3 &= CR3_IRLP_Mask; + USARTx->CR3 |= USART_IrDAMode; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : USART_IrDACmd +* Description : Enables or disables the USART’s IrDA interface. +* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. +* - NewState: new state of the IrDA mode. +* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void USART_IrDACmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the IrDA mode by setting the IREN bit in the CR3 register */ + USARTx->CR3 |= CR3_IREN_Set; + } + else + { + /* Disable the IrDA mode by clearing the IREN bit in the CR3 register */ + USARTx->CR3 &= CR3_IREN_Reset; + } +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : USART_GetFlagStatus +* Description : Checks whether the specified USART flag is set or not. +* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. +* - USART_FLAG: specifies the flag to check. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - USART_FLAG_CTS: CTS Change flag (not available for +* UART4 and UART5) +* - USART_FLAG_LBD: LIN Break detection flag +* - USART_FLAG_TXE: Transmit data register empty flag +* - USART_FLAG_TC: Transmission Complete flag +* - USART_FLAG_RXNE: Receive data register not empty flag +* - USART_FLAG_IDLE: Idle Line detection flag +* - USART_FLAG_ORE: OverRun Error flag +* - USART_FLAG_NE: Noise Error flag +* - USART_FLAG_FE: Framing Error flag +* - USART_FLAG_PE: Parity Error flag +* Output : None +* Return : The new state of USART_FLAG (SET or RESET). +*******************************************************************************/ +FlagStatus USART_GetFlagStatus(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, u16 USART_FLAG) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_USART_FLAG(USART_FLAG)); + assert_param(IS_USART_PERIPH_FLAG(USARTx, USART_FLAG)); /* The CTS flag is not available for UART4 and UART5 */ + + if ((USARTx->SR & USART_FLAG) != (u16)RESET) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + return bitstatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : USART_ClearFlag +* Description : Clears the USARTx's pending flags. +* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. +* - USART_FLAG: specifies the flag to clear. +* This parameter can be any combination of the following values: +* - USART_FLAG_CTS: CTS Change flag (not available for +* UART4 and UART5). +* - USART_FLAG_LBD: LIN Break detection flag. +* - USART_FLAG_TC: Transmission Complete flag. +* - USART_FLAG_RXNE: Receive data register not empty flag. +* +* Notes: +* - PE (Parity error), FE (Framing error), NE (Noise error), +* ORE (OverRun error) and IDLE (Idle line detected) +* flags are cleared by software sequence: a read +* operation to USART_SR register (USART_GetFlagStatus()) +* followed by a read operation to USART_DR register +* (USART_ReceiveData()). +* - RXNE flag can be also cleared by a read to the +* USART_DR register (USART_ReceiveData()). +* - TC flag can be also cleared by software sequence: a +* read operation to USART_SR register +* (USART_GetFlagStatus()) followed by a write operation +* to USART_DR register (USART_SendData()). +* - TXE flag is cleared only by a write to the USART_DR +* register (USART_SendData()). +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void USART_ClearFlag(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, u16 USART_FLAG) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_USART_CLEAR_FLAG(USART_FLAG)); + assert_param(IS_USART_PERIPH_FLAG(USARTx, USART_FLAG)); /* The CTS flag is not available for UART4 and UART5 */ + + USARTx->SR = (u16)~USART_FLAG; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : USART_GetITStatus +* Description : Checks whether the specified USART interrupt has occurred or not. +* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. +* - USART_IT: specifies the USART interrupt source to check. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - USART_IT_CTS: CTS change interrupt (not available for +* UART4 and UART5) +* - USART_IT_LBD: LIN Break detection interrupt +* - USART_IT_TXE: Tansmit Data Register empty interrupt +* - USART_IT_TC: Transmission complete interrupt +* - USART_IT_RXNE: Receive Data register not empty +* interrupt +* - USART_IT_IDLE: Idle line detection interrupt +* - USART_IT_ORE: OverRun Error interrupt +* - USART_IT_NE: Noise Error interrupt +* - USART_IT_FE: Framing Error interrupt +* - USART_IT_PE: Parity Error interrupt +* Output : None +* Return : The new state of USART_IT (SET or RESET). +*******************************************************************************/ +ITStatus USART_GetITStatus(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, u16 USART_IT) +{ + u32 bitpos = 0x00, itmask = 0x00, usartreg = 0x00; + ITStatus bitstatus = RESET; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_USART_GET_IT(USART_IT)); + assert_param(IS_USART_PERIPH_IT(USARTx, USART_IT)); /* The CTS interrupt is not available for UART4 and UART5 */ + + /* Get the USART register index */ + usartreg = (((u8)USART_IT) >> 0x05); + + /* Get the interrupt position */ + itmask = USART_IT & IT_Mask; + + itmask = (u32)0x01 << itmask; + + if (usartreg == 0x01) /* The IT is in CR1 register */ + { + itmask &= USARTx->CR1; + } + else if (usartreg == 0x02) /* The IT is in CR2 register */ + { + itmask &= USARTx->CR2; + } + else /* The IT is in CR3 register */ + { + itmask &= USARTx->CR3; + } + + bitpos = USART_IT >> 0x08; + + bitpos = (u32)0x01 << bitpos; + bitpos &= USARTx->SR; + + if ((itmask != (u16)RESET)&&(bitpos != (u16)RESET)) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + + return bitstatus; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : USART_ClearITPendingBit +* Description : Clears the USARTx’s interrupt pending bits. +* Input : - USARTx: Select the USART or the UART peripheral. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. +* - USART_IT: specifies the interrupt pending bit to clear. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - USART_IT_CTS: CTS change interrupt (not available for +* UART4 and UART5) +* - USART_IT_LBD: LIN Break detection interrupt +* - USART_IT_TC: Transmission complete interrupt. +* - USART_IT_RXNE: Receive Data register not empty interrupt. +* +* Notes: +* - PE (Parity error), FE (Framing error), NE (Noise error), +* ORE (OverRun error) and IDLE (Idle line detected) +* pending bits are cleared by software sequence: a read +* operation to USART_SR register (USART_GetITStatus()) +* followed by a read operation to USART_DR register +* (USART_ReceiveData()). +* - RXNE pending bit can be also cleared by a read to the +* USART_DR register (USART_ReceiveData()). +* - TC pending bit can be also cleared by software +* sequence: a read operation to USART_SR register +* (USART_GetITStatus()) followed by a write operation +* to USART_DR register (USART_SendData()). +* - TXE pending bit is cleared only by a write to the +* USART_DR register (USART_SendData()). +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void USART_ClearITPendingBit(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, u16 USART_IT) +{ + u16 bitpos = 0x00, itmask = 0x00; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_USART_CLEAR_IT(USART_IT)); + assert_param(IS_USART_PERIPH_IT(USARTx, USART_IT)); /* The CTS interrupt is not available for UART4 and UART5 */ + + bitpos = USART_IT >> 0x08; + + itmask = (u16)((u16)0x01 << bitpos); + USARTx->SR = (u16)~itmask; +} + +/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_wwdg.c b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_wwdg.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ac9882f --- /dev/null +++ b/stm32lib/src/stm32f10x_wwdg.c @@ -0,0 +1,185 @@ +/******************** (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics ******************** +* File Name : stm32f10x_wwdg.c +* Author : MCD Application Team +* Version : V2.0.2 +* Date : 07/11/2008 +* Description : This file provides all the WWDG firmware functions. +******************************************************************************** +* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS +* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE TIME. +* AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, +* INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING FROM THE +* CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE CODING +* INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS. +*******************************************************************************/ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32f10x_wwdg.h" +#include "stm32f10x_rcc.h" + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* ----------- WWDG registers bit address in the alias region ----------- */ +#define WWDG_OFFSET (WWDG_BASE - PERIPH_BASE) + +/* Alias word address of EWI bit */ +#define CFR_OFFSET (WWDG_OFFSET + 0x04) +#define EWI_BitNumber 0x09 +#define CFR_EWI_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CFR_OFFSET * 32) + (EWI_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* --------------------- WWDG registers bit mask ------------------------ */ +/* CR register bit mask */ +#define CR_WDGA_Set ((u32)0x00000080) + +/* CFR register bit mask */ +#define CFR_WDGTB_Mask ((u32)0xFFFFFE7F) +#define CFR_W_Mask ((u32)0xFFFFFF80) + +#define BIT_Mask ((u8)0x7F) + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : WWDG_DeInit +* Description : Deinitializes the WWDG peripheral registers to their default +* reset values. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void WWDG_DeInit(void) +{ + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_WWDG, ENABLE); + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_WWDG, DISABLE); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : WWDG_SetPrescaler +* Description : Sets the WWDG Prescaler. +* Input : - WWDG_Prescaler: specifies the WWDG Prescaler. +* This parameter can be one of the following values: +* - WWDG_Prescaler_1: WWDG counter clock = (PCLK1/4096)/1 +* - WWDG_Prescaler_2: WWDG counter clock = (PCLK1/4096)/2 +* - WWDG_Prescaler_4: WWDG counter clock = (PCLK1/4096)/4 +* - WWDG_Prescaler_8: WWDG counter clock = (PCLK1/4096)/8 +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void WWDG_SetPrescaler(u32 WWDG_Prescaler) +{ + u32 tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_WWDG_PRESCALER(WWDG_Prescaler)); + + /* Clear WDGTB[1:0] bits */ + tmpreg = WWDG->CFR & CFR_WDGTB_Mask; + + /* Set WDGTB[1:0] bits according to WWDG_Prescaler value */ + tmpreg |= WWDG_Prescaler; + + /* Store the new value */ + WWDG->CFR = tmpreg; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : WWDG_SetWindowValue +* Description : Sets the WWDG window value. +* Input : - WindowValue: specifies the window value to be compared to +* the downcounter. +* This parameter value must be lower than 0x80. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void WWDG_SetWindowValue(u8 WindowValue) +{ + u32 tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_WWDG_WINDOW_VALUE(WindowValue)); + + /* Clear W[6:0] bits */ + tmpreg = WWDG->CFR & CFR_W_Mask; + + /* Set W[6:0] bits according to WindowValue value */ + tmpreg |= WindowValue & BIT_Mask; + + /* Store the new value */ + WWDG->CFR = tmpreg; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : WWDG_EnableIT +* Description : Enables the WWDG Early Wakeup interrupt(EWI). +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void WWDG_EnableIT(void) +{ + *(vu32 *) CFR_EWI_BB = (u32)ENABLE; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : WWDG_SetCounter +* Description : Sets the WWDG counter value. +* Input : - Counter: specifies the watchdog counter value. +* This parameter must be a number between 0x40 and 0x7F. +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void WWDG_SetCounter(u8 Counter) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_WWDG_COUNTER(Counter)); + + /* Write to T[6:0] bits to configure the counter value, no need to do + a read-modify-write; writing a 0 to WDGA bit does nothing */ + WWDG->CR = Counter & BIT_Mask; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : WWDG_Enable +* Description : Enables WWDG and load the counter value. +* - Counter: specifies the watchdog counter value. +* This parameter must be a number between 0x40 and 0x7F. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void WWDG_Enable(u8 Counter) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_WWDG_COUNTER(Counter)); + + WWDG->CR = CR_WDGA_Set | Counter; +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : WWDG_GetFlagStatus +* Description : Checks whether the Early Wakeup interrupt flag is set or not. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : The new state of the Early Wakeup interrupt flag (SET or RESET) +*******************************************************************************/ +FlagStatus WWDG_GetFlagStatus(void) +{ + return (FlagStatus)(WWDG->SR); +} + +/******************************************************************************* +* Function Name : WWDG_ClearFlag +* Description : Clears Early Wakeup interrupt flag. +* Input : None +* Output : None +* Return : None +*******************************************************************************/ +void WWDG_ClearFlag(void) +{ + WWDG->SR = (u32)RESET; +} + +/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2008 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ -- cgit v1.2.3